IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | (music playing)
| | 00:04 | Hello and welcome to iPhone and iPod touch
Essential Training. I'm Garrick Chow.
| | 00:09 | The iPhone is one of the most powerful,
popular, and easy-to-use smartphones
| | 00:11 | on the market today.
| | 00:13 | It's essentially a small computer
you can hold in the palm of your hand.
| | 00:16 | The iPod touch is basically an iPhone
without the phone
| | 00:19 | running the same operating system and apps.
| | 00:22 | In this course, we're going to take a detailed
look at all the most important features
| | 00:25 | of these incredibly useful devices.
| | 00:27 | We'll start off by exploring the external controls
and the touchscreen interface,
| | 00:30 | getting up to speed with essential skills,
like opening and closing apps,
| | 00:34 | and typing with the keyless keyboard.
| | 00:36 | Then we'll cover the most important
and frequently used applications in depth
| | 00:41 | from checking your email with Mail, browsing
the web with Safari, enjoying music and videos,
| | 00:49 | and of course, using
the incredibly robust phone features.
| | 00:51 | We'll also take a look at how to
find and install any of over 700,000
| | 00:57 | additional apps from the App Store
to further extend and enhance
| | 01:00 | the capabilities of your device.
| | 01:02 | And we'll wrap up with an in-depth look
at important preferences, and settings
| | 01:05 | as well as tips for troubleshooting
your device when necessary.
| | 01:09 | This course will show you all the essential skills
you'll need to not just use your device,
| | 01:12 | but to use it effectively while taking advantage
of all the powerful features it has to offer.
| | 01:17 | Now, let's get started with iPhone
and iPod touch Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. The BasicsA tour around the iPhone and iPod touch| 00:00 | Let's begin by familiarizing ourselves
with the layout of the iPhone, and iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | If you're a brand-new iPhone or iPod touch user,
you'll definitely want to pay attention here
| | 00:08 | because much of what I'm showing you
will be referenced throughout this course.
| | 00:12 | We'll start at the top of the iPhone 5,
and work our way down.
| | 00:15 | The lone button at the top of the iPhone
is the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 00:18 | This is the button that lets you
lock the screen when the phone is on,
| | 00:22 | so you don't accidently tap
or activate any apps or other features.
| | 00:25 | When the phone is on, press the
Sleep/Wake button once to lock the screen.
| | 00:29 | At this point, the phone is still on and can still
receive calls, text messages and so on,
| | 00:33 | but its using very little power with the screen off.
| | 00:36 | And this way, you can't accidentally
hit any on-screen buttons
| | 00:38 | because there are no on-screen buttons
when the screen is off.
| | 00:42 | Putting the phone to sleep,
or locking the screen as it's also referred to,
| | 00:45 | is always just one press of the button.
| | 00:47 | Unlocking the screen actually happens in two parts.
| | 00:50 | First, press the Sleep/Wake button again.
| | 00:52 | The screen comes back on.
| | 00:54 | But to let your iPhone or iPod touch know
you didn't press the button by accident,
| | 00:57 | you have to drag your finger
across the area that says Slide to Unlock.
| | 01:01 | This is really an ingenious system
because there's very little chance
| | 01:04 | that both the Sleep/Wake button and
the Slide to Unlock action will happen unintentionally.
| | 01:09 | The Sleep/Wake button is also the button
to turn the phone completely off and back on again.
| | 01:13 | Where you just press the button and release it
to lock and unlock the phone,
| | 01:16 | to turn the phone off,
hold down the button for about three seconds.
| | 01:19 | You'll see this message that says 'Slide to power off.'
| | 01:23 | Again, this is to make sure
that you don't accidentally turn the phone off.
| | 01:27 | Just slide your finger across the display
and the phone will power down.
| | 01:30 | In just a few moments,
the phone will be completely off
| | 01:33 | and unable to receive calls, text messages,
emails, or any other communications.
| | 01:38 | Anyone calling your phone while it's off
will be sent directly to your voicemail.
| | 01:42 | To turn the phone back on, just hold the
Sleep/Wake button again for about three seconds.
| | 01:45 | Just so you know, so far, everything
about the Sleep/Wake button I've shown you
| | 01:50 | is how the button works
on the iPod touch as well.
| | 01:53 | But on the iPhone, the Sleep/Wake button
is also used to manage incoming calls.
| | 01:57 | For instance, you can use it to send
incoming calls directly to your voicemail,
| | 01:59 | but the iPod touch, not being a phone,
doesn't have this feature.
| | 02:03 | I'll talk more about redirecting and managing
incoming calls in upcoming chapters.
| | 02:06 | Moving down the right side of the iPhone 5,
you'll find the SIM card slot.
| | 02:11 | The SIM card is where your account information
with your cellular provider is stored.
| | 02:15 | In most cases, you'll never have to
access your SIM card,
| | 02:17 | but it's handy to know where it is in case you ever want
to swap out another SIM card in here,
| | 02:21 | or take yours out to put it into another iPhone,
| | 02:23 | which you might need to do
if you have to send your iPhone in for repairs.
| | 02:27 | Since the SIM card has
all your cellular account information,
| | 02:29 | you could put it into any compatible phone
from your cellular provider,
| | 02:32 | and make, and receive calls right away.
| | 02:35 | Moving down the left side of the phone,
we next have the Silencer switch.
| | 02:39 | The sole purpose of this switch
is to put your phone into Silent mode,
| | 02:42 | making it super easy and quick to silence your phone
even when keeping it in your pocket.
| | 02:46 | Below the silencer are the volume control buttons.
| | 02:50 | Depending on what you're doing on the phone,
the volume control buttons can do different things.
| | 02:53 | If you're listening to music or watching a video,
the volume control can turn the volume up and down.
| | 02:58 | If you're on a call,
it controls the level of the caller's volume.
| | 03:02 | In all other cases, it adjusts the volume
of your ringtone or alarms.
| | 03:05 | The only other button on the iPhone
is on its front at the bottom.
| | 03:08 | This is the Home button.
| | 03:09 | And even though it's just one button,
it's a very important one
| | 03:12 | so it has its own movie in this chapter.
| | 03:15 | Now, let's look at the bottom of the phone.
| | 03:18 | In the center is the connector where you
connect the cable to attach your iPhone
| | 03:20 | or iPod touch to your computer.
| | 03:23 | With the iPhone 5 and the
5th generation iPod touch,
| | 03:25 | Apple introduced a new type of connector
called Lightning.
| | 03:28 | All the previous generation of iPhone and iPod touchs
use the older wide dock connector,
| | 03:33 | but for this new line,
Apple has implemented the smaller connector,
| | 03:36 | which fits into your iPhone in either direction.
| | 03:39 | But I point this out because if you're upgrading
from a previous iPhone model,
| | 03:42 | your old cables won't work with the new iPhone
| | 03:44 | unless you get an adapter or other new cables.
| | 03:47 | To the right of the connector is the built-in speaker
for using when you're making
| | 03:50 | speakerphone calls or listening
to other sounds coming from your iPhone.
| | 03:54 | The slightly smaller grille to the
left of the connector is the microphone;
| | 03:57 | again, used for when you're making calls
| | 03:59 | or with applications that record
or monitor incoming sounds.
| | 04:02 | Also, in the bottom of the iPhone
is the headphone microphone jack.
| | 04:06 | This is where you plug in the earbud headset
that came with your phone,
| | 04:09 | or any other third-party headphone set.
| | 04:11 | This is also a microphone jack.
| | 04:13 | So you can use headsets with integrated microphones,
including the headset that comes with the iPhone
| | 04:17 | letting you make calls with your headset as well.
| | 04:19 | This is the first iPhone model where the headphone jack
is on the bottom of the phone.
| | 04:24 | All previous models had it at the top.
| | 04:26 | On the back of the phone, you'll find the main camera
called the iSight camera.
| | 04:29 | To its right is the camera's flash,
which is useful for low light situations,
| | 04:32 | and in between them is an additional microphone.
| | 04:35 | In actuality, the iPhone 5 has three microphones.
| | 04:38 | The third one is hidden in the earpiece
on the front of the phone.
| | 04:42 | The microphones are used for a variety of purposes,
| | 04:44 | including helping to eliminate
background noises during calls,
| | 04:47 | so your voice sounds clearer
to the people you're calling.
| | 04:50 | Also, on the front of the phone
is a front-facing camera,
| | 04:52 | which is this tiny lens
right above the earpiece speaker.
| | 04:55 | It's used for taking self-portraits,
and for using the FaceTime video chatting feature,
| | 04:59 | which we'll look at in a later chapter.
| | 05:01 | That's pretty much all there is
to the exterior of the iPhone.
| | 05:04 | Now, the iPod touch is similar, but there
are some differences. Let's take a look.
| | 05:09 | The 5th generation iPod touch's Sleep/Wake button
is also on the right side at the top edge.
| | 05:14 | In previous models, it was on the left,
but now it matches the iPhone's layout.
| | 05:18 | Because this isn't a phone,
its function is to sleep or wake the device
| | 05:21 | or to turn it off using that combination
of holding down the button for three seconds,
| | 05:25 | and then sliding to turn it off.
| | 05:27 | Similarly, hold down the Sleep/Wake button again
to turn the iPod touch back on.
| | 05:31 | There are no other buttons
on the top of the iPod touch.
| | 05:33 | Again, it's not a phone,
so there's no SIM card slot either.
| | 05:36 | Like on the iPhone 5, the headphone jack
is on the bottom of the iPod touch.
| | 05:40 | This is both a headphone and microphone port
just like on the iPhone.
| | 05:43 | But the earbuds that come with the iPod touch
don't have a built-in microphone,
| | 05:47 | so if you want to be able to get sounds
into your iPod touch,
| | 05:48 | you'll need to buy an aftermarket
headphone microphone set or use the built-in microphone,
| | 05:53 | which is located near the top of the iPod.
| | 05:56 | On the bottom, you'll also find
the Lightning connector as well as the speaker.
| | 05:59 | The iPod touch also has
both rear- and front-facing cameras.
| | 06:02 | So, at this point, it's really very similar
to the iPhone in terms of features.
| | 06:06 | It's like the iPhone without the phone.
| | 06:08 | Other than that, the iPod touch
is just slightly thinner than the iPhone 5,
| | 06:11 | we're talking .05 of an inch.
| | 06:13 | And this dark plastic area on the back
is the Wi-Fi antenna cover,
| | 06:17 | which allows for better Wi-Fi reception.
| | 06:19 | And there's also a small metal disc
that pops out at the bottom
| | 06:21 | to which you can attach the included wrist strap.
| | 06:24 | So, that's your basic tour of the outside
of the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 06:28 | In upcoming movies, we'll start
looking at the essential knowledge needed
| | 06:30 | to start using the phone and its operating system.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| The Home screen and Home button| 00:00 | In this video, I want to look at the Home
button on the iPhone, and the iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | This is the Home button
here on the front of the iPhone
| | 00:07 | and its primary purpose is to immediately
get you back to your Home screen.
| | 00:10 | Now when the screen is locked,
as it currently is here,
| | 00:13 | pressing the Home button
is like pressing the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 00:16 | It activates the screen but you still
have to slide your finger
| | 00:18 | across this area to unlock the phone.
| | 00:20 | This is the Home screen of the iPhone
where you access the various functions
| | 00:24 | and apps that are available.
| | 00:26 | As we'll see later, you can install additional apps,
which can be spread out across multiple screens,
| | 00:30 | which you can access by flicking screens to the left.
| | 00:34 | Pressing the Home button
instantly brings you back to the first and main screen
| | 00:37 | no matter how many screens deep you are.
| | 00:39 | If you're running an app, pressing the Home
button always brings you back to the Home screen.
| | 00:45 | Pressing the Home button while on the Home screen
brings up the Spotlight Search screen
| | 00:48 | where you can search
your entire phone for words or phrases.
| | 00:52 | This is useful for quickly looking up info
in some email,
| | 00:54 | or finding an address for one
of the people in your contacts.
| | 00:57 | Pressing the Home button again
takes you back to the Home screen.
| | 01:01 | Double-clicking the Home button,
meaning giving it two quick clicks,
| | 01:04 | opens up the multitasking bar
at the bottom of the screen,
| | 01:06 | allowing you to switch among different apps.
| | 01:08 | We'll take a closer look at the multitasking bar
in its own movie later in this chapter.
| | 01:12 | Double-clicking the Home button again
closes the multitasking bar
| | 01:15 | and keeps you in whichever app
you're currently using.
| | 01:17 | While we're here on the home screen,
| | 01:19 | I want to take a moment
to discuss how things work here.
| | 01:22 | We've already seen that tapping an icon
opens that app and then you can
| | 01:25 | page through your multiple screens of apps,
if you have multiple screens,
| | 01:28 | by flicking left and right.
| | 01:30 | Notice as I do that, the four icons at the
bottom of the screen stay where they are.
| | 01:34 | This is where you can store up to four apps
that you always want immediate access to
| | 01:37 | no matter what screen of applications you're on.
| | 01:39 | We'll talk about how to customize
your app placement later in this chapter.
| | 01:43 | Across the top of the iPhone's Home screen,
we see the name of the wireless carrier, in this case, AT&T.
| | 01:47 | Next to that, we see the Wi-Fi symbol
indicating I'm currently connected to a WiFi network.
| | 01:52 | You'll see the same thing on the iPod touch.
| | 01:55 | On the iPhone however, you may also see a 4G here
indicating that you're on a 4G cellular network;
| | 02:00 | or possibly the letter E indicating you're
on AT&T's slower EDGE data network;
| | 02:04 | or even LTE if you're on the latest generation
of high-speed cellular network.
| | 02:09 | If you're not in the U.S., you may see other icons
or representations of your wireless carrier's network.
| | 02:14 | On the iPod touch, you'll only ever see
the Wi-Fi symbol if you have Wi-Fi turned on,
| | 02:18 | which we'll talk about how to do
in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:21 | In the center is the current time,
and to the right is the battery indicator,
| | 02:24 | which will show you how much battery time remains
or if you're currently plugged into a charger.
| | 02:28 | Other icons may appear across the top
from time to time, depending on what you're doing.
| | 02:31 | For instance, if you've turned on the
alarm clock function in the Clock app,
| | 02:34 | you'll see a small clock letting you
know that the alarm is set,
| | 02:37 | or if you have a Bluetooth headset connected,
you'll see a Bluetooth icon.
| | 02:41 | I'll be pointing more of these out
as they come up throughout the course.
| | 02:44 | But for now, that's the extent of what
I wanted to cover about the Home button
| | 02:47 | and the Home screen in this movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing apps on the Home screen with folders| 00:00 | Instead of cluttering your device
with screen after screen of dozens of apps,
| | 00:04 | you can group related apps together into folders.
| | 00:07 | To do so, just press and hold down your finger
on any app until they start wiggling.
| | 00:11 | In this mode, you can drag apps around
to rearrange them on screen.
| | 00:15 | But to create a folder,
just drag one app on top of another.
| | 00:21 | That instantly creates a folder,
and your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:23 | even tries to give the folder a logical name.
| | 00:26 | If that name works for you,
just tap anywhere outside the folder to accept it.
| | 00:30 | You can also tap the name and type one of your own.
| | 00:32 | You can then drag up to 10 more apps into
that folder for a total of 12 apps per folder.
| | 00:37 | Click the Home button
when you're done adding items to your folder.
| | 00:40 | From this point, you can then access
the apps in the folder by tapping the folder,
| | 00:44 | and then tapping the app you want to use.
| | 00:46 | If you want to remove an app from a folder at any time,
just touch and hold on the folder,
| | 00:49 | or the apps within the folder,
until the icon start wiggling again.
| | 00:52 | This is also the point where you can
rename the folder if you like,
| | 00:56 | but if you to remove an app from the folder,
just drag it out.
| | 01:00 | But most likely, you'll find the folder
feature extremely useful and beneficial
| | 01:02 | especially as you start to add
more and more apps to your device.
| | 01:06 | So, that's how to create and use folders
on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Running apps and multitasking| 00:00 | Let's take a look at Multitasking in iOS 6.
| | 00:03 | Multitasking allows you to leave
multiple applications running,
| | 00:06 | and quickly switch between them.
| | 00:08 | This allows you to do things like
start playing games exactly where you left off,
| | 00:11 | leave GPS applications running in the background,
| | 00:15 | or have music apps keep playing music
while you perform other tasks on your device.
| | 00:18 | Let's take a look at how this works.
| | 00:20 | I have an app called Spotify on my iPhone.
It's a popular streaming Internet music app.
| | 00:24 | So, here on my iPhone, I can start some music playing,
and once my music is playing,
| | 00:28 | I can start doing other things on my phone
while the music continues to play in the background.
| | 00:33 | I'll press my Home button.
| | 00:35 | And maybe now I want to work on some email,
| | 00:38 | or maybe I want to check the weather.
(music playing)
| | 00:43 | As you can hear,
Spotify continues to play music the entire time.
| | 00:47 | Now, so far, I've been switching
between apps by pressing the Home button
| | 00:50 | to return to the Home screen,
and then tapping the app I want to run.
| | 00:54 | But another way is to use the Multitasking bar.
| | 00:56 | You invoke Multitasking
by double-clicking the Home button.
| | 01:00 | That opens the Multitasking bar
at the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:02 | Here you'll find the icons
for all the apps you've most recently opened.
| | 01:06 | Just tap an app to switch back to it.
| | 01:08 | For example, I'll tap Spotify
| | 01:10 | and I can see the status or progress
of the music that's currently playing,
| | 01:13 | or in this case, I'll just pause it,
| | 01:16 | or I can double-click the Home button again
to go back to my mail,
| | 01:19 | and it brings me back right where I left off.
| | 01:22 | What you're going to find is that
all your most recent apps
| | 01:24 | are going to appear in the Multitasking bar,
| | 01:26 | and you can access them by flicking the bar
to the left and browsing through them.
| | 01:29 | Multitasking also comes in handy when a call comes in,
| | 01:32 | interrupting whatever important work you're doing at that time.
| | 01:34 | For example,
| | 01:38 | let's say I'm playing this game,
| | 01:44 | and a call comes in.
| | 01:46 | Notice the game sort of gets visually shuffled back.
| | 01:48 | I can answer the call, I can have my conversation,
and when I hang up,
| | 01:55 | the last app I was using, in this case this game,
gets shuffled back to the front exactly where I left off.
| | 02:01 | Now, this doesn't mean that every single program here
| | 02:04 | is running in the background
and eating up processing and battery power.
| | 02:07 | First of all, apps have to be optimized
by their creators to support Multitasking,
| | 02:10 | but many app creators have
already implemented this support.
| | 02:14 | Also, the apps shown here in the Multitasking bar
may still have to boot up from the beginning
| | 02:18 | instead of where you left off
if you haven't opened them in a while.
| | 02:21 | Your most recently used apps
should always pick up where you left off though.
| | 02:26 | Another use of the Multitasking bar
is for quitting applications.
| | 02:28 | Occasionally, you'll have an app that starts acting funny
or not working properly,
| | 02:31 | but since current apps are always running,
you may have to force it to quit so you can reboot it.
| | 02:36 | To do this, just hold your finger down
on one of the apps in the Multitasking bar
| | 02:39 | until the icons start to wiggle.
| | 02:41 | Then tap the red close icon on the app
you're having problems with to quit it.
| | 02:44 | You can then close the Multitasking bar,
and try starting the app up again by tapping its icon.
| | 02:51 | The final features of the Multitasking bar
I want to show you can be found
| | 02:53 | by double-clicking the Home button
to invoke Multitasking, and then flicking to the right,
| | 02:58 | revealing music control buttons,
which can control both your iPod music
| | 03:01 | and certain enabled apps like Spotify
when they're running.
| | 03:04 | We'll look at more of these controls
in the chapter on using the iPod part of your phone,
| | 03:08 | but this is where you'll also find the Orientation Lock.
| | 03:11 | Most applications are designed to rotate their displays
when you rotate the phone.
| | 03:14 | For example, if I open mail
and cancel my new message,
| | 03:22 | I can read my mail in both portrait
and landscape orientation.
| | 03:25 | But sometimes you don't want
the content of an app to rotate.
| | 03:29 | For example, if you like to read your
iPhone in bed while lying on your side,
| | 03:33 | you don't want the screen to rotate
into Landscape mode.
| | 03:35 | So, just double-click the Home button
to open the Multitasking bar, flick to the right,
| | 03:41 | and tap the Orientation Lock button.
| | 03:43 | That will lock all apps into Portrait mode.
| | 03:47 | You can see the Orientation Lock icon
at the top of your screen.
| | 03:50 | Now, when I'm in mail and rotate the phone,
the display remains in portrait mode.
| | 03:55 | So, that's how Multitasking works
on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing and controlling your sounds| 00:01 | One of the first things you want to get under control
on your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:03 | are the default sounds and their volume levels.
| | 00:06 | Because you can set and turn on specific
sounds for specific events and actions,
| | 00:10 | you'll want to select or at least
familiarize yourself with these sounds
| | 00:13 | so you know what your phone or iPod touch
is trying to tell you.
| | 00:15 | Locate and tap the Settings icon to open
your System Settings. Then tap Sounds.
| | 00:21 | Because it's a phone, the iPhone has
more Sound settings, beginning with Vibrate.
| | 00:24 | Here, you can determine whether
your phone is going to vibrate when it rings
| | 00:27 | or when it's in Silent mode.
| | 00:30 | Again, the switch on the side of your phone
is used to turn the ringer on and off.
| | 00:33 | Some people like to have the Vibrate feature on
even when the phone is set to ring,
| | 00:37 | so they can feel the phone ringing
in their pocket.
| | 00:39 | Leave Vibrate on Ring set to on in that case.
| | 00:42 | Generally, you'll probably want to keep
Vibrate on Silent on, too.
| | 00:45 | Otherwise, there's no way to know
you're receiving a call
| | 00:47 | unless you're looking at your phone.
| | 00:49 | But even with the phone set to Silent,
it can still make a loud sound
| | 00:51 | if you have Vibrate turned on and have your phone
set on a hard surface like a tabletop,
| | 00:55 | which you probably don't want
if you're in an important meeting.
| | 00:57 | To prevent the phone from making
any sounds, you can turn vibrate off.
| | 01:00 | Again, be aware, this makes it impossible
to know your phone is ringing
| | 01:03 | if you have it silent and stored in your pocket,
so base your settings
| | 01:06 | on the environment you're in.
| | 01:08 | Next, under the Ringer and Alerts section,
we have the Volume slider,
| | 01:12 | which you can use to set the overall volume
of your ringtone and other sounds.
| | 01:15 | Either drag the slider on screen, (ringtone playing)
in which case your phone will play a sample
| | 01:21 | of your ringtone at that particular volume,
or use the volume control buttons
| | 01:24 | on the side of the phone
and you'll see the slider move itself.
| | 01:29 | If the slider doesn't move when you press
the buttons, turn on Change with buttons.
| | 01:32 | Although, some people prefer to keep this off,
so that the volume buttons
| | 01:35 | only control other sounds,
like the volume level of games or movies.
| | 01:38 | This works the same way on the iPod touch,
and this Volume slider controls the volume
| | 01:42 | for the ringtone and all the other sounds
we can turn on and off here below it.
| | 01:46 | Next is the ringtone selector.
| | 01:48 | This is where you determine the sound that plays
when someone calls you.
| | 01:51 | Tap Ringtone to select a different sound.
| | 01:53 | On this screen, you'll find all of
the iPhone's built-in sounds
| | 01:55 | under the Ringtone setting.
| | 01:57 | Any custom ringtones you've created or
purchased appear at the top of the list.
| | 02:01 | You'll also find a section in here called Alert Tones,
which are generally shorter sounds
| | 02:04 | that are used for things like text messages,
incoming mail, and other alerts.
| | 02:09 | At the very top of the screen, you can
select a custom vibration pattern,
| | 02:12 | which can be useful in letting you know
whether you're getting a phone call or a text
| | 02:16 | if you choose different vibration patterns for them.
| | 02:18 | I'll get to that in a moment.
| | 02:19 | To hear a sample of any ringtone, just tap it.
(ringtone playing)
| | 02:27 | Tapping a ringtone makes it your default ringtone.
| | 02:30 | So, make sure you have your preferred ringtone
selected before you leave the screen.
| | 02:33 | In this case, maybe I'll select Old Phone, (ringtone playing)
and then I'll go back to the Sound Settings.
| | 02:41 | The next setting, Text Tone, determines what
sound will play when you get a text message.
| | 02:46 | You get the same selection of sounds
here as you did with ringtones,
| | 02:49 | but the Alert Tones section is listed first.
| | 02:51 | I'll leave my Text Tone as it is.
| | 02:54 | The rest of these options have to do with
what sounds play when certain events occur.
| | 02:58 | You have New Voicemail, New Mail, Sent Mail,
Tweet, Facebook Post,
| | 03:03 | Calendar Alerts, and Reminder Alerts.
| | 03:06 | Just select one and then browse through
the same sounds as before.
| | 03:08 | Note that you can also choose None
if you prefer your device to make no sounds at all
| | 03:12 | when one of these events occurs.
| | 03:15 | The Lock Sound is what you hear when
you press the Sleep/Wake button
| | 03:17 | and Keyboard Clicks are the typing sound you hear
when you're using the iPhone
| | 03:19 | or iPod touch's keyboard.
| | 03:21 | You can turn these two options on or off,
but you can't change their sound.
| | 03:25 | Now I mentioned the ability to set custom vibrations.
| | 03:27 | Let's go back to Ringtones.
| | 03:29 | Here at the top, I'll tap Vibration.
| | 03:32 | With so many people these days having vibrating phones,
| | 03:35 | it sometimes becomes hard to tell whose phone is ringing
| | 03:38 | if everyone in the room's phone is set to vibrate.
| | 03:40 | Here, you can choose from seven different patterns.
(vibrations playing)
| | 03:50 | You can also tap out your own vibration pattern
to really distinguish your phone's alert.
| | 03:53 | Just tap Create New Vibration.
| | 03:55 | In here, tap a rhythm of your choice.
| | 04:01 | Tap Stop to stop the recording,
and then tap Save and give it a name.
| | 04:09 | Now, I have a new custom vibration pattern.
| | 04:13 | So, you can set up custom vibration
patterns for any of these sound types.
| | 04:16 | As we'll see later, you can even assign
custom vibration patterns to specific people
| | 04:20 | in your contact list, which can make it
possible to know who is calling you
| | 04:23 | even if your phone is in your pocket.
| | 04:26 | So, that's the Sound Settings area.
| | 04:27 | Take some time to listen to each sound
so you know what they represent.
| | 04:30 | And as you get used to your phone,
you can come back here
| | 04:33 | and decide whether you want
to hear any of these sounds or not.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Learning finger gestures| 00:01 | One of the most important skills you'll need
to really use the iPhone and iPod touch like a pro
| | 00:04 | is to understand finger gestures.
| | 00:07 | As you know, there are no buttons on the front
of the phone other than the Home button
| | 00:09 | so the majority of the things you'll do are accomplished
| | 00:13 | by tapping, sliding, rotating,
or pinching your fingers on the screen.
| | 00:17 | In this video, I want to go over the basic moves.
| | 00:20 | There are only a few of them, but they're part of the DNA
| | 00:22 | of using the iPhone and iPod touch
and it's essential to really learn them well.
| | 00:27 | The most basic gesture is the tap,
and it's just what it sounds like.
| | 00:29 | You tap a part of the screen to perform some action.
| | 00:32 | For example, I can tap on any of these
applications to run them like Photos.
| | 00:36 | So here I am looking at my photo library.
| | 00:39 | We'll cover how to get pictures into your
iPhone or iPod touch in a later chapter.
| | 00:42 | Here I select the album I want to look at,
by again tapping it.
| | 00:45 | Now I'm looking at the thumbnails
of all the photos in this album.
| | 00:49 | The next gesture is the drag.
| | 00:50 | Again, this is just what it sounds like.
| | 00:52 | To browse through these photos I keep
my finger in contact with the screen
| | 00:55 | and drag the thumbnails up and down.
| | 00:57 | When I run out of room I just lift my finger
and place it near the top of the screen
| | 01:00 | and continue dragging.
| | 01:02 | Now closely associated with the drag gesture is the flick.
| | 01:05 | Dragging over and over again like this can get really tedious,
| | 01:07 | especially if you have a lot of content to scroll through.
| | 01:09 | In those cases lift your finger off the
screen as you reach the end of the drag.
| | 01:13 | Notice the content on the
screen continues to move.
| | 01:16 | The greatest thing about flicking
is that it's speed sensitive
| | 01:19 | so I can flick slowly to browse at a leisurely pace
| | 01:21 | or if I know the photo I want to look at
is somewhere the bottom here,
| | 01:24 | I can flick quickly and the thumbnails go speeding by.
| | 01:27 | Here's a little secret about scrolling
in most iPhone applications.
| | 01:31 | If you tap the top of the screen,
you'll instantly scroll to the very top of the page.
| | 01:34 | This doesn't work in every single iPhone app,
but most of them do work this way.
| | 01:37 | Now let's select a photo by tapping it.
| | 01:40 | The next gesture is the pinch.
| | 01:42 | This is when you touch two fingers,
usually your thumb and index finger, to the screen
| | 01:46 | and either separate them,
which as you can see zooms in on the photo
| | 01:50 | or bring them together which zooms back out.
| | 01:54 | We will refer to this as pinching in and pinching out.
| | 01:56 | It doesn't matter which two fingers you use.
| | 01:58 | I could use my two pinky fingers
to zoom in and out if I wanted to.
| | 02:01 | While zoomed in on a photo
notice I can use the drag gesture
| | 02:05 | as well as the flicking gesture.
| | 02:08 | If I'm not zoomed in, dragging and
flicking takes me from photo to photo.
| | 02:15 | So now we understand the tap, the drag,
the flick, and pinching in and out,
| | 02:18 | which are really the most basic and commonly
used gestures on the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 02:23 | Now there are additional
variations on these moves.
| | 02:25 | For example, a quick double-tap
on an item often zooms in and out on it.
| | 02:29 | Here in photos it zooms in on the picture.
| | 02:31 | If you're browsing a website in Safari,
| | 02:35 | double-tapping a column of text zooms
that column to the width of your screen.
| | 02:39 | There's also multi-finger tapping,
which can be used in apps like Maps.
| | 02:43 | Here, double tapping-zooms in like we'd expect,
| | 02:46 | but to zoom out you single tap with two fingers.
| | 02:49 | Pinching in and out here is available as well.
| | 02:55 | Some apps require you not to tap, but to touch
and hold an on-screen button to make it work.
| | 02:59 | For example, if I touch and hold on any
of the icons on my Home screen
| | 03:02 | that puts them into Organization mode
where I can drag the icons from location to location
| | 03:07 | to rearrange them as I like.
| | 03:09 | We saw how to do this earlier in a movie
on how to rearrange the apps on your Home screen.
| | 03:13 | For now I'll just press the Home button
to turn that off.
| | 03:15 | You might come across other options
that iPhone app developers
| | 03:18 | have programed into their apps
like two-finger gestures, two-finger rotating, and so on.
| | 03:23 | Generally, you'll be taught which gestures to use
by the instructions that come with the app.
| | 03:27 | So there you have the basic
finger gestures you need to know
| | 03:29 | to really use the iPhone and iPod touch efficiently.
| | 03:32 | We'll touch more on various gestures
as we look at specific applications.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting to wi-fi networks| 00:01 | With the iPhone and iPod touch's
ability to let you access your email and surf websites
| | 00:05 | one of the first things you'll most likely want
to do with your device is to get online.
| | 00:09 | Both the iPhone and the iPod touch can
connect to WiFi networks
| | 00:12 | whether they're your home networks
or public networks at coffee shops or airports.
| | 00:16 | Although the iPhone can also get online
via your service provider cellular network
| | 00:20 | connecting to a broadband connection over WiFi
is going to be a much faster Internet experience
| | 00:24 | in most cases and data transferred via WiFi
doesn't count against your cellular data plan.
| | 00:30 | Let's take a look at how to turn on your
iPhone or iPod touch's WiFi capability.
| | 00:34 | Tap the Settings icon to open
your System settings. Then tap WiFi.
| | 00:39 | First, make sure WiFi is turned on.
| | 00:42 | Under Choose a Network you'll see a list
of all the WiFi networks your phone or iPod detects
| | 00:46 | along with an indicator of how strong each one's signal is
| | 00:49 | and whether the network is open
or requires a password.
| | 00:51 | Password protected WiFi networks
have a lock icon next to them.
| | 00:55 | You generally won't find too many non-password
protected WiFi networks these days
| | 00:58 | as most people have figured out
that leaving their networks open
| | 01:02 | can expose them to attacks
or just neighbors leeching off their
| | 01:04 | Internet connection's bandwidth.
| | 01:06 | Tap the network you want to connect to.
| | 01:08 | If a password is required,
enter it here, and then tap Join.
| | 01:15 | You'll see a check mark appear next to
the network you've connected to
| | 01:19 | and that's pretty much all there is
to connecting to a WiFi network.
| | 01:21 | Your iPhone or iPod touch will now remember
this network so the next time you're within its range,
| | 01:25 | it will connect automatically
without you having to select it
| | 01:28 | and enter the password again.
| | 01:30 | Because being connected to a WiFi network
consumes battery power,
| | 01:32 | the iPhone and iPod touch
don't remain constantly connected.
| | 01:36 | So you don't have to worry about
WiFi eating up your battery
| | 01:38 | while you're looking at photos or listening to music.
| | 01:41 | It's when you start an app that
requires an Internet connection,
| | 01:43 | like the Safari web browser or mail that your device
will then attempt to reconnect to the WiFi network.
| | 01:48 | First, the iPhone or iPod touch
will look for a nearby WiFi network.
| | 01:51 | If it detects one you've connected to in the past,
it will connect with no prompting from you.
| | 01:55 | How it behaves when it doesn't detect
a known network depends on
| | 01:58 | how you have a particular option set.
| | 02:01 | Let's go back to our WiFi settings.
| | 02:03 | Now if your iPhone detects any new WiFi networks
you've never connected to
| | 02:06 | and you have Ask to Join Networks turned on,
you'll see a message pop up
| | 02:10 | with a list of the networks it's found
and it will ask if you want to connect to any of them.
| | 02:14 | If you leave Ask to Join Networks switched off,
your device won't ask you to connect
| | 02:18 | to any unknown networks and you'll have to
search for them manually here in WiFi settings.
| | 02:22 | You'll know you're connected to a WiFi network
when you see the WiFi icon at the top of your screen.
| | 02:28 | Now the iPod touch can only connect to the Internet
over WiFi and has no other connection options.
| | 02:33 | If the iPhone fails to find a WiFi signal
or if you decline to connect to any that it finds,
| | 02:37 | it will then connect to the Internet
via your service provider's cellular network.
| | 02:41 | In those cases you'll see an icon like
4G or LTE up here to let you know
| | 02:46 | which network type you're connected to.
| | 02:48 | As you can see connecting to a WiFi network
is pretty simple,
| | 02:50 | but there are a lot of other important things
to know about how the iPhone and iPod touch
| | 02:55 | deal with WiFi networks.
| | 02:56 | So be sure to check out the movie on WiFi
in the chapter called Important Settings.
| | 03:00 | In that movie I go over some crucial information
that will help you troubleshoot
| | 03:03 | when you inevitably run into problems
with connecting to a WiFi network,
| | 03:07 | but for now that's the basics of connecting
to a network from your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Notification Center| 00:01 | Oftentimes when you're performing one task
on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:03 | maybe checking your email or playing a game
or watching a video,
| | 00:07 | other applications will need your attention.
| | 00:10 | Maybe you receive a text message or a voicemail.
| | 00:12 | Let's take a look at how to manage
the way alerts and messages pop up on your device.
| | 00:16 | For example, maybe while I'm browsing a web page
I receive a text message.
| | 00:23 | I'm alerted to this by a notification area
that temporarily appears at the top of my screen.
| | 00:27 | This allows me to glance at and preview my message
without leaving my browser
| | 00:31 | and after a few seconds the notification disappears
and I can continue reading.
| | 00:36 | Now I've received another text message.
Again, I can read the notification and see who sent it.
| | 00:41 | In this case though, I want to respond
to this notification so I'll just tap it
| | 00:44 | and immediately I'm switched over to
the Messages app,
| | 00:47 | and here in Messages I could type my reply.
| | 00:49 | So notifications in iOS 6 are fairly unobtrusive.
| | 00:52 | You can ignore them and they'll disappear
after a few seconds
| | 00:54 | or you can tap them to go right to
the app that sent the notification.
| | 00:58 | Now if the notification disappears
before you get a chance to tap it,
| | 01:01 | you can quickly access all your notifications
from any screen or application you're in
| | 01:05 | by sliding a finger down from the top of the screen.
| | 01:08 | This opens the Notification Center.
| | 01:10 | Here you'll find all your recent notifications
as well as some widgets that provide
| | 01:13 | useful information like the weather,
your calendar, and buttons
| | 01:17 | to quickly compose a Tweet or Facebook status
update if you setup your accounts on your device.
| | 01:21 | Tapping any item in here takes you to the related app.
| | 01:24 | You can also specify what apps
you want to receive notifications from.
| | 01:30 | Go to Settings and Notifications.
| | 01:32 | Here I can choose if I want the apps sorted
manually or by the time they appeared.
| | 01:37 | If I choose by time, the most recent notifications
will be at the top of the Notification Center
| | 01:42 | or you can choose manually so you can manually
| | 01:45 | arrange the order of the items down here
in the Notification Center area.
| | 01:48 | We can do that by tapping Edit
and dragging the items around in the order you want.
| | 01:55 | Tap Done when you're done editing.
| | 01:58 | So here in the Notification Center area
is where you can determine
| | 02:00 | which apps and widgets you want to hear from.
| | 02:03 | For example, maybe I don't really
follow the stock market
| | 02:06 | so I don't need the Stock widget
taking up space in the Notification Center.
| | 02:09 | So I'll tap it and turn it off.
| | 02:13 | Under Not In Notification Center
you'll find all the other apps you have installed
| | 02:16 | that are capable of sending notifications,
but aren't currently enabled to do so.
| | 02:20 | Just tap any one to add it to the list of items
that appear in your Notification Center.
| | 02:24 | I'll select Mail and turn it on
so I'll receive notifications
| | 02:28 | when I receive new email messages.
| | 02:30 | You can also decide what type of alert pops up
when you receive a notification from an app.
| | 02:35 | There are three alert styles here
you can choose from.
| | 02:37 | None displays no on-screen message
when you receive a notification,
| | 02:40 | but you'll still see the notification
in the Notification Center.
| | 02:43 | Banner is the message that appears
at the top of the screen that we just saw
| | 02:46 | with my two incoming text messages
and Alerts opens a pop-up window you can dismiss.
| | 02:51 | I'll leave Banner selected.
| | 02:56 | So now when I receive a new email
I see this banner and I can ignore it
| | 03:00 | or tap it to go right to my email.
| | 03:02 | Lastly, notifications also continue to
work when you have your phone locked.
| | 03:06 | So for example maybe I put my phone down
and now I'm receiving a call,
| | 03:10 | but I'm in another room and I don't hear it ringing.
| | 03:17 | Now I have a missed call notification.
| | 03:23 | Now I've received a text message.
| | 03:24 | Again, maybe I wasn't in the same room as my phone.
| | 03:26 | I'll let my screen go dark again and when I come back
to my phone and press the Home or Lock button,
| | 03:31 | I can see my two notifications without unlocking my phone.
| | 03:34 | This lets me quickly glance at what I have missed.
| | 03:37 | Now if I want to jump directly to reply to my text message
or to call this person back,
| | 03:40 | I just need to slide the icon for that notification to the right
| | 03:43 | and I'm taken right to that area.
| | 03:45 | So that's how notifications work in iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Twitter and Facebook| 00:01 | If you're a Facebook or Twitter user
you'll be happy to know that Apple has integrated
| | 00:04 | both services directly into iOS 6
making it easy to Tweet or post status updates
| | 00:08 | directly from built-in apps like Safari,
Photos, the Camera, and Maps.
| | 00:14 | Let's start by setting up Twitter.
| | 00:16 | To use this feature go to Settings
and Twitter.
| | 00:21 | If you don't have a Twitter account,
you can create one quickly here
| | 00:25 | by tapping Create New Account.
But if you do have an existing account,
| | 00:28 | enter your username and password here.
Then tap Sign In.
| | 00:35 | If you haven't yet installed the Twitter app,
you'll be asked if you want to install it now.
| | 00:39 | Just tap Install if you want to
use the official Twitter app
| | 00:42 | or tap Later if you want to use a third-party app
you can download from the App Store.
| | 00:46 | You'll want to have at least one Twitter app
if you want to Tweet outside of the apps
| | 00:49 | on your device that Twitter is integrated into,
but I'll just tap Later for now.
| | 00:54 | We'll get into installing apps in a later chapter,
but just know that you can install Twitter
| | 00:57 | directly from here at any time
by tapping this Install button.
| | 01:01 | If you have more than one account,
maybe you have a personal Twitter account
| | 01:03 | as well as well as one for business,
you can tap Add Account.
| | 01:06 | I'll just stick with this one account for now.
| | 01:10 | If you tap the Update Contacts button,
your device will scan the contacts stored
| | 01:12 | on your phone and examine
the email addresses stored there.
| | 01:15 | If it finds any addresses associated
with Twitter accounts,
| | 01:17 | those people's usernames and photos
will be automatically downloaded
| | 01:21 | and added to their contact files on your device.
| | 01:23 | This makes it easy to mention your friends
and reply to them in your own Tweets.
| | 01:27 | So once you've entered your Twitter
information here you're all set to Tweet
| | 01:30 | from the various built-in apps on your device.
| | 01:33 | For example, I'll go to my photo library
and select a photo.
| | 01:38 | I'd like to Tweet this photo to my followers.
| | 01:40 | I just tap the Share button down here
in the lower left-hand corner
| | 01:43 | and one of the buttons here is Twitter.
| | 01:46 | Tapping that opens a new Tweet window
where I can type out my message.
| | 01:51 | If you want, you can tap Add Location to include
information about where you're Tweeting from
| | 01:55 | and when you're ready to post your Tweet,
just click Send.
| | 01:59 | That's all there is to it.
| | 02:01 | Let's take a look at Facebook now.
| | 02:02 | I'll go back to Settings
and select Facebook.
| | 02:08 | If you don't have a Facebook account,
you can tap Create New Account
| | 02:11 | and walk through the steps to create one.
| | 02:13 | But if you already do have an account,
you can enter your username and password here.
| | 02:18 | Then tap Sign In.
| | 02:21 | Before you sign in, you're given this
detailed page letting you know exactly
| | 02:24 | what's signing into Facebook
from your iPhone will do.
| | 02:27 | Doing so will download your Facebook
contacts onto your phone
| | 02:30 | and keep their information up-to-date.
| | 02:31 | It will also download your Facebook events
to the Calendar app so you can
| | 02:34 | start seeing things like your Facebook
friends birthdays up here in the Calendar.
| | 02:38 | Signing into Facebook will also allow you
to post status updates, photos,
| | 02:42 | and other content like links to websites
that you want to share directly from apps on your phone.
| | 02:46 | Now you can change some of these things later
like you can hide Facebook events
| | 02:50 | from the Calendar app so you don't have to see them,
| | 02:52 | but basically the point is that
signing into Facebook here
| | 02:54 | gives you the ability to post and share
from within your iPhone apps.
| | 02:58 | So let's tap Sign In.
| | 03:01 | As with Twitter I'm now given the opportunity
to install the Facebook app if I want to do so.
| | 03:05 | I'll just pass on that for now, and that's it.
| | 03:08 | Notice that these sliders have appeared.
| | 03:09 | So if I want to block Facebook content
from appearing in the Calendar
| | 03:12 | or the Contacts app,
I can just turn that off here.
| | 03:15 | So for example, if I didn't want all
my Facebook friends' birthdays
| | 03:17 | to start showing up in my Calendar,
I can just turn it off.
| | 03:21 | But now if I have an app open like Safari
and maybe this is a blog post
| | 03:26 | that I would like to share
with my Facebook friends,
| | 03:27 | I can just tap the Share button
and then tap Facebook.
| | 03:31 | I can write a little something
about what I'm posting.
| | 03:35 | As with Twitter, I can tap Add Location
to include information about where I'm posting from
| | 03:39 | and you can even choose which
of your friends can see your posts.
| | 03:44 | If you've created a friend list in Facebook,
| | 03:45 | you'll see those lists here
on your phone automatically.
| | 03:48 | To find out more about setting up friend lists,
check out our Facebook courses
| | 03:51 | on the lynda.com online training library.
| | 03:55 | When I'm ready I tap Post
and that post gets added to my Facebook account.
| | 04:01 | That's how to work with Twitter
and Facebook directly on your phone.
| | 04:04 | Also remember, as I've mentioned previously,
you can quickly make direct Tweets and Facebook posts
| | 04:09 | by dragging down from the top of the screen
to open the Notification Center.
| | 04:12 | In certain apps you'll need to drag down once
to reveal the tab,
| | 04:16 | which you can then drag down
to reveal Notification Center.
| | 04:19 | And here, tap Tweet or Post to Facebook.
| | 04:22 | So if you're already a Twitter or a Facebook user,
you'll probably really appreciate
| | 04:25 | the way the two services
have been integrated into iOS.
| | 04:29 | If you've never Tweeted or used Facebook before
go ahead and sign up for accounts.
| | 04:32 | They're free and you may find that you
use them a lot more than you expected to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Charging the iPhone or iPod touch| 00:01 | The iPhone and iPod touch both have
large internal batteries that cannot be removed.
| | 00:05 | This means that, unlike with most other mobile phones,
| | 00:08 | you can't have a spare battery charging on the side
| | 00:10 | to swap in when the one in
your phone or iPod becomes depleted.
| | 00:13 | Managing battery life is an especially important part
of owning an iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:17 | probably more so with the iPhone since it's your phone,
| | 00:20 | but if you count on your iPod touch
to check your email,
| | 00:23 | having a dead battery can be just
as much of an inconvenience.
| | 00:25 | In the chapter on troubleshooting I'll cover several
techniques on extending the charge of your battery,
| | 00:33 | but here I just want to make sure you understand
the options for charging your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:34 | The iPhone comes with a USB cable
for connecting to your computer
| | 00:38 | as well as a power adapter for charging your phone
from a regular wall outlet.
| | 00:42 | As I've mentioned earlier the iPhone 5
and fifth generation iPod touch
| | 00:46 | uses the new Lightning Connector.
| | 00:48 | So they're not compatible with the
older dock connector cables
| | 00:50 | used by previous iPhone and iPod touch models.
| | 00:53 | The iPhone and iPod touch both come with their
compatible cables regardless of the model.
| | 00:57 | The iPod touch does not come with a power adapter.
| | 01:00 | So, initially you can only charge your iPod touch
by plugging it into your computer,
| | 01:04 | but you can purchase one of these adapters from Apple
| | 01:06 | or something similar from a third-party vendor.
| | 01:09 | So you can charge your device either by plugging it
into your computer with the included cable
| | 01:13 | and with most computers, their USB ports
will continue to charge your device
| | 01:16 | even if the computer is in sleep mode.
| | 01:18 | But you'll get a quicker complete charge
with a power adapter plugged into a wall outlet.
| | 01:28 | When you unlock your phone
the battery indicator in the upper right corner
| | 01:32 | shows a little lightning bolt symbol
indicating the phone is charging.
| | 01:36 | Once the phone reachers a full charge,
the bolt changes to a plug icon
| | 01:39 | indicating the charge is complete, but that it
knows it's still plugged into a power source.
| | 01:44 | Your iPhone and iPod touch will warn you
if your battery level is getting so low
| | 01:48 | that your device will no longer function.
| | 01:50 | First, you'll see a message saying that
your battery life is at about 20 percent
| | 01:54 | and you'll get a similar message
when it reaches about 10 percent.
| | 01:57 | That's your cue to plug in
your device as soon as possible.
| | 02:00 | Finally, when there's just no power left, the device
will shut off and be unusable until you plug it in.
| | 02:06 | In cases of extreme depletion you won't
even be able to use the phone
| | 02:10 | while it's plugged into a power source
until its charge level comes up to a usable level.
| | 02:15 | You can get a more accurate read
on your battery level by going into
| | 02:18 | Settings>General>Usage, and
turning Battery Percentage On.
| | 02:24 | This gives you a percentage display
next to your battery icon.
| | 02:29 | Again with no removable or user-replaceable battery
it's important to have the basic tools
| | 02:33 | to keep your iPhone or iPod touch charged.
| | 02:36 | Many people keep an extra charger on their nightstand
and let their phone charge overnight,
| | 02:38 | which might be all you need unless you're
using a device heavily during the day.
| | 02:43 | In addition to having an extra charger
for the nightstand,
| | 02:46 | you should probably also pick up one
of the many available chargers for you car.
| | 02:49 | I like adapters like this one that has a
USB port in it so I can charge a variety of devices
| | 02:53 | and I don't have to have a car charger
specifically for my iPhone.
| | 02:57 | You may even want to look into an accessory
like an external battery pack.
| | 03:01 | Many manufactures make batteries that plug directly
into the iPhone or iPod touch's connector
| | 03:05 | and you can even find cases with batteries built in,
| | 03:07 | which I think are especially nice,
so you don't have something
| | 03:09 | hanging out of your phone
that you might accidentally snap off.
| | 03:12 | And some models can
actually double your usage time.
| | 03:15 | As you spend more time with your iPhone
or iPod touch you'll get a better idea
| | 03:18 | of how often you need to charge it.
| | 03:20 | It really does depend on how frequently you use it
as well as whether or not
| | 03:23 | you have other settings turned on or off.
| | 03:25 | Again, see the movie on Extending your Battery's Life
in the Troubleshooting chapter
| | 03:29 | at the end of this course
for more information.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up an Apple ID account on an iPhone or iPod touch| 00:00 | At some point it's likely that you'll want to
either purchase additional applications
| | 00:04 | for your iPhone or iPod touch
or you'll want to purchase music
| | 00:07 | or videos from the iTunes store.
| | 00:09 | We'll be taking detailed looks at how to make these
purchases from your device in upcoming chapters,
| | 00:13 | but in order to do any of these things,
you'll need to register for a free Apple ID.
| | 00:18 | Now if you've ever purchased music through iTunes
on your computer, you already have an account.
| | 00:23 | Additionally, if you subscribe to Apple's iCloud service
or if you have an Apple ID,
| | 00:27 | which you created if you ever purchased
anything from Apple online,
| | 00:29 | you can use that account information.
| | 00:32 | So if you already have an Apple ID,
you can skip this movie.
| | 00:35 | But if you're completely new to the Apple ecosystem,
you'll need an account.
| | 00:38 | So in this movie, I'll show you how to do so
from your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:42 | Start by locating the Settings icon and tapping it,
then find and tap iTunes and App Stores.
| | 00:48 | Here, if you already have an account,
is where you can Sign in so your phone or iPod
| | 00:51 | remembers your account or user name.
| | 00:53 | Or tap Create New Apple ID to go through
the process of creating a new account.
| | 00:58 | First, confirm the Country or Region you live in.
| | 01:01 | This needs to match to the location of your
credit card's billing address. Then tap Next.
| | 01:08 | Then you can read through the Terms and
Conditions of Service for using the iTunes store.
| | 01:12 | You can scroll down.
| | 01:14 | In this case, there are 55 pages of legal jargon to read.
| | 01:17 | I'll leave it entirely up to your own judgment
whether or not you want to read through all these.
| | 01:21 | Let's just assume we did and tap Agree
and then tap Agree again.
| | 01:27 | Next, enter the email address
you want to use for this account.
| | 01:30 | Your email address will become your username.
| | 01:35 | Then create a Password.
| | 01:39 | Then type it again to make sure
you didn't make any typos.
| | 01:42 | Next, you'll need to choose three security Questions
that only you know the Answer to.
| | 01:46 | This is to verify your identify if you ever forget
your Password and need to recover it.
| | 01:56 | You do need to fill in all the sets
of Questions and Answers.
| | 02:01 | Now, if you want to, you can add an optional
alternate Email here in the Email field.
| | 02:05 | This is in case you forget any of the
Questions and Answers you just set up,
| | 02:08 | in which case, Apple will be able to email
you at this alternate email address
| | 02:11 | to help you re-access your account.
| | 02:14 | I'll just skip that for now.
| | 02:17 | Next, enter your Birth Date.
| | 02:19 | This is just another identity verification step.
| | 02:28 | Lastly, on the screen, decide whether
you'd like to receive Emails from Apple
| | 02:31 | concerning new releases or changes
to the store or information about
| | 02:35 | other products and services from Apple.
| | 02:36 | I'll choose the term both of these options Off.
| | 02:39 | I'll tap Done and then Next.
| | 02:44 | Here's where you enter your
credit card billing information.
| | 02:46 | This is again to verify that you are
a real person and to confirm your identity.
| | 02:50 | You won't be charged for anything
until you actually make a purchase though.
| | 02:53 | So just fill in all your credit card
and billing information and tap Next.
| | 02:59 | You should then receive an email
at the address you used for your Apple ID.
| | 03:02 | So check your email and click
the Verify Now link that will appear.
| | 03:07 | Once all of your information has been confirmed,
you'll have successfully setup your Apple ID account.
| | 03:11 | You'll then be ready to browse and purchase
music and apps from the iTunes store,
| | 03:15 | which again we'll be looking at
in an upcoming chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing from an iPhone using AirPrint| 00:00 | Back with the Release of iOS 4.2,
Apple introduced AirPrint,
| | 00:04 | a feature that lets you wirelessly
print from your iOS device,
| | 00:07 | like your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad
to any AirPrint-enabled printer.
| | 00:11 | And that's the important part;
| | 00:13 | the printer has to be specifically designed
to support AirPrint.
| | 00:16 | These printers are mostly Canon, HP,
and Epson models and you can see
| | 00:19 | which model support AirPrint
by going to Apple's Support site.
| | 00:23 | The really great thing is that there's
no special setup required.
| | 00:25 | Just follow the instructions that came
with your printer for connecting
| | 00:27 | it to your home or office wireless network.
| | 00:30 | As long as your iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad
is on that same network
| | 00:34 | and running iOS 4.2 or later,
printing to your device is super easy.
| | 00:39 | For the most part, if it's a document
you can view on your device,
| | 00:41 | you'll probably be able to print it.
| | 00:43 | AirPrint works with apps like your
Safari web browser, Mail, Photos
| | 00:47 | and any third-party apps in which
the developer has included print capabilities.
| | 00:51 | Depending on which application
you're printing from,
| | 00:53 | the button you'll use to print might vary.
| | 00:55 | For example, if I want to print an email,
I'd tap the same button I use
| | 00:58 | to Reply to or Forward emails
to get the Print button.
| | 01:02 | If I wanted to print a photo from my Photo Library,
I'll tap the Share button to get the Print button.
| | 01:10 | Other third-party apps might have other ways to print.
| | 01:12 | Just hunt around a little and you're most likely to find it.
| | 01:15 | So for example, I have this web page open
right now and I want to print out a copy.
| | 01:19 | I start by tapping the Share button
and here I'll find Print.
| | 01:24 | That takes me to Printer Options.
| | 01:26 | I'll tap Select Printer.
| | 01:28 | My iPhone takes a minute to search my network
for AirPrint printers.
| | 01:31 | In this case, it's found my HP D110 series printer.
| | 01:34 | If you have more than one printer available,
just select the one you want to print to.
| | 01:37 | I only have the one, so I'll tap it.
| | 01:40 | That takes me back to the Printer Options page
where the Print button is now available.
| | 01:44 | Now, there really aren't there many
other options here to speak of.
| | 01:46 | Basically, I can just choose how many copies
I want to print. I'll keep it as 1.
| | 01:51 | Depending on which printer you're using though,
you may see some additional options
| | 01:54 | like the range of pages you want to print,
whether you want to print double-sided and so on.
| | 01:58 | I'll just tap Print
| | 02:03 | and my iPhone starts wirelessly printing my web page.
| | 02:06 | That's the AirPrint feature which works
with any app that has a print function built in.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Displaying the iPhone screen on a TV| 00:00 | A new feature that's shipped with iOS 5
and one that's available on the iPhone 4S or later
| | 00:05 | and the 4th generation iPod touch or later,
is Video Mirroring.
| | 00:09 | This is a feature that lets you display
whatever you see on your phone to an Apple TV,
| | 00:12 | making it easy to share anything
you can see on your phone
| | 00:15 | with an entire room of people on a large screen.
| | 00:17 | This requires you to use
a second generation Apple TV or later
| | 00:21 | that's connected to the same network
as your iPhone.
| | 00:24 | I have an Apple TV connected
to this TV behind me
| | 00:26 | and it's on the same wireless network
as my iPhone.
| | 00:29 | To mirror my screen through the TV,
I just need to double-click
| | 00:31 | the Home button on my phone.
| | 00:33 | That opens the multitasking area, which I showed
you how to use earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:36 | I'm going to flick to the right two times
to bring up this area of the multitasking bar
| | 00:40 | and here I'll find the AirPlay icon.
| | 00:43 | I tap that to see a list of any available AirPlay
devices my phone has detected on my network.
| | 00:47 | So here's my Apple TV.
| | 00:50 | I'll select it and I'll slide the
mirroring slider to On and that's it.
| | 00:53 | I'm now wirelessly mirroring
my iPhone screen on my TV.
| | 00:56 | Meaning, whatever I see on my phone
is also what I see on the TV screen.
| | 01:00 | When AirPlay mirroring is On,
the top bar of your screen turns blue
| | 01:03 | to provide a reminder that you're streaming
whatever is on your screen to your Apple TV.
| | 01:07 | This can be really useful if you want to
display a document or email
| | 01:10 | that would otherwise be impossible to show
a large group of people on your iPhone screen.
| | 01:14 | For example, I have a spreadsheet document here.
| | 01:18 | You can see I'm looking at it on my phone,
but also on the screen,
| | 01:21 | and if I change the orientation,
it goes to wide screen.
| | 01:24 | It also works really well with some games.
| | 01:33 | So in this sense, AirPlay mirroring essentially
turns your iPhone into a wireless game console.
| | 01:38 | Now, there's generally a tiny lag between
the iPhone's display and the Apple TV's,
| | 01:42 | so this isn't an ideal set up
for really fast moving games,
| | 01:45 | but it's sure to work fine
under plenty of other circumstances.
| | 01:47 | Now, I should also mention that
if you experience some intermittent playback issues
| | 01:51 | or more significant lag, you might want
to try turning Bluetooth off on your phone
| | 01:55 | as it can sometimes interfere
with AirPlay streaming.
| | 01:57 | You can do so by going into your settings,
into Bluetooth, and just making sure it's turned off.
| | 02:05 | When you want to turn off mirroring,
just double-click the Home button again,
| | 02:08 | slide over, select the AirPlay button,
and select your iPhone again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. The Essentials of TypingUnderstanding the keyless keyboard| 00:00 | When the iPhone was first released,
one of the most striking and unique things
| | 00:03 | about it was that it had no physical keyboard.
| | 00:06 | All typing on the iPhone is done
via a screen-based virtual keyboard.
| | 00:10 | These days, it's pretty common
for smartphones to not have physical keyboards,
| | 00:13 | but if you're new to the iPhone
and especially if you're transitioning
| | 00:16 | from a phone that had real keys,
there are still some things you need to get used to.
| | 00:20 | For one thing, you don't feel any buttons
under your fingers, so you do have to
| | 00:23 | keep your eyes on the screen to make sure
your words are coming out correctly.
| | 00:27 | Fortunately, the iPhone Operating System
has a great built-in auto-correction system
| | 00:30 | that can infer what you're trying
to type in most cases,
| | 00:33 | even if you spelled it horribly wrong.
| | 00:35 | The trick is to understand that
it will take some time to get used to typing
| | 00:37 | and to trust the auto-correction system.
| | 00:40 | If you think about it, having no actual keys
opens up a world of possibilities.
| | 00:44 | Since the iPhone is not limited
by a set physical keyboard,
| | 00:47 | iPhone developers are free to create input systems
in multiple languages or special characters,
| | 00:52 | and all they have to do is create the keys
they need you to press to interact with their applications
| | 00:56 | and they can place them anywhere
on the screen that makes sense.
| | 00:59 | So let's begin by taking a look at the basics
of typing with the screen-based keyboard.
| | 01:03 | For this example, I'm going to use
the included Notes app.
| | 01:08 | I'll tap the + symbol to create a New Note.
| | 01:11 | Now I'm looking at a blank note and the keyboard
has appeared at the bottom half of the screen.
| | 01:16 | The keyboard will show up any time you tap
into a field where you're supposed to type.
| | 01:20 | To type, just tap the letters.
| | 01:22 | Notice that the letters you're tapping appear
above your finger in a nice large size
| | 01:25 | so you can visually confirm
that you're on the letter you want.
| | 01:29 | The enlarged version of the letter will stay there
until your finger breaks contact from the screen
| | 01:32 | and that's probably one of the
most fundamental things to know
| | 01:35 | about typing on the iPhone or the iPod touch.
| | 01:37 | Characters you type are not entered
until your finger leaves the screen.
| | 01:41 | That means if I touch the wrong letter
and notice that before I release,
| | 01:45 | I can just slide over to the correct letter
and then release my finger.
| | 01:49 | Now, if I enter a wrong letter or a word
by accident, I can just tap the Delete key
| | 01:55 | to delete the letter or words
and then continue typing.
| | 02:00 | Now, let's say I want to add a colon here.
| | 02:03 | Special characters and numbers
are accessed by tapping this button
| | 02:05 | in the lower left-hand corner.
| | 02:07 | Now, I can enter the colon and I'll tap Return
to go down to the next line.
| | 02:13 | Now, here's a tip directly related to what
I was saying about characters not appearing
| | 02:15 | until you lift your finger from the screen.
| | 02:17 | Let's say I wanted to put a parenthesis
at the beginning of this line.
| | 02:22 | I can see the open and close parenthesis
characters when I tap the character's button,
| | 02:25 | but a quick way to access those keys
from the letter keyboard
| | 02:29 | is to touch the character's button and then
slide my finger over to the character I want,
| | 02:33 | before I release my finger and then release.
| | 02:36 | The character is added to my Note and the keyboard
instantly reverts to the letter keyboard
| | 02:39 | and I can continue typing without having
to tap Return to the letter keyboard.
| | 02:45 | So, that's the basics of working
with the keyless keyboard.
| | 02:48 | It will definitely take some practice
in getting used to if you're new to it.
| | 02:52 | Keep in mind that most apps that
use the keyboard will allow you
| | 02:54 | to rotate the phone to landscape mode, which
makes the key slightly larger and easier to hit.
| | 02:59 | Though once you get better,
you should be able to type quickly
| | 03:01 | in both portrait and landscape mode.
| | 03:03 | In the upcoming movies, we'll look at
the most important techniques and tips
| | 03:06 | for becoming an efficient iPhone or iPod touch typist.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fixing typos and trusting autocorrection| 00:00 | Let's take a look at how the iPhone can assist you
with the inevitable typos that will occur
| | 00:04 | when you're using the keyboard.
| | 00:05 | I started typing a note of things to do today
and on this next line,
| | 00:09 | I'm going to start typing the phrase
'In no particular order.'
| | 00:17 | Notice here that the iPhone
has offered a suggestion.
| | 00:20 | I've typed enough of the word particular
that the iPhone is guessing what I mean to type here.
| | 00:24 | If the suggestion is correct, I just press space
and the word is completed for me.
| | 00:29 | If that wasn't the word I wanted, I could have
just continued typing and ignored the suggestion.
| | 00:33 | But if you did accept the suggestion
by accident or you change your mind,
| | 00:37 | tap the Delete button,
| | 00:40 | and the previous version of the word
you had typed will appear
| | 00:42 | along with any alternate suggestions.
| | 00:45 | In this case, it suggests particulate.
| | 00:47 | Just tap the one you want.
| | 00:49 | In this case, I do want the word particular,
so I'll leave it as is and finish typing this line.
| | 00:58 | The iPhone's suggestions and corrections
are one of the key factors
| | 01:01 | in being a fast and efficient typist on its keyboard.
| | 01:04 | Even if you've misspelled a word, the iPhone
can usually figure out what word you meant
| | 01:07 | based on the letters near the ones you've typed.
| | 01:10 | So if I type something like 'Pickup laundry'
| | 01:18 | but I misspelled the word laundry,
| | 01:20 | notice that it immediately suggests
the correct spelling of laundry.
| | 01:23 | I tap space and the change is instantly made.
| | 01:28 | It's important to remember
that pressing space is telling the iPhone
| | 01:30 | that its suggestion is correct.
| | 01:32 | If the suggestion is not correct,
tap the suggestion itself to remove it.
| | 01:37 | Also, the iPhone has a universal spell checker,
so in most apps,
| | 01:40 | misspelled words will be underlined
with red dotted lines like you see
| | 01:43 | in many Word Processors.
| | 01:44 | So for example, if I tap Delete and deliberately
misspell the word laundry again,
| | 01:48 | notice the word gets underlined.
| | 01:51 | When I tap it, a suggestion for
the properly spelled version appears.
| | 01:55 | I'll tap that to correct my spelling.
| | 01:57 | Also, note that the iPhone will remember
which suggestions you've ignored
| | 02:01 | and it will also learn the words
you use most often that it doesn't recognize
| | 02:04 | and add them to its internal dictionary.
| | 02:06 | So after time it will stop trying to correct words
that you've told it are not typos.
| | 02:10 | Now don't take this to mean
that once you get good at this,
| | 02:12 | the iPhone will catch every typo you make.
| | 02:14 | You're going to leave plenty
of typos behind as you type.
| | 02:16 | So there are several typos in this list.
| | 02:18 | The last typo was the misspelling
of the word Wednesday at the end of the list.
| | 02:22 | Now again, if I tap Delete
to put my cursor right next to the word,
| | 02:26 | a suggestion for the correct spelling will appear.
| | 02:28 | Of course another way to fix the typo
is to simply retype it correctly,
| | 02:32 | which you'll have to do if the iPhone
has no suggestions for the correct spelling.
| | 02:36 | So in this case, maybe I'll just tap the Delete key
to delete most of the word
| | 02:39 | and then retype it correctly.
| | 02:43 | So as we've just seen, the Delete key can
be tapped once so you delete one letter at a time
| | 02:47 | or if you want to delete more than that,
hold down the Delete key.
| | 02:50 | If you continue holding down the Delete key,
your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 02:54 | assumes you want to get rid of a lot more,
and entire words start getting deleted.
| | 02:59 | Now, there are other ways to delete
entire chunks of text faster than that,
| | 03:01 | which we'll look at in the following movie,
but for now, that's how you use the Delete key.
| | 03:06 | So how do you go about fixing typos
that are way back at the beginning
| | 03:09 | of what you typed without deleting
everything that just came after it?
| | 03:13 | Just hold down your finger
over the text and then in a second
| | 03:15 | the text under your finger shows up
in this kind of magnifying glass.
| | 03:18 | Slide your finger until the cursor appears
where you want to make a change.
| | 03:21 | Notice the Select, Select All buttons appear.
| | 03:24 | We'll talk about those shortly,
but for now, the important thing is
| | 03:26 | that my cursor is where I need it to be
and I can type the letter P
| | 03:30 | to fix the word porch.
| | 03:32 | And that's how you fix typos.
| | 03:34 | Again, you really need to learn to trust
the auto-correction feature of your iPhone
| | 03:37 | or iPod touch, because it will automatically
fix many of the mistakes you make.
| | 03:41 | Just try to ignore typos as you make them
and just keep on typing.
| | 03:45 | Here is a quick example.
| | 03:46 | I'm going to type the sentence
'Be sure to remind Peter about the meeting next week.'
| | 03:50 | I'm going to type it pretty quickly
and I'll mostly likely miss several keys,
| | 03:54 | but I'm just going to plough through
and let the auto-correction do its thing.
| | 03:56 | First, I'll place my cursor at the end of my document,
| | 04:00 | give myself some space.
| | 04:02 |
| | 04:20 | If you're watching closely,
you should have noticed that the iPhone
| | 04:22 | pretty much fixed every typo I made on the fly.
| | 04:25 | Now, as you get more comfortable
with the iPhone keyboard,
| | 04:28 | you'll probably want to graduate
from typing out words with one finger
| | 04:30 | and move into typing with two thumbs.
| | 04:32 | Again, this is going to take practice,
but you'll get better as you get more experience,
| | 04:36 | and typing with two thumbs can be significantly
faster than using a single finger.
| | 04:40 | Just hold the phone with the fingers of both hands
and type with your thumbs like this.
| | 04:58 | Now, I notice I do need to fix one typo here,
I need to get the apostrophe in the word let's.
| | 05:06 | You might have also noticed that
as I was typing, I used the shortcut
| | 05:09 | of typing two spaces after my first sentence
to automatically insert a period.
| | 05:14 | Notice also that the first letter of the second sentence
was automatically capitalized as well.
| | 05:18 | These are all default behaviors you can find
by going to Settings, General, Keyboard.
| | 05:26 | This is where you'll find the controls
for auto-correction, auto-capitalization,
| | 05:31 | which is why my iPhone capitalized the
first letter of the second sentence
| | 05:35 | and the period shortcut is found here as well.
| | 05:37 | That means typing two spaces inserts a period.
| | 05:41 | The other option you can turn on and off
here is Enable Caps Lock.
| | 05:44 | You can see it's ON by default.
| | 05:53 | With Caps Lock ON, a quick double-tap
of the Shift Key locks the letters to all caps.
| | 05:57 | So you can quickly type out acronyms
or yell at someone via text.
| | 06:04 | One last thing I want to mention here.
| | 06:06 | Earlier I was saying the iPhone and the iPod touch
will learn words it doesn't recognize
| | 06:09 | so it doesn't constantly try to correct words
that you've previously told it not to.
| | 06:14 | Now, there might be times
when you've typed in words by accident
| | 06:17 | that are clearly misspelled
that the iPhone then tries to suggest
| | 06:20 | since you've misspelled them several times.
| | 06:22 | If that happens, go back to
Settings, General, and Reset.
| | 06:29 | Here, you can tap Reset Keyboard Dictionary,
which you can see will delete all the custom words
| | 06:32 | the Dictionary learned from you,
but be aware that this means the Dictionary
| | 06:35 | will also have to relearn all the
legitimate custom words you created.
| | 06:40 | So don't reset the Dictionary
unless you really have to.
| | 06:43 | Also, the iPhone and iPod touch will actually
notice if you haven't used a custom word in awhile
| | 06:46 | and remove it from the Dictionary after some time.
| | 06:49 | So if you can live with an occasional invalid suggestion
from the Dictionary for a while,
| | 06:53 | eventually, the misspelled word
will be deleted by the iPhone
| | 06:57 | and you won't be bothered by it again.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring Select, Cut, Copy, and Paste| 00:00 | While typing on the iPhone or iPod touch,
you can take advantage of the ability
| | 00:04 | to Select, Cut, Copy, and Paste text,
just like you can on any Word Processor
| | 00:09 | on a regular computer.
| | 00:11 | This is especially useful when you need
to select a longish chunk of text
| | 00:14 | to either Edit, Delete, Move, or Paste
into another location of your document
| | 00:19 | or even into another application.
| | 00:20 | For example, maybe in this document
I need to change the word Sunday to Friday.
| | 00:25 | There are two ways to make a selection.
| | 00:27 | If you want to select a single word,
double-tap the word.
| | 00:30 | That highlights the word
and the Copy menu appears.
| | 00:33 | You will also see Cut
if you select the text you can edit.
| | 00:35 | And Paste will appear
if you've previously cut or copied text.
| | 00:39 | I actually don't want to Cut or Copy right now,
I just want to change the word.
| | 00:42 | So if Sunday is selected,
I'll type Friday to replace it.
| | 00:48 | So this is pretty much how
a regular Word Processor works.
| | 00:52 | Another way to select text, and the method
to use if you need to select more than one word,
| | 00:54 | or if you're trying to select non-editable text
like some words in your web browser, for example,
| | 00:59 | is to hold on a word until you see
the magnifying glass appear and then let go.
| | 01:04 | That gives you the Select
and Select All menu options.
| | 01:07 | Select All selects everything on the page,
which is great if you just want to copy everything.
| | 01:11 | I'm just going to tap outside that to deselect.
| | 01:14 | Now, I'll hold on the word again, and Select
just selects the word you held down on,
| | 01:18 | the same way double-tapping
editable text does,
| | 01:21 | and you get these two handles
above and below your selection.
| | 01:24 | Drag the handles to select any adjoining words
you want to include in your selection,
| | 01:28 | then you get the Cut and Copy menu.
| | 01:31 | So maybe I want to move this list
into its own note. I'll choose Copy,
| | 01:37 | then I'll tap Done,
and I'll tap the + button to create a New Note.
| | 01:41 | To Paste text you've selected, double-tap
and then tap Paste. It's that easy.
| | 01:48 | You're not limited to pasting your selected text
into the same app either.
| | 01:52 | I could just as easily open my Mail application
and paste this list into a new email message too.
| | 01:57 | Just like on a regular computer,
you can continue pasting the text you copied
| | 02:01 | until you copy some other text,
at which point the newly copied text
| | 02:04 | becomes the text that
will appear when you paste.
| | 02:08 | That's how to Cut, Copy, and Paste
on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Hidden shortcuts| 00:00 | Hidden within the keys of your iPhone
or iPod touch's keyboard are some shortcuts
| | 00:04 | to cut down on your typing time,
as well as to give you access to characters
| | 00:08 | and symbols you won't be able to type
unless you know how to access them.
| | 00:11 | We've already seen some convenient shortcuts;
| | 00:14 | like typing a double-space
to add a period (.)at the end of a sentence
| | 00:17 | and that holding down
the characters and numbers key
| | 00:19 | lets you slide over to those characters
to select them
| | 00:22 | and then get popped right back
to the alphabet keyboard.
| | 00:25 | It works the other way too.
| | 00:26 | If I have the numbers and characters
keyboard up and I'm typing mostly numbers,
| | 00:32 | I can hold the alphabet key and slide
over to select the letter,
| | 00:36 | and then I'm popped right back
into the numbers.
| | 00:39 | Also within the numbers and characters is
another button to bring up even more symbols.
| | 00:44 | So those are the ways to access
the obvious letters and characters,
| | 00:47 | but holding down on other keys will also
bring up additional characters you can use.
| | 00:51 | Let's say I'm typing the word Cafe
and I want to make sure it ends properly
| | 00:56 | and perhaps pretentiously
with the acute accent over the e.
| | 01:00 | So I type Caf and then I hold down on the e.
| | 01:04 | After a moment, a whole slew of accented Es appear.
| | 01:06 | I just slide over to the one I want and release,
and now it's was added to my text.
| | 01:13 | You'll find these hidden characters and symbols
for any letter you need them for.
| | 01:21 | Not all keys have them, but you'll generally
find what you need by holding down for a second
| | 01:24 | to see which symbols and characters
are available for certain letters.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing a Bluetooth keyboard| 00:00 | If you do a lot of typing
on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:03 | you might want to consider getting
an external Bluetooth keyboard.
| | 00:06 | The iPhone's on-screen keyboard is nice
for brief periods of typing,
| | 00:09 | but if you have to write paragraphs
of text, you're going to
| | 00:12 | be much quicker and efficient
on a full-sized keyboard.
| | 00:15 | The first step is to pair your
iPhone or iPod touch with the keyboard.
| | 00:18 | The setup process only has to be done once
in order for your device
| | 00:21 | and your keyboard to recognize each other.
| | 00:23 | So first, follow the instructions that came
with your keyboard
| | 00:26 | to put it into Pairing or Discoverable mode.
| | 00:28 | This is a mode that says 'Here I am'
to other Bluetooth devices.
| | 00:32 | In the case of this Apple Bluetooth keyboard,
you just turn it on.
| | 00:35 | Once your keyboard is in Discoverable mode,
go to your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:40 | and tap Settings, Bluetooth,
make sure Bluetooth is ON
| | 00:46 | and in a moment, you should see your keyboard appear
in this list of available devices.
| | 00:54 | Select it.
| | 00:55 | Now, in order to complete the pairing process,
you're prompted to enter a four-digit code on the keyboard.
| | 01:03 | This is to confirm that you indeed want the devices
to recognize each other and work together,
| | 01:06 | and this is the only time you'll have to do this
| | 01:08 | unless you delete the keyboard
from the list of devices on your phone.
| | 01:12 | Depending on the Bluetooth device,
you may not have to enter a code at all.
| | 01:15 | Be sure to check the instructions
that come with your Bluetooth accessory,
| | 01:18 | but that's pretty much it.
| | 01:20 | Once the pairing process is complete,
you can then use the Bluetooth keyboard
| | 01:23 | anytime you need to type
on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 01:26 | So for example, I'll open up the Notes app,
Create a New Note, and start typing.
| | 01:35 | Not only that, but you'll also find
that the standard keyboard commands
| | 01:39 | to Cut, Copy, Paste, and Undo,
work in most applications on the phone as well.
| | 01:43 | These keyboard commands are
Cmd+X to Cut, Cmd+C to Copy,
| | 01:47 | Cmd+V to Paste,
and Cmd+Z to Undo.
| | 01:51 | You will have to use your fingers as usual
to select text on the screen though,
| | 01:56 | but you can use the keyboard command
of Cmd+A to Select All.
| | 02:02 | So again, with the keyboard and your iPhone paired,
| | 02:04 | you can turn on the keyboard
at anytime to type with it,
| | 02:07 | instead of using the on-screen keyboard.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding international and emoji keyboards| 00:00 | If you're multilingual or if you frequently
just have to type foreign language words,
| | 00:04 | you'll be happy to know that you can
activate additional keyboards on the iPhone.
| | 00:08 | Again, this is one of the advantages
of having no physical keyboard.
| | 00:11 | All you have to do is activate the
keyboard in the language you want
| | 00:14 | and you can bring it up at any time to access
characters specific to that language.
| | 00:18 | To do this, go to Settings, General, International,
and here tap Keyboards.
| | 00:28 | Here you'll see your primary keyboard language.
| | 00:32 | Tap Add New Keyboard.
Select the language you want to add.
| | 00:37 | Let's select French.
| | 00:38 | I'll just select good old-fashioned French,
and now it's added to my list.
| | 00:44 | Incidentally, this is also where you
can activate the Emoji keyboard,
| | 00:48 | which isn't actually a language, but a
keyboard for typing pictographic characters.
| | 00:51 | They are similar to the emoticons
you're probably familiar with,
| | 00:54 | like these sideway smiley faces,
but with a lot more variety.
| | 00:57 | Let's activate that keyboard too,
to see how it works.
| | 01:01 | So now, I have three keyboards activated.
| | 01:04 | Let's switch over to the Notes app.
I'll create a New Note.
| | 01:10 | Now, once you've activated
more than one keyboard,
| | 01:12 | you'll see this Globe icon appear whenever
the on-screen keyboard is brought up.
| | 01:16 | Tapping it cycles through your keyboards
| | 01:18 | and this is just a message that will appear
the first time you add keyboards
| | 01:20 | to let you know that tapping the Globe icon
will cycle through the different keyboards.
| | 01:25 | So with one tap, I now see the French keyboard.
| | 01:29 | I'll type Cafe au lait.
| | 01:35 | To add the acute accent, I can either
accept the spelling correction there
| | 01:38 | or I can just tap the accent right after
the letter I want to add the accent to.
| | 01:51 | Notice also that my iPhone isn't trying
to fix the spelling of this phrase,
| | 01:54 | since I have the French keyboard
activated and it therefore
| | 01:56 | assumes that I intend to be typing in French.
| | 01:59 | I hit Return to go down a couple of lines.
| | 02:01 | Let's switch to the next keyboard we activated
which was the Emoji keyboard.
| | 02:06 | So here you'll find an incredibly large
collection of images and icons
| | 02:09 | you can use to express yourself visually,
if that's your sort of thing.
| | 02:13 | There are five separate category tabs
along the bottom,
| | 02:15 | including a tab that collects
your most recently used characters.
| | 02:18 | So if I wanted to express that I was maybe
just kidding about something I just wrote,
| | 02:22 | I might add this silly face.
| | 02:25 | Now notice also that most of these
categories have over a half dozen
| | 02:28 | additional screens of images, swipe
horizontally to browse through them.
| | 02:33 | I can choose other categories,
| | 02:44 | and just tap the ones you want to use.
| | 02:46 | You'll find your most frequently used Emoji
in this first tab labeled with the clock,
| | 02:50 | which can be useful so you don't have to browse
through all the pages to find specific images.
| | 02:55 | But in my case, I'm not really
an Emoji kind of user,
| | 02:59 | nor do I speak French frequently enough
or even capably enough
| | 03:02 | to warant having the keyboard activated.
| | 03:03 | So I'll return to my Settings.
| | 03:06 | Now, if you just want to edit
the order of your keyboards,
| | 03:08 | you can tap Edit and drag them up and down
| | 03:11 | to customize their order
when you're cycling through them.
| | 03:14 | But in this case, I'm just going
to tap the Delete buttons
| | 03:16 | next to French and Emoji to remove them,
| | 03:18 | so I just have a single keyboard once more.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Syncing with Your ComputerGetting the latest version of iTunes| 00:00 | In this chapter we are going look at how to
sync your iPhone or iPod touch with your computer,
| | 00:04 | which allows you to move content like music,
videos, photos, contacts and so on to your device.
| | 00:10 | And the tool for getting these things
onto your iPhone or iPod touch is iTunes,
| | 00:14 | the free music and video player
and management software from Apple.
| | 00:18 | And although you can use your device
without ever connecting it to your computer,
| | 00:21 | you still need iTunes if you want to move
content like music videos and photos
| | 00:24 | from your computer to your device.
| | 00:28 | If you're on a Mac, you most likely
have iTunes installed already.
| | 00:31 | If you're on Windows
or you don't have iTunes installed
| | 00:33 | regardless of your operating system,
go to apple.com/itunes to download a copy.
| | 00:38 | The copy you download will be
the latest version of iTunes available.
| | 00:42 | If you already have iTunes installed,
it is still important to first check
| | 00:45 | to make sure you're running the latest version.
| | 00:47 | Apple is always releasing upgrades to iTunes
that features or fix bugs,
| | 00:52 | so it's a good idea to make sure
you're running the latest version.
| | 00:54 | Right now, I'm running iTunes 10.7.
| | 00:57 | But by the time you're watching this,
there might have been one or more
| | 01:00 | updated versions released.
| | 01:01 | You can see which version you're running
on a Mac by choosing iTunes>About iTunes,
| | 01:06 | and you can see here I'm running iTunes 10.7.
| | 01:14 | On Windows, you'll click the Help menu
and choose About iTunes.
| | 01:21 | To see if any updates are available on Windows,
choose Help>Check for Updates.
| | 01:28 | And as you can see, I get a message
telling me that I'm running the current version.
| | 01:32 | Similarly, on the Mac to see if any
updates are available,
| | 01:36 | choose iTunes>Check for Updates,
and again, I get the same message.
| | 01:43 | In the rest of this chapter,
we will look at what you can do
| | 01:46 | once you've connected your iPhone
or iPod touch to your computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting your iPhone to your Mac or PC| 00:00 | When it comes to syncing the data
between your IOS device and your computer,
| | 00:03 | you have the choice of doing so
by connecting your device to your Mac or PC
| | 00:07 | with the included USB cable,
or you can do so wirelessly,
| | 00:10 | as long as your device and your computer
are on the same wireless network.
| | 00:13 | But in order to sync wirelessly,
you need to setup your device first
| | 00:16 | by connecting one end of the included
USB cable into the device
| | 00:19 | and the other end into your computer.
| | 00:21 | If iTunes isn't currently open, it may open
once your iPhone or iPod touch is detected,
| | 00:26 | but that depends on a setting we will look at shortly.
| | 00:29 | If iTunes doesn't open, go ahead
and open it manually yourself.
| | 00:32 | When you first connect an iPhone
or iPod touch to your computer,
| | 00:35 | you may have to go through
a series of screens
| | 00:37 | where you are asked to agree to a licensing agreement
or to register your iPod.
| | 00:40 | Go ahead and do that on your own and eventually
you will be back in your main iTunes window
| | 00:44 | and your device should show up
under Devices in the source pane.
| | 00:47 | As you can see, I currently have my iPhone
plugged into my Mac its just showing up
| | 00:51 | under Devices here in the source pane of iTunes.
| | 00:53 | The first thing you should see when you
select your device in the source pane
| | 00:57 | is that the main part of the iTunes window
is organized into a series of tabs
| | 00:59 | with the Summary tab selected.
| | 01:03 | Under Summary, you can find your
device's vitals like its Name, Capacity,
| | 01:06 | Software Version and Serial Number.
| | 01:08 | Incidentally if you want to change the
name of your device,
| | 01:11 | just click it in the source pane
and type a new name.
| | 01:15 | This might be helpful if you have more
than one of the same iPod in the house
| | 01:19 | and you want to make sure your name
is associated with yours.
| | 01:21 | Under the Version section, you'll either see
| | 01:23 | a message telling you that
your iPod or iPhone software is up-to-date
| | 01:26 | or a message that a newer version
of the iPod software is available.
| | 01:29 | Apple is constantly releasing updates
to its iPods; sometimes fixing bugs,
| | 01:33 | other times adding major new features.
Generally, it's a good idea
| | 01:36 | to update to the latest version
of the software when it becomes available.
| | 01:40 | Just click the Update button that appears
to download and install the software.
| | 01:43 | Or in this case, I can click Check for Updates,
to have iTunes check for new software.
| | 01:48 | And I can see I'm running the current version.
| | 01:50 | This is also where you'll find a button
to restore your iPod touch or iPhone.
| | 01:53 | There may come a time when your device
is just acting plain weird.
| | 01:56 | Maybe it's not booting up right or it is locked up.
| | 01:59 | Now there are various fixes and solutions
you can find on Apple's website
| | 02:02 | and we'll talk more about this
in the Chapter on Troubleshooting.
| | 02:05 | But as a last resort, you can click
the Restore button to return the iPod
| | 02:08 | to its factory-new condition.
| | 02:10 | I say it is the last resort, because restoring
iPhone or iPod completely erases it
| | 02:14 | and installs a fresh copy of the software on it,
| | 02:16 | so you will lose all the items stored on it.
| | 02:18 | If you backup your phone or iPod regularly,
which again, we'll talk about how to do
| | 02:21 | in the Troubleshooting Chapter, you should
have copies of everything on iTunes anyway.
| | 02:24 | But it takes time to recopy
everything back to your device,
| | 02:27 | so use the Restore button as a last measure.
| | 02:31 | Next, we have the Backup section.
| | 02:32 | This includes an option to back up the iCloud,
which I'll talk about in its own movie
| | 02:36 | near the end of this chapter.
| | 02:38 | Now under the Options section
we have several options or checkboxes.
| | 02:42 | You can see that I have Open iTunes
when this iPhone is connected checked,
| | 02:46 | and I think that's pretty self-explanatory.
| | 02:47 | With this option checked, iTunes will open
whenever you connect your iPhone to your computer.
| | 02:51 | Next we have Sync with this iPhone over Wi-Fi.
| | 02:54 | This is the checkbox you want to check
if you want the ability to sync your device
| | 02:56 | with iTunes without connecting it with a USB cable.
| | 03:00 | I will cover this option in its
own movie at the end of this chapter.
| | 03:03 | Next we have Sync only checked songs and videos.
| | 03:05 | With this option checked,
iTunes won't include any unchecked files
| | 03:08 | when it copies files to your iPod.
| | 03:10 | That's referring to the checkboxes
that appear next your files in your library.
| | 03:13 | So I go into my Music Library here,
you can see all of my files are currently checked.
| | 03:17 | But if there are certain songs I don't want copied
over to my device, I can just uncheck them.
| | 03:23 | The next two options are useful
for saving space on your device.
| | 03:26 | If you check Prefer standard-definition videos
and you have two versions
| | 03:29 | of the same video in iTunes,
one-standard definition and one high-definition,
| | 03:33 | the standard-definition video will be
copied over to your device by default.
| | 03:37 | The option to Convert a higher bit rate songs to,
in this case 128 kbps AAC,
| | 03:42 | allows iTunes to automatically convert
larger song files into smaller song files
| | 03:46 | before copying them to your device.
| | 03:48 | The next option is Manually manage music and videos.
| | 03:51 | This is the option that lets you to manually
drag songs and videos to your iPod or iPhone,
| | 03:55 | rather than letting iTunes
move files automatically for you.
| | 03:58 | Now the question often comes up here
as to which option is better,
| | 04:01 | manual updating or automatic syncing?
| | 04:03 | And it really depends on whether you prefer
the control of manually managing your iPod
| | 04:06 | or if you prefer to setup some rules and playlists
to determine what gets copied to your iPod.
| | 04:12 | We'll look at the syncing options in just a moment,
but for now I am going to leave this unchecked.
| | 04:16 | So, those are the items and options
you will find into the Summary tab
| | 04:19 | when you connect your iPhone iPod touch.
| | 04:21 | In the rest of this chapter, we will
work our way through the rest of the tabs
| | 04:23 | and see how to manage the contents
of your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing music, movies, and ringtones| 00:00 | So let's look at how to get music, videos
and ring tones onto your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | Now I have setup my iPhone
to be manually managed.
| | 00:08 | You can see I have checked
Manually manage music and videos.
| | 00:10 | That just means I wanted the option
to drag whatever content I wanted onto my iPhone.
| | 00:14 | Now I should mention here that if you subscribe
to Apple's iTunes Match Service,
| | 00:18 | this checkbox will be labeled
Manually manage videos and you won't be able
| | 00:21 | to sync music that way I show you in this movie.
| | 00:24 | I will cover iTunes Match later
in this chapter so you may want to just jump ahead
| | 00:27 | if you're an iTunes Match Subscriber.
| | 00:29 | But in this example, I'm manually managing my music.
| | 00:32 | The way that this works is once I have
my device setup this way, I can go into
| | 00:35 | my Music Library and start grabbing any
and all songs I want to add to my iPhone
| | 00:41 | and I can just drag them to the iPhone
and that copies them over.
| | 00:46 | I can also grab entire playlists
and drag them to my iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:49 | I have a playlist in here called Driving tunes,
just select that and drag it to my iPhone
| | 00:55 | and all the songs in that playlist
are copied over to my iPhone.
| | 00:59 | And if I open that up, you can see
Driving tunes is right here
| | 01:03 | and it has the exact same songs in the exact
same order as my iTunes playlist.
| | 01:08 | But because I'm manually managing my music,
the version of the playlist
| | 01:11 | on my iPhone and the one on iTunes
don't stay synced together.
| | 01:14 | If I add more music to my Driving tunes
playlist in iTunes, for example --
| | 01:26 | so you can see they're there.
| | 01:27 | But if I go back to the one
on my iPhone, they're not there.
| | 01:30 | And the same is true in reverse.
| | 01:32 | You drag songs to your iPhone playlist
or even create new playlist on your iPhone,
| | 01:35 | but they won't get copied to your iTunes library.
| | 01:38 | But that's not really a problem
as long as you remember to re-drag
| | 01:40 | your iTunes playlists back to your iPhone.
| | 01:43 | I get this message telling me that playlist
already exists and do I want to replace it?
| | 01:47 | I will say Yes, and that copies
the missing songs to my device.
| | 01:53 | But manually syncing your music,
really doesn't mean you have to drag over
| | 01:56 | every song by hand in most cases.
| | 01:58 | Now you do have an option available
when you're manually syncing your music
| | 02:01 | to have iTunes do some of the work for you.
| | 02:03 | Select your iPhone or iPod's
Music Library in the source pane.
| | 02:07 | And at the bottom of the window,
we have a button labeled Autofill.
| | 02:11 | Basically when you click the Autofill button,
iTunes will fill up the free space
| | 02:14 | on your device with songs
from whichever library or playlist
| | 02:18 | you have selected from this menu.
| | 02:20 | This Setting buttons gives you
some control over this feature.
| | 02:25 | You can choose to replace everything
when auto filling, so if you're tired
| | 02:28 | of all the music on your iPod or iPhone,
you can have iTunes replace everything
| | 02:31 | with songs that weren't previously on it.
| | 02:33 | Choose items randomly is on by default.
| | 02:36 | Without this checked, iTunes will just
work in order down your playlist or library.
| | 02:39 | And you have the option to Choose
higher rated items more often.
| | 02:43 | So if you're in the habit of rating
your music, you can check this option,
| | 02:46 | so more of your favorite songs
show up more frequently.
| | 02:49 | Now this Reserve space for disk use option
is a holdover of an option
| | 02:53 | that is available for other iPods,
but not the iPod touch or the iPhone.
| | 02:56 | With the other iPod models, you can
enable disk use, which lets your iPod show up
| | 03:00 | as a hard drive in your computer,
so you can use it as an external drive
| | 03:04 | to copy files to and from.
| | 03:06 | Neither the iPod touch nor the iPhone
have this ability, though you can install
| | 03:09 | third-party software to enable this ability,
| | 03:11 | but we are not going to be covering that here.
| | 03:13 | With other iPods though, you can allocate space
to leave free in case you want
| | 03:16 | to use the iPod as an external hard drive.
| | 03:19 | You can just use the slider to determine
how much space you want to leave free.
| | 03:22 | iTunes will fill up the rest with your music.
| | 03:24 | I'll leave everything as is and click OK.
| | 03:28 | When you're we ready to go, you can click
Autofill and iTunes will fill up your iPod.
| | 03:31 | So the Autofill option is only available
if you manually manage your songs.
| | 03:34 | Now let's talk about
automatically syncing your songs.
| | 03:37 | To set that up, select your device
and go to the Music tab.
| | 03:42 | And in here, check Sync music.
| | 03:44 | Now it is very important to note here
that doing so will erase all the existing content
| | 03:48 | on your iPhone, because if you want
the items on your iPhone and iTunes playlists
| | 03:52 | or whatever you're syncing
to be identical, iTunes has to wipe off
| | 03:55 | what's already on the iPhone.
| | 03:56 | But for this example, I'm okay with
erasing all the music on my iPhone,
| | 03:59 | so I will click Sync Music.
| | 04:01 | Now just so you can see this,
when I go back to the Summary tab,
| | 04:06 | you can see that Manually manage music
and videos is now unchecked.
| | 04:08 | Let's go the back to the Music tab.
| | 04:10 | So we have some options here.
| | 04:12 | Entire music library means every
single song in my music library,
| | 04:15 | excluding unchecked songs,
if I have that option selected.
| | 04:18 | So every song in my library will be copied
to my device or I can choose to
| | 04:20 | Sync only Selected playlists,
artist, albums and genres.
| | 04:24 | Now it is entirely possible that the
size of your iTunes Library may exceed
| | 04:27 | the storage capacity of your iPhone
or iPod touch, so syncing your entire library
| | 04:32 | might not be an option.
| | 04:32 | In which case your only option is to choose to
| | 04:35 | Sync only Selected playlists,
artist, albums and genres.
| | 04:38 | So with that selected, I have a column
with my Playlists, a column of Artists,
| | 04:42 | a column of Genres and Albums.
| | 04:45 | All you have to do here is make your way
through these lists
| | 04:47 | and select the items you want to
sync to your device.
| | 04:49 | The beauty of this is, is that once
you've made your selections;
| | 04:51 | you don't have to do anything else.
| | 04:53 | So if I have The Beatles selected under Artists,
| | 04:56 | all of my Beatles music will be copied to my phone.
| | 04:58 | But later if I add a Beatles album
that I didn't previously have on iTunes,
| | 05:01 | the next time I sync my iPhone,
| | 05:03 | that new Beatles album will be
automatically copied to my iPhone.
| | 05:07 | If you want to make sure all the new songs
you have added to iTunes recently
| | 05:10 | get added to your device, just check
the Recently Added smart playlist,
| | 05:14 | which by default lists all songs added
in the past two weeks,
| | 05:16 | although you can modify the smart playlist
| | 05:18 | so it finds songs added longer ago,
in case you don't sync your device that often.
| | 05:23 | Now two more options we have here are
Include music videos and Include voice memos.
| | 05:26 | If you purchase music videos from the
iTunes store or if you have added video content
| | 05:31 | from elsewhere and tagged it
as a music video,
| | 05:33 | those files will be included
when you sync your iPhone.
| | 05:35 | Or if you have recorded any voice memos
on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 05:39 | which we'll discuss how to do
in a later chapter,
| | 05:42 | you make sure those items
are copied over to your computer.
| | 05:44 | And we also have Automatically fill free
space with songs, which as its name implies,
| | 05:48 | fills up remaining space on your device
with other songs from your library.
| | 05:52 | Although Apple doesn't offer any documentation
on how it picks the content, personally,
| | 05:55 | my thought is, if you have gone
to the trouble to select specific
| | 05:58 | Playlists, Artist, or Genre to sync,
why would you want a selection
| | 06:01 | of random songs on your device as well?
| | 06:03 | But if that's what you want,
you can check this option.
| | 06:05 | Once you are done making your selection,
you can click Sync or Apply
| | 06:09 | and iTunes will begin copying the files to your iPhone.
| | 06:12 | So that's how you can both manually
and automatically sync music to your iPhone
| | 06:15 | or iPod and it works pretty much
the same way for Ring Tones, Movies,
| | 06:21 | TV Shows, Podcasts and Audio Books.
| | 06:24 | If you have your iPhone set up
for manual updating, you can just drag
| | 06:27 | all that content to it.
| | 06:29 | But under each of these tabs
is an option to sync them.
| | 06:32 | We can sync Books, sync Movies and so on.
| | 06:35 | And in each case, you can choose
what sort of content to sync.
| | 06:38 | If you understood how to sync Music,
then you understand how to sync Movies
| | 06:41 | and TV Shows and other content.
| | 06:43 | Basically, the choice is boiled down to copying over
all your content in each category
| | 06:46 | or copying just content you added recently
| | 06:49 | or content you haven't watched yet
or listened to yet.
| | 06:51 | It is fairly self-explanatory.
| | 06:55 | Now when it comes to copying items
like Photos, Contacts and Calendars
| | 06:58 | to your iPhone or iPod touch, the process
between Macs and Windows computers
| | 07:01 | is different, so we'll look at both
platforms in turn in upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a Mac| 00:01 | In this video we're going to look at how to
copy photos from your Mac onto your
| | 00:04 | iPhone or iPod touch, as well as how
to copy the photos you shoot on your iPhone
| | 00:07 | or iPod touch, onto your Mac.
| | 00:09 | I still have my iPhone attached to my Mac,
although this will also work
| | 00:12 | if you're using wireless syncing.
| | 00:14 | With my device selected, I'll click the Photos tab
and all I have to do here
| | 00:18 | is check Sync photos from, and then select
where I want the photos to come from.
| | 00:22 | Now, you can only sync your photos from
one location on your Mac, so it matters
| | 00:26 | where you store the photos you
want to copy to your iPod or iPhone.
| | 00:29 | You can choose your Pictures folder,
which is located in your Home folder
| | 00:33 | or you can Choose any other location on your Mac
if you have your photos stored elsewhere.
| | 00:37 | But if you have iPhoto on your Mac
and you use it to manage and organize
| | 00:40 | your digital photos, select iPhoto from the menu.
| | 00:43 | Now the default setting is to copy all
Photos, Albums, Events and Faces to your device.
| | 00:48 | But if you have thousands of photos
in your iPhoto Library, you might not want
| | 00:51 | to copy over every single one.
| | 00:53 | In that case, choose
Selected Albums, Events and Faces.
| | 00:56 | We also have the option to include
any videos that are stored in iPhoto.
| | 01:00 | So if you've taken videos with your digital
still camera and they're in iPhoto,
| | 01:03 | you can choose to have those copied over,
if they fall into one of the
| | 01:05 | categories you select below.
| | 01:08 | So here, you can choose to copy the photos
from Albums or Events or even based on Faces.
| | 01:12 | Let's go over the iPhoto for a moment
to see where this information is coming from.
| | 01:16 | So here on iPhoto, you can see I have
a collection of photos that are organized
| | 01:19 | into Events, as well as an Album
or two that I've created.
| | 01:23 | And under Faces, I have taken advantage
of iPhoto's face recognition technology
| | 01:28 | where you can find photos based
on who appears in them.
| | 01:30 | So back in iTunes, I can now choose to copy
my photos to my iPhone based
| | 01:34 | on Albums, Events or Faces.
| | 01:36 | So maybe I'll choose to copy over my Travel
and Dogs albums, as well as a couple
| | 01:41 | of Faces, and maybe an Event.
| | 01:44 | You can see numbers appear next to each
one of these items telling you how many
| | 01:47 | photos are in those particular selections.
| | 01:49 | That's basically it.
| | 01:50 | And I can click Apply and now my photos
are being copied over to my iPhone.
| | 01:56 | And here on my iPhone, I can now
navigate and view the photos I copied over.
| | 02:00 | Look more managing photos in the
chapter on Shooting Photos and Video,
| | 02:03 | but notice that we have the option
to view the photos in the library, by Albums,
| | 02:09 | Events and Faces, among other categories.
| | 02:13 | You'll see the Places category,
if you've taken advantage of the Places feature
| | 02:18 | of iPhoto, which groups photos
based on GPS location.
| | 02:21 | But I'll go back to Albums, and here
I can see the Travel album I copied over
| | 02:27 | and the Dogs album I copied over.
| | 02:30 | Now it's important to keep in mind that syncing
photos through iTunes is only a one-way trip.
| | 02:34 | You are only copying photos from iPhoto
or some other location to your device.
| | 02:39 | If you shoot photos on your iPhone or iPod touch,
you are going to have photos
| | 02:42 | on your device's camera roll
that aren't on your Mac.
| | 02:45 | So, let's take a look at how to copy
the images from your device to your Mac.
| | 02:48 | When you connect your iPhone
or iPod touch to your Mac,
| | 02:50 | in addition to iTunes opening,
if you have it set it to do so,
| | 02:53 | the other application
that probably opens is iPhoto.
| | 02:56 | By default on your Mac, iPhoto should
open when you connect a camera
| | 02:59 | and as far as iPhoto is concerned,
your iPhone is a camera.
| | 03:02 | I'll show you how to turn off that option
in just a little bit though.
| | 03:06 | I should also mention here that this will
only work when you connect your device
| | 03:08 | to your Mac via the USB cable.
| | 03:11 | This doesn't work wirelessly.
| | 03:12 | So here on iPhoto, I can see my
device sitting here in the source pane.
| | 03:15 | And when I select the device,
the photos stored on it appear.
| | 03:17 | To copy these photos from my Mac,
I can either click the import, in this case
| | 03:21 | 102 photos to copy all the photos from
my camera roll or I can scroll through,
| | 03:26 | find the pictures that I want to copy,
either by Clicking, Dragging
| | 03:33 | or Cmd+Clicking to select multiple photos,
and then clicking Import Selected.
| | 03:41 | And now those photos have been
copied into my iPhoto library.
| | 03:44 | You're given the option here to delete
the photos off your device if you want
| | 03:47 | or you can keep them
on both your device and your Mac.
| | 03:49 | I'll choose to Keep the Photos.
| | 03:52 | So, that's how you get images from
youriPhone or iPod touch onto your Mac.
| | 03:56 | And again, we'll talk more about shooting
photos and videos with your iPhone
| | 03:59 | in an upcoming chapter.
| | 04:01 | Okay. So what if you don't want iPhoto opening,
every time you plug
| | 04:03 | your iPhone or iPod touch into your Mac?
| | 04:05 | It can get kind of annoying if all you want to do
is put some songs in your device
| | 04:08 | and iPhoto keeps opening up.
| | 04:10 | As I mentioned, iPhoto sees your
iPhone and iPod touch as cameras,
| | 04:13 | and the default behavior on Mac
is to open iPhoto when a camera is attached.
| | 04:17 | To turn this off, go into your
Applications folder and locate and open
| | 04:21 | the application called Image Capture.
| | 04:24 | Your iPhone or iPod touch should
appear under Devices here as well.
| | 04:27 | With your device selected, you'll see a menu
down below, let me expand this window
| | 04:31 | a little bit and you can see this says,
Connecting this iPhone opens,
| | 04:35 | and in this case, iPhoto is selected.
| | 04:38 | If you don't want any of these applications
to open when you connect your iPhone,
| | 04:40 | choose No application.
| | 04:43 | You'll have the same options available
if you have an iPod touch selected,
| | 04:46 | then Quit Image Capture.
| | 04:49 | Incidentally, you can do this with
any other camera or memory card reader
| | 04:52 | you connect to your Mac.
| | 04:53 | So from now on, iPhoto won't
automatically open when I connect my iPhone
| | 04:58 | and I'll need to open iPhoto myself
in order to copy photos into it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing photos from a PC| 00:00 | In this video, we're going to look at how
to copy photos from your computer
| | 00:03 | running Windows onto your iPhone
or iPod touch, as well as how to copy
| | 00:06 | the photos you shoot on your iPhone
or iPod touch, back into Windows.
| | 00:10 | I have my iPhone attached to my Windows
machine, although this will work
| | 00:13 | if you want to use wireless syncing as well.
| | 00:15 | With it selected, I'll go to the Photos tab.
| | 00:18 | All I have to do here is check Sync Photos
from and then select where I want
| | 00:22 | the photos to come from.
| | 00:23 | Now, you can only sync your photos
to one location on your computer,
| | 00:26 | so it matters where you store the photos
you want to copy it to your iPod or iPhone.
| | 00:30 | You can choose My Pictures and
if I go to the Start menu and select Pictures,
| | 00:35 | you can see I have some folders
of photos in here.
| | 00:39 | If your photos are stored elsewhere
in your computer, you can select
| | 00:42 | Choose folder to locate that folder.
| | 00:44 | But in this case, I want to
keep My Picture selected.
| | 00:47 | You can see that I can choose to
Sync All the Photos found in My Pictures folder
| | 00:50 | or I can choose Selected folders,
which then lets me select which folders
| | 00:54 | of images I want to copy to my iPhone.
| | 00:57 | Maybe I want a copy of my photos
from Australia and Taiwan.
| | 01:00 | But basically, that's it.
| | 01:01 | I click Apply and now my photos
are being copied over to my iPhone.
| | 01:07 | And now on my iPhone, I can navigate
and view the photos I just copied over
| | 01:11 | by going into My Photos App.
| | 01:13 | We'll look more at managing photos
in the chapter on shooting photos and video.
| | 01:17 | Now it's important to keep in mind that
syncing photos through iTunes is only a one-way trip.
| | 01:21 | You're only copying photos
from your PC to your device.
| | 01:25 | If you shoot photos on your iPhone or
iPod touch, you are going to have photos
| | 01:28 | on your device that aren't on your computer,
so let's take a look at how to copy
| | 01:31 | the images from your device to your computer.
| | 01:34 | When you connect your iPhone or iPod touch
to your PC, in addition to iTunes opening,
| | 01:38 | if you have it set to do so,
a dialog box will open up asking you
| | 01:41 | what you want to do
with the device you just connected.
| | 01:44 | Your PC sees the iPhone and iPod touch
as a camera containing images,
| | 01:47 | you have the choice here to Import pictures
and videos using Windows or you can
| | 01:50 | Open the device to view the files
using Windows Explorer.
| | 01:53 | If you have any image or photo editing
software installed in your computer,
| | 01:56 | you may see the choice to open
your photos in that program as well.
| | 02:00 | Before you click an option, you can
check Always do this for this device,
| | 02:02 | so you don't have to use this dialog box
every time you connect
| | 02:05 | your iPhone or iPod touch to your PC.
| | 02:08 | Then you can click your selection
of how you want to import your images.
| | 02:11 | In this case I'll choose Import pictures
and videos using Windows.
| | 02:15 | I won't tag these pictures right now
and I'll just click Import.
| | 02:18 | And now my photos have been imported to my PC.
| | 02:20 | Now if you change your mind on how
you want your computer to handle images
| | 02:23 | from your iPhone or iPod touch,
you can go to the Start menu
| | 02:27 | to Control panel and select Autoplay.
| | 02:30 | At the bottom of this list of devices,
you should find your device.
| | 02:34 | I can see my iPhone here and you can
use the menu next to it to select
| | 02:37 | a different action to occur
when you plug it into your computer.
| | 02:40 | If I want nothing to happen,
I can choose to Take no action for example,
| | 02:43 | and then save my selection.
| | 02:46 | Incidentally, you can do this
with any other camera or memory card reader
| | 02:49 | you connect to your PC, if you need
to adjust how your computer works
| | 02:52 | with your photo devices.
| | 02:53 | So, that's how to move photos back
and forth between your Windows machine
| | 02:56 | and your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a Mac| 00:00 | In addition to you copying your music,
movies, and photos to your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:04 | you can also sync all of your
contacts and calendars, so if you carry
| | 00:07 | around your iPod or iPhone all the time,
you have quick access to your
| | 00:11 | addresses, phone numbers and schedule.
| | 00:13 | The process is slightly different
between Macs and Windows,
| | 00:16 | so in this movie, we'll look at
how this works on the Mac.
| | 00:19 | If you're on Windows, you
can jump to the next movie.
| | 00:21 | Here in iTunes I'll select my iPhone
and I'm going to go to the Info tab.
| | 00:25 | When you're working on a Mac,
your contact information comes
| | 00:28 | from your Address Book application
found in your Applications folder.
| | 00:31 | I've added mine to the dock
and I'll select it here.
| | 00:34 | So I just have a few example contacts in here,
but you can see I've also created
| | 00:37 | some address book groups called
Family, Friends and Work.
| | 00:41 | Back here in iTunes I'll check Sync Contacts
and then choose whether I want to
| | 00:45 | copy over All my contacts from
address book or just Selected groups.
| | 00:49 | If I choose Groups, I can
then select which groups I want.
| | 00:52 | Maybe I want to just copy
over my Family and Friends.
| | 00:55 | Down below we have three more checkboxes.
| | 00:58 | Because you can also create new
contact info on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 01:01 | you'll probably want to select default
group to place new contacts into when you
| | 01:04 | later sync your iPhone with your Mac.
| | 01:07 | So I can check Add contacts created outside
of groups into say Friends.
| | 01:12 | If you're a Yahoo! Mail or Gmail user, you can check
either of these two boxes to import your
| | 01:16 | contacts from Yahoo or Gmail to your device.
| | 01:18 | I'll leave this unchecked.
| | 01:19 | That's really all there is to syncing
your contacts to your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 01:24 | Before I click Apply to copy the
contacts over, let's look at Calendars.
| | 01:28 | On a Mac, your calendar information
is going to come from the Calendar app
| | 01:31 | included with Mac OS X and again
found your Applications folder.
| | 01:35 | I have it here on my dock, and you can
see I have several calendars set up in here.
| | 01:39 | I have Calendar, Home, Work and Workouts.
| | 01:44 | So back here in iTunes I can check,
Sync Calendars.
| | 01:46 | Unlike with the contacts, it gives me
the option to Sync All of my calendars
| | 01:50 | or just Selected calendars.
| | 01:52 | I'll keep All calendars selected in this case.
| | 01:54 | We also have this checkbox here;
| | 01:57 | Do not sync events older than,
in this case, 30 days.
| | 01:59 | So if you don't feel the need to carry
around your events from last year
| | 02:02 | on your iPhone or iPod touch, you can check
this and type in a number of days.
| | 02:06 | So once I'm done with my Contact and
Calendar settings, I can click Apply
| | 02:09 | or Sync and now that information
is being sent over to my iPhone.
| | 02:14 | And here on my iPhone, I can go
into my Phone and Contacts
| | 02:18 | and here are the contacts I synced.
| | 02:20 | If I go into Groups you can see my
Family and Friends that I copied over
| | 02:25 | and if I go into Calendar app, I can see
Events on each of those dates,
| | 02:31 | and in Calendars, I can see the
individual calendars that I copied over.
| | 02:35 | Now, bear in mind that every time you
sync your phone, it's a two direction sync.
| | 02:39 | If you've created any new contacts on
your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 02:42 | or if you've created any new events in your
calendar on your device,
| | 02:45 | those items will get copied over
to your Mac during the sync
| | 02:48 | and you'll find your new contacts in address book,
your new events in the calendar.
| | 02:52 | And that remains true if you've just
altered any contacts or calendars
| | 02:54 | on your device as well.
| | 02:56 | So if you changed a friend's phone number
or moved the meeting to a different time
| | 02:59 | on your iPhone, when you sync,
iTunes will be able to see the information
| | 03:02 | on your phone as newer, and make the
changes to the Contacts and Events
| | 03:05 | on your Mac.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing contacts and calendars from a PC| 00:00 | In addition to you syncing your music,
movies and photos, your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:04 | also supports the syncing
of Contacts and Calendars.
| | 00:07 | So if you carry your iPhone or iPod
around all the time you have quick access to
| | 00:11 | your phone numbers,
addresses, and your schedule.
| | 00:14 | In this movie, we'll look
at how this works on Windows.
| | 00:16 | If you're on a Mac, you can checkout
the previous movie for info on how to sync
| | 00:19 | Contacts and Calendars with your device.
| | 00:21 | Here in iTunes I'll select my iPhone
and I'm going to go to the Info tab.
| | 00:26 | Here, I'm going to check Sync Contacts.
| | 00:29 | When you're working on a PC you can
choose to sync with Outlook, Google Contacts
| | 00:33 | or Windows Contacts.
| | 00:35 | If you're using Outlook, it has to be
Outlook 2003 or later or Outlook Express.
| | 00:40 | If you don't have Outlook, you can use
your Windows Contacts or your Google Contacts.
| | 00:43 | If you want to use Windows Contacts,
you'll find those by going to your Start menu,
| | 00:47 | to your Username and then Contacts.
| | 00:51 | And as you can see, I have a
couple sample contacts in here.
| | 00:55 | So I'm going to choose Windows Contacts.
| | 01:01 | Here, you can see I can choose whether
I want to copy over All my contacts,
| | 01:04 | or just Selected groups.
| | 01:06 | If I choose Selected groups, I can then
select which groups I want.
| | 01:09 | For example, for my iPhone, maybe I want to
only copy over my Family and Friends contacts.
| | 01:14 | Now, because you can also create new
contact info on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 01:18 | you'll probably want to select default
group to place new contacts into,
| | 01:21 | when you later sync your iPhone
with your Windows machine.
| | 01:24 | So I can check Add contacts created
outside of groups on this iPhone to,
| | 01:28 | and maybe I'll select the
default group of Friends.
| | 01:30 | That's really all there is to syncing your
contacts to your iPod touch or your iPhone.
| | 01:35 | But before I click Apply to copy the
contacts over, let's look at calendars.
| | 01:39 | On Windows, your calendar information
has to come from Outlook 2003 or later.
| | 01:43 | So if you don't have Outlook installed,
you can't sync calendar info to your device.
| | 01:47 | I do have Outlook installed, and you can
see I have a couple of calendars in here.
| | 01:52 | I have Calendar, Workouts and Home.
| | 01:57 | So back here in iTunes, I'll check,
Sync Calendars with, and again, you can see
| | 02:01 | Outlook really is the only choice.
| | 02:03 | But I can choose to Sync All
calendars or just Selected calendars.
| | 02:07 | Maybe on my iPhone I only want
my Home and Workout schedule.
| | 02:09 | We also have the option to check,
Do not sync events older than, in this case, 30 days.
| | 02:14 | So if you don't feel the need to carry around your
events from last year on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 02:18 | you can check this and type in a number of days.
| | 02:22 | So once I'm done with by Contact and
Calendar settings, I just click Apply
| | 02:24 | and that will send all that info to my iPhone.
| | 02:27 | And here on my iPhone I can go into my Contacts,
and there are the Contacts I synced over.
| | 02:31 | I've got my Family and Friends in here,
and if I go to the Calendar,
| | 02:37 | I can see the Home and Workout
calendars I've synced over as well.
| | 02:41 | Now, bear in mind that every time you
sync your phone, it's a two direction sync.
| | 02:45 | So if you've created any new contacts
in your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 02:48 | or if you've created any new events in your
calendar on your device,
| | 02:51 | those items will get copied over
to your PC during the sync.
| | 02:55 | That remains true if you just altered any
contacts or calendars on your device, too.
| | 02:58 | So if you've changed a friend's number
or moved a meeting to a different time
| | 03:01 | on your iPhone, when you sync, iTunes will
be able to see the information
| | 03:05 | on your phone as newer, and make the changes
to the Contacts and Events on your PC.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Backup options| 00:00 | Under the Summary section you see in iTunes
when you have your iPhone selected,
| | 00:04 | you'll find the Backup area, where you can
choose to back up your device to your computer
| | 00:07 | through iTunes or to your iCloud account
if you have one.
| | 00:11 | Should you ever lose your phone or if
something crashes on it and it needs to
| | 00:14 | be completely restored, you can copy its
contents and settings from your most recent backup.
| | 00:18 | As I've mentioned, iCloud is Apple's
free online storage and syncing service.
| | 00:22 | If you haven't yet created an iCloud account,
you can set one up by going to iCloud.com.
| | 00:27 | Doing so gets you access to the iCloud services
and 5 GB of storage space.
| | 00:32 | When you back up your device, you're
backing up its settings, app data,
| | 00:35 | app organization, messages, the photos
and videos on the camera roll and so on.
| | 00:40 | It also backs up information about the
music and videos you've purchased
| | 00:43 | from the iTunes store, so if you ever
need to restore them,
| | 00:46 | you'll be able to download them
again from the store.
| | 00:48 | Music and videos you've sync from
your computer aren't backed up though.
| | 00:51 | So if ever you need to restore your phone,
you'll have to grab those files
| | 00:54 | by syncing with iTunes again, which we've
looked at how to do earlier in this chapter.
| | 00:58 | The advantage of syncing with iCloud is that
you're not tying your device to your computer.
| | 01:02 | For example, if you're on a trip and
have trouble with your phone,
| | 01:05 | you can restore it directly over the Internet
from your phone without needing
| | 01:08 | to connect it to your computer and iTunes.
| | 01:11 | We'll see how to restore your iPhone
in the Troubleshooting Chapter
| | 01:13 | at the end of this course.
| | 01:15 | Also, if you choose to back up to iCloud,
your device will automatically
| | 01:18 | back itself up on a daily basis, as long
as it's plugged into a power source
| | 01:21 | and connected to the Internet over
Wi-Fi and your screen is locked.
| | 01:25 | If you choose the back up to iTunes,
your device will back up any time
| | 01:28 | you connect it to your computer and sync it.
| | 01:30 | You can also right-click on your device
and choose Backup to perform a manual backup.
| | 01:35 | There's also an option here to Encrypt local backup.
| | 01:38 | If you're worried about sensitive
information from your phone being stored
| | 01:41 | on your computer once you sync with it,
you can check this option
| | 01:44 | and iTunes will protect the backup with encryption.
| | 01:46 | Now, you're not limited to always
having to back up to iCloud
| | 01:49 | or always backing up to your computer.
| | 01:50 | In fact, you might want to occasionally
alternate between these two options
| | 01:53 | by choosing say Back up to iCloud first,
so you have a copy of the back up on iCloud
| | 01:58 | and then later choosing Back up to this computer
and keeping a copy on your computer.
| | 02:02 | The important thing is that you do
backup your device periodically,
| | 02:05 | so you'll be able to restore your settings and
content, should you ever run into problems.
| | 02:09 | Again, I'll show you how to restore
your device in the last chapter.
| | 02:13 | Now, in iOS 6, you can check out
your iCloud backup settings,
| | 02:15 | by going to Settings, iCloud, and then
scroll down and tap Storage & Backup.
| | 02:24 | Here you can see how much storage
space you have in your account
| | 02:26 | and how much of that space is free.
| | 02:28 | This is also where you can turn on
iCloud backup directly from your device.
| | 02:33 | If you've previously set up your device
to sync through iTunes,
| | 02:35 | you'll see this message telling you that your phone
will no longer back up to your computer
| | 02:39 | when you sync it with iTunes.
| | 02:41 | But you can always switch back at any time.
| | 02:43 | If you're concerned about taking up too
much space on your iCloud account,
| | 02:46 | you can tap Manage Storage.
| | 02:49 | Here, select your device and under
Backup options, you'll find the list
| | 02:53 | of the apps that are taking up the most space.
| | 02:56 | And you can choose to turn individual apps off
if you don't need to back up their data.
| | 03:00 | So for example, maybe I don't need
to use GarageBand Backup, so I'll turn that off,
| | 03:03 | and I'll tap Turn Off & Delete to delete
that backup data from my iCloud account.
| | 03:07 | Remember, you can always switch back
to syncing to your computer
| | 03:09 | if you want to make sure you have a full backup.
| | 03:12 | Then you can go back to Manage Storage
and here you can either tap Back Up Now,
| | 03:18 | to backup to your iCloud account
right away or just leave this ON,
| | 03:20 | and your device will back itself up the next time
you have it connected to a power source.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wireless syncing| 00:00 | Back with the release of iOS 5, Apple
made it possible to sync your iOS device
| | 00:04 | with your computer without the
need to connect it via a USB cable.
| | 00:08 | In order to set this up, you do have
to connect your device to your computer
| | 00:11 | with a USB cable at least once though.
| | 00:13 | I have my iPhone connected, so I'll
select it and here under the Summary tab
| | 00:17 | I'll check Sync with this iPhone over Wi-Fi,
and then I'll click Apply. That's it.
| | 00:24 | Your phone will now sync with iTunes
any time it's on same network as your computer
| | 00:27 | and when it's connected to a power source,
maybe while you're charging it overnight.
| | 00:32 | At this point I'll actually unplug my USB cable
from my computer
| | 00:35 | and notice that my iPhone still appears here in iTunes.
| | 00:39 | Now officially, according to Apple,
you need to plug your device into a power source
| | 00:42 | in order for it to automatically sync.
| | 00:45 | In my experience, you can still sync
over Wi-Fi without your phone being
| | 00:48 | connected to a power source, but for
this example I'm going plug my phone into the
| | 00:51 | power adapter that came with it.
| | 00:53 | Not that you can see me doing this,
but you have to take my word for it.
| | 00:56 | Notice I can still browse the contents of the phone.
| | 00:59 | I can look at its music, its movies,
even though it's not physically
| | 01:02 | connected to my computer.
| | 01:04 | So for instance, I want to add more music to it.
| | 01:07 | First, I'll turn on Manually manage
music and videos, so I'll Apply that.
| | 01:11 | You can see it's looking for my phone, it's found it.
| | 01:14 | So now, I can actually go to my Music Library,
select some songs
| | 01:18 | and drag them into my phone.
| | 01:21 | You'll know your device is syncing by this
little spinning icon that appears in the menu bar.
| | 01:26 | Just make sure you stay within range of your
wireless network while the syncing is going on.
| | 01:30 | So this is great for those times when
you're at your computer,
| | 01:33 | but maybe your iPhone is sitting on its
charger in another room of the house.
| | 01:36 | You can still sync without having to go
get it and attach it to your computer.
| | 01:41 | Now, for those times when you want to
sync your device with your computer,
| | 01:45 | but you're not sitting at your computer,
maybe you've just added a contact to your
| | 01:47 | address book and you want to make sure
it gets added to your computer's address book,
| | 01:50 | you can go to Settings, General, iTunes Wi-Fi Sync.
| | 01:57 | Here, I just tap Sync Now to manually sync
your device over your network right away.
| | 02:04 | Now, Apple says that you need
to connect your device to a power source
| | 02:08 | in order for it to sync, but it's been my
experience that you can unplug your device
| | 02:10 | once it shows up in iTunes, and it will
continue to show up and work properly
| | 02:13 | if you wanted to do a manual sync like this.
| | 02:15 | I believe the reason Apple wants you
to keep it plugged in
| | 02:17 | is so that the battery doesn't
die during a sync or backup.
| | 02:20 | So it's still a good idea to keep your
device plugged into a power source
| | 02:23 | if you're going to be transferring
a lot of content back and forth.
| | 02:25 | But as you can see, we now have the
convenience of being able to sync our iOS devices
| | 02:31 | without having to plug them into a computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using iTunes Match| 00:00 | Previously in this chapter, we saw how to sync music
from our iTunes Library to the iPhone.
| | 00:04 | But I mentioned that if you're an
iTunes Match subscriber, the method
| | 00:08 | for getting music to your device is different.
| | 00:10 | So in this movie let's take a look at how
to setup and use iTunes Match.
| | 00:13 | First of all, iTunes Match is a paid
service from Apple that let's you store
| | 00:17 | your music library in iCloud.
| | 00:19 | You can then play and download the music
in your collection on your iOS devices
| | 00:22 | and other computers running iTunes.
| | 00:24 | To set it up, open iTunes and go
to Store, Turn On iTunes Match.
| | 00:29 | iTunes Match currently costs about $25 per year,
so if you'd like to use this service,
| | 00:33 | click the Subscribe button.
| | 00:35 | You'll be asked to Sign In with your Apple ID
| | 00:41 | and iTunes Match will run through these three steps,
Analyzing your iTunes library,
| | 00:46 | Matching the songs with the iTunes store
and then Uploading artwork and remaining songs.
| | 00:51 | Depending on the size of your collection,
this could take several hours
| | 00:53 | or even a couple of days.
| | 00:55 | So, basically, what iTunes is doing here
is analyzing your entire music library.
| | 01:00 | Any songs in your collection
that are available on the iTunes store
| | 01:02 | are made available for you to download
onto other devices.
| | 01:06 | This includes music you didn't purchase
from the iTunes store.
| | 01:08 | For example, if you bought a CD and
ripped it to your computer and that album
| | 01:12 | is available on the iTunes Store, then it's
automatically available for you to download.
| | 01:15 | I have CDs that I bought back in the early 90s
that I can now download through
| | 01:19 | iTunes Match and those files are
all high-quality iTunes plus files, it's pretty cool.
| | 01:25 | Any songs in your library that aren't available
for sale on the iTunes Store are
| | 01:28 | uploaded to your iCloud account.
| | 01:30 | So depending on how large or eclectic
your collection is, it may take a while
| | 01:34 | for all these songs to upload.
| | 01:36 | The nice thing is iTunes Match storage
doesn't count against your free
| | 01:39 | iCloud storage space.
| | 01:42 | But once your songs have all been uploaded,
you can set up your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 01:46 | by going to Settings, Music
and here turn on iTunes Match.
| | 01:53 | You'll be asked to Sign In with your Apple ID
and then tap Enable
| | 02:00 | to indicate that you understand any music
currently on your device will be replaced.
| | 02:03 | With iTunes Match on, you'll see
two additional toggle switches appear.
| | 02:06 | With Use Cellular Data on, iTunes Match
will download content over your Cellular
| | 02:10 | account when your iPhone isn't connected
to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 02:13 | Be aware that this will count against your data plan,
| | 02:16 | so you may not want to keep this option on.
| | 02:18 | Show All Music displays all the music
that's available for you to download from
| | 02:21 | your iTunes Match account.
| | 02:22 | Basically, it mirrors your iTunes Library.
| | 02:25 | With this switched off, you'll only see
the songs you've downloaded
| | 02:28 | and which reside on your device.
| | 02:30 | So let's leave that ON
and go over the to the Music app.
| | 02:33 | We'll cover the music app more fully
in a later chapter, but for now,
| | 02:37 | you can see I have Artists selected and you can
see the Artists from my iTunes library.
| | 02:42 | None of these albums are on my iPhone right now,
but I can still browse through
| | 02:46 | my entire library, select an Artist, and if I want,
I could click the Download
| | 02:51 | button here to download all three of these albums
or I can tap an individual album
| | 02:55 | and here I can download this entire album
by clicking the Download button
| | 02:59 | at the top of the screen or I can just tap
to download individual songs.
| | 03:07 | Tapping a song starts playing it as a stream,
but it also downloads in the process.
| | 03:12 | So if you have an iPhone with a smaller
internal hard drive, you may want
| | 03:16 | to be selective about which songs
you store in your device.
| | 03:18 | So if I wanted to download a couple more songs
from this Album, I can just tap them.
| | 03:30 | Now, to show you how this works,
I'm going to go back to my Music settings x
| | 03:36 | to be I'm going to turn OFF Show All Music.
| | 03:38 | So now when I go back to the Music app,
you can see that now I'm only seeing
| | 03:43 | the songs I've downloaded so far.
| | 03:45 | So that's iTunes Match.
| | 03:46 | You can repeat this process for any other
iOS devices you have, like an iPad,
| | 03:50 | and you can also Sign In to iTunes Match
on other computers running iTunes.
| | 03:53 | For more information on how it works,
visit apple.com/itunes/itunesmatch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. The Phone Part of the iPhoneBasic phone activities| 00:00 | This chapter is all about using the iPhone
to place, receive, and manage phone calls,
| | 00:04 | because after all it's called the iPhone,
so it had better deliver in the area of making calls.
| | 00:10 | Since the iPod touch isn't a phone,
most of the movies in this chapter won't apply to it,
| | 00:14 | although one or two movies
like the ones on sharing contacts,
| | 00:17 | using face time, and using iMessage
are relevant to the iPod touch.
| | 00:21 | All right, let's begin with the look at the basic
features of the iPhone's phone capabilities.
| | 00:25 | To do most things phone related,
you have to open up the phone app.
| | 00:30 | The phone app is divided into
five sections across the bottom:
| | 00:33 | Favorites, Recents, Contacts, Keypad and Voicemail.
| | 00:38 | Briefly, Favorites, which is currently selected here,
| | 00:41 | is where you store your most frequently called
or used numbers.
| | 00:43 | We'll look at how to manage this area
in an upcoming movie.
| | 00:47 | Recents is a list of every call you have
Placed, Received or Missed.
| | 00:51 | Tapping any these numbers
instantly dials that number back.
| | 00:54 | Tapping the blue arrow next to the
listing gives you the details of the call,
| | 00:58 | which can be useful if you want
to see the time and date
| | 01:00 | when the call is placed, received, or missed.
| | 01:04 | You can also filter the list to just see missed calls.
| | 01:08 | You can remove listings from the Recents list
by sliding your finger across an entry
| | 01:11 | to reveal the Delete button
and then tapping Delete.
| | 01:16 | Alternately, tap the Edit button.
| | 01:19 | Here tap the red delete icon to reveal the Delete button
and remove individual numbers.
| | 01:25 | You can also tap Clear to delete
everything in this list.
| | 01:28 | When you're done, tap Done.
| | 01:30 | Next, we have the Contacts area.
| | 01:32 | This is essentially your address book.
| | 01:34 | From here you can access the numbers
and addresses of all the people
| | 01:36 | you've added to the contacts on your computer
if you have synced your iPhone to your computer,
| | 01:40 | as well as the contacts
you have created on the iPhone.
| | 01:43 | Now this Contact section of the
phone app is identical to the contacts app
| | 01:47 | you can find either on your home screen or
whichever screen you might have moved it to.
| | 01:52 | Personally, I never use the contacts app,
since I can get to it from the phone app,
| | 01:55 | but some people like to able to acces their contacts
| | 01:58 | without having to go into the phone app.
| | 02:00 | Just know that they both
take you to the same place.
| | 02:06 | Next, we have the Keypad,
which as its name implies,
| | 02:09 | is a keypad for dialing out from your phone.
| | 02:13 | Just tap in the number you want to call.
| | 02:18 | If you make a mistake you
can tap the Backspace button.
| | 02:23 | Once you have the number entered,
tap Call to place the call.
| | 02:26 | This button to the left of the Call button
is for adding numbers you dialed
| | 02:29 | to your contacts list.
| | 02:30 | We'll talk more about adding contacts later.
| | 02:33 | The fifth and final section is for
checking your Voicemail messages,
| | 02:35 | which is where you view
and listen to the messages left for you
| | 02:38 | by people whose calls
you either missed or didn't answer.
| | 02:41 | We'll take an in-depth to look
at voicemail in an upcoming movie,
| | 02:44 | but for now those are the five sections
of the iPhone's Phone App.
| | 02:47 | You might have noticed that you can
dial your phone from each one of those areas,
| | 02:50 | so once you understand what each area is for,
| | 02:52 | you'll then figure out the best section to use
when you need to place a call.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and managing favorites| 00:00 | The Favorites list on the phone app
of your iPhone is a place to store
| | 00:04 | and quickly access the numbers of the
people and places you call most often.
| | 00:08 | With the number stored here, you don't
have to worry about navigating through
| | 00:11 | a series of screens or manually dialing the
numbers each time you want to place a call.
| | 00:15 | You can add numbers to the Favorites list
from any of the other sections
| | 00:17 | of the iPhone app, except for the keypad.
| | 00:20 | I'll tap Recents to get a list of the
recently dialed, received, or missed calls.
| | 00:25 | Notice that some of the items here are
simply phone numbers,
| | 00:28 | while others are the actual names of people.
| | 00:30 | The names are the people
who are already in my contacts.
| | 00:33 | I can add anyone in my contacts list
to my Favorites by tapping
| | 00:36 | the blue arrow next to their name.
| | 00:38 | On their Contacts page you'll
find the Add to Favorites button.
| | 00:42 | If more than one number is available,
for example, a home number or a mobile number,
| | 00:46 | you'll be asked which number
you want to make the Favorite.
| | 00:49 | If the contacts number also belongs to an iPhone,
you'll be asked whether you want
| | 00:52 | to assign this number to a Voice Call
or a FaceTime Call.
| | 00:56 | Notice a small blue star appears
next to the number you added.
| | 00:59 | This lets you know that
this number is now a Favorite.
| | 01:02 | Now, this is an important point.
| | 01:03 | You can only have one number per favorite.
| | 01:05 | If you want both a friend's home and
mobile number as Favorites,
| | 01:09 | you'll have to come back to Contacts
and add, Add Favorites again.
| | 01:15 | The person's name will then appear twice
in your Favorites list, but as you can see,
| | 01:19 | each Favorite is clearly labeled,
in this case iPhone and mobile,
| | 01:22 | so you can tell which number is which.
| | 01:24 | Let's go back to Recents.
| | 01:26 | To add numbers to your Favorites
from the Recent calls area,
| | 01:29 | the numbers have to
already appear in your contacts.
| | 01:32 | If you tap the blue arrow next to any
numbers that aren't in your contacts,
| | 01:35 | you'll see this screen where you'll
find options to Create a New Contact
| | 01:38 | for this number, among other things.
| | 01:40 | So you can create a New Contact from here
and then Add it to your Favorites if you like.
| | 01:44 | I'll skip that for now.
| | 01:46 | If you go over to your Contacts,
you can browse through everyone in your list.
| | 01:52 | Just tap the name of the person you want to
add to your Favorites and tap Add to Favorites.
| | 02:00 | Similarly, let's go over to Voicemail
and here I see a couple of names.
| | 02:05 | Again, if you see a name, that's a person
who is already in your contacts
| | 02:08 | and you can add them to your Favorites
by tapping the blue arrow
| | 02:11 | and then tapping Add to Favorites.
| | 02:14 | Now, as you go through adding people
to your Favorites list,
| | 02:16 | the list itself might start to get kind of long.
| | 02:18 | What you probably want to do
is rearrange your Favorites list,
| | 02:21 | so you're most frequently called numbers
in this list are at the top of the list,
| | 02:25 | so you won't have to scroll down to find them.
| | 02:28 | Tap the Edit button and use the handles
to the right of the favorites name
| | 02:31 | to drag the contact up and down the list.
| | 02:36 | This is also where you can delete
someone from your Favorites.
| | 02:39 | Just tap the red button next to the name
and then tap Delete.
| | 02:45 | Now, this only removes the number
from the Favorites list.
| | 02:48 | The number I just deleted is still stored
in my Contacts and I can add the number
| | 02:51 | as a favorite again, if I made a mistake
or changed my mind.
| | 02:56 | So that's the Favorites list, which again,
is a quick way to access
| | 02:58 | the numbers you dial the most.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing voicemail| 00:00 | One of the biggest innovations of the iPhone
when it first came out was visual voicemail,
| | 00:04 | which lets you see a list
of all your voicemail messages.
| | 00:10 | Now, the very first time you enter the screen,
you'll be prompted to create a pin number.
| | 00:14 | This is the only time you'll need to do this,
and you won't have to enter any codes
| | 00:17 | to get your voicemail after this point,
as your iPhone will handle that in the background.
| | 00:22 | From here you can just tap the one you want
to listen to, so you don't have to navigate
| | 00:25 | through a series of audio menus, like you do
with other voicemail systems on other phones.
| | 00:29 | To hear a message I first suggest turning
on speakerphone by tapping Speaker,
| | 00:34 | unless you're at some place where you are concerned
about other people hearing your voicemails.
| | 00:38 | It's much easier to browse and listen to your
voicemails over the iPhone's built-in speaker,
| | 00:40 | than it is to bring the phone to your ear.
| | 00:43 | To listen to a voicemail, tap it once to select it,
then tap it a second time to play it.
| | 00:56 | While it's playing you can
tap it again to pause it.
| | 00:59 | Tap in once more to pick up where you left off.
| | 01:06 | Probably and most importantly,
you can drag the progress bar
| | 01:09 | to the right and left to quickly jump
back and forth in the voicemail.
| | 01:13 | This is perfect for those times when someone
leaves a long-winded message,
| | 01:16 | but doesn't leave his callback number
until the very end,
| | 01:18 | or just when you didn't quite catch
what your caller said.
| | 01:21 | With the iPhone, you don't have to sit
and listen through the entire message again,
| | 01:24 | just drag to the end of the message.
| | 01:28 | But of course, because this is visual voicemail,
you probably won't need to listen
| | 01:32 | for the caller's callback number,
since you can simply tap the Callback button
| | 01:35 | to instantly call back the number
of the person who left the voicemail.
| | 01:38 | You'll find more details about the call
by tapping the blue arrow next to the entry,
| | 01:41 | as well as options for texting the caller back
or adding this caller to your contact list.
| | 01:49 | Any voicemails shown with a blue dot next to
them are voicemails you haven't yet listened to.
| | 01:53 | You can also see the number of un-listened to
voicemails by looking at the badge
| | 01:57 | in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 01:58 | When I tap the voicemail;
that number will disappear.
| | 02:02 | Once you listen to the message, both the
blue dot and the number will disappear.
| | 02:07 | We also have a delete button here,
which will delete your selected message.
| | 02:10 | Notice you don't get any kind
of confirmation notice.
| | 02:13 | The selected message just disappears.
| | 02:16 | If you tap Delete by accident, you can
tap Deleted Messages
| | 02:20 | and here you'll find
your recently deleted voicemail.
| | 02:22 | You can play deleted voicemails from here
or select them and tap Undelete
| | 02:28 | to send them back to your voicemail box.
| | 02:30 | Deleted messages stay here for 30 days,
so you have plenty of time to go back
| | 02:34 | and retrieve them or if you really need
to delete a message before then,
| | 02:37 | tap Clear All to instantly remove
the deleted voicemails in this list.
| | 02:42 | Back here on the main voicemail screen, tap
Greeting to record your voicemail message.
| | 02:48 | This is the message people will hear when
they call your phone and you don't answer.
| | 02:52 | You can choose from the Default automated message
| | 02:54 | or you can tap Custom to record your own.
| | 02:56 | All you need to do here is to make sure
you're in a quiet area
| | 03:00 | and then tap the record button
to record your message:
| | 03:04 | This is Garrick, please leave a message,
and tap Stop to stop your recording.
| | 03:11 | You can tap the Play button to listen to it.
| | 03:17 | If you're happy with the recording, you are all set.
| | 03:20 | If you want to try again, hit the Record button
and repeat your message.
| | 03:24 | Lastly, I mentioned earlier that
the first time you access your voicemail,
| | 03:26 | you'll be asked to enter a pin number,
but then after that you wouldn't
| | 03:31 | have to enter that number again, because
your iPhone would remember it for you.
| | 03:33 | If you ever do need to change your
voice mail password for some reason,
| | 03:36 | you can find the options
for doing so, by going to your
| | 03:38 | Settings, Phone, Change Voicemail Password.
| | 03:49 | Here, you'll be prompted to enter your
current password and then you'll be able
| | 03:52 | to create a new one, but most likely
you'll never have to come in here.
| | 03:56 | That's how you work with
visual voicemail on your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Receiving calls| 00:00 | In this movie we're going to examine the options
you have when you receive
| | 00:03 | an incoming call on your iPhone.
| | 00:04 | Let's take a look at a couple of scenarios.
| | 00:07 | First, let's see what happens when
the phone is on, but in locked mode.
| | 00:10 | So my phone is currently on,
but locked and a call comes in.
| | 00:15 | The number or caller ID name of the
person calling appears at the top of the screen
| | 00:19 | and I see the slide to answer bar appear.
| | 00:22 | To answer this call, I just slide the handle across
to unlock and answer the phone.
| | 00:29 | At this point I put the phone to my ear
and start talking.
| | 00:32 | When I'm done, I can tap End.
| | 00:37 | If you're already using your phone,
say I'm checking the weather
| | 00:43 | and another call comes in,
this time I get two buttons instead of the slider bar.
| | 00:48 | I can either Decline the call which
will send the caller through my voicemail
| | 00:51 | or I can tap Answer to answer
the phone and start talking.
| | 00:57 | Again, when I'm done I can tap End
| | 01:02 | and it takes me back to the app I was using.
| | 01:05 | If you're listening to music
or watching a video when a call comes in,
| | 01:08 | you'll hear the audio quickly fade out
right before your phone starts ringing.
| | 01:11 | After you hangup, the music will fade
back in again right where you left off.
| | 01:16 | Now, we just saw that if you're using
the phone when a call comes in,
| | 01:18 | you get the choice to either Answer the call
or Decline it and send the caller to your voicemail.
| | 01:23 | But when a call comes in while the phone is asleep,
| | 01:24 | you'll only see that slide to answer bar appear.
| | 01:29 | Let's put the phone back to sleep,
and now my phone is ringing again.
| | 01:34 | You can still send incoming calls to voicemail
regardless of whether the phone
| | 01:37 | is awake or asleep by quickly double-clicking
the Sleep/Wake button at the top of the phone.
| | 01:43 | That stops your phone from ringing,
and when you unlock your phone,
| | 01:50 | you'll first see a missed call notification,
| | 01:54 | and in here I see a badge on my phone app.
| | 01:57 | The phone app counts missed calls and
voicemail messages as individual alerts.
| | 02:01 | Here, I can see I have a number
next to Recents
| | 02:05 | and once I have viewed my Recents
you could see that number is removed.
| | 02:10 | Now, one potential downside of tapping
the Decline button
| | 02:14 | or double-clicking the Sleep button
to send your callers to voicemail,
| | 02:16 | is that if they heard the phone ringing once or twice,
they'll know you deliberately
| | 02:20 | pawned them off in your voicemail system.
| | 02:22 | One solution is to just let your phone
keep ringing until voicemail kicks in
| | 02:25 | which is approximately about 20 seconds.
| | 02:28 | Of course, this means your phone
will continue to ring this entire time.
| | 02:31 | You could of course switch the silencer on,
but if you have vibrate turned on,
| | 02:35 | your phone will still vibrate until
the call is picked up by voicemail.
| | 02:38 | An alternate option is to simply
click the Sleep button
| | 02:41 | or either of the Volume buttons once.
| | 02:44 | This allows the phone to keep ringing
in the sense that you still have what remains
| | 02:46 | of the 20 seconds to answer the phone,
but it won't make any other sounds
| | 02:49 | at this time and voicemail
will still pick up if you don't answer.
| | 02:55 | Now new with iOS 6, Apple added two
more ways to handle incoming calls
| | 02:58 | when you can't answer at that moment.
| | 03:01 | Both only become available
when your phone is locked.
| | 03:05 | Slide this phone icon
from the bottom of the screen.
| | 03:07 | This reveals two buttons:
| | 03:09 | Reply with Message and Remind me Later.
| | 03:11 | Tapping Remind me Later sends the call
to voicemail and gives you two options.
| | 03:15 | You can be reminded to call this person back
in 1 hour or when you leave your current area.
| | 03:20 | I'll choose in 1 hour.
| | 03:24 | Now, a reminder notification
has appeared on my screen.
| | 03:27 | If I slide across it,
the Reminders app opens
| | 03:33 | and I can see that it's set up a reminder
to alert me in 1 hour.
| | 03:36 | The other option was to alert you when you
leave and that's a pretty a cool option, too.
| | 03:40 | When you select that option, your iPhone
will remind you to call the person back
| | 03:43 | as soon as you take your iPhone away from
the location or address you are currently at.
| | 03:47 | For example, maybe you're at a movie
when a call comes in,
| | 03:50 | you can tap Remind me Later and
when I leave and your iPhone will use
| | 03:53 | its GPS location capabilities to know
when you leave the theater,
| | 03:57 | and an alert will pop up on your screen
to call the person back.
| | 04:02 | Let's lock the phone again
and look at the other option.
| | 04:07 | Sometimes you may get a call that you can't answer,
but you want to let the caller know
| | 04:10 | that you see that he or she has called.
| | 04:13 | When the call comes in, slide up
and tap Reply with Message.
| | 04:20 | This allows you to send a short
preset text message back to the caller.
| | 04:24 | The three available presets will respond
with Can't talk right now,
| | 04:27 | followed by, I'll call you later,
or, I'm on my way, or, What's up?
| | 04:32 | You can tap the one that's most appropriate
or tap Custom to type in your own message.
| | 04:36 | If I go to my messages app,
I'll see my Custom message.
| | 04:48 | Now, you can also change any of the
three default Reply Messages
| | 04:50 | by going to Settings, Phone, and Reply with Message.
| | 04:58 | Here, tap the message you want
to change and type in your own.
| | 05:01 | You might want to do this if you often get calls
while you're in the middle of a common activity.
| | 05:04 | For example, I could change, I'll
call you later, to in a meeting.
| | 05:13 | That way I won't have to type it out each
time I get a call while I'm in a meeting.
| | 05:17 | Note that each of these three messages
will always be preceded with
| | 05:22 | Can't talk right now, so you never have
to type that in yourself.
| | 05:24 | Okay. So those are the options
available to you when a call comes in.
| | 05:27 | In an upcoming movie, we'll look
at what you can do
| | 05:29 | during a call you actually decided to answer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the iPhone during a call| 00:00 | Now, let's take a look at what you
can do with an iPhone during a call.
| | 00:04 | So my iPhone is ringing now and I'll answer it.
| | 00:08 | Whether you placed the phone call
or whether you answered an incoming call,
| | 00:11 | these are the six buttons you'll see during the call.
| | 00:13 | Now, you'll only see these buttons
if you're not holding the phone up to your ear.
| | 00:17 | The iPhone has a built-in proximity sensor
that detects when you are holding
| | 00:20 | the phone up to your ear.
| | 00:21 | The sensor is located next to the earpiece speaker.
| | 00:25 | Notice if I hold my finger over
that area the screen goes dark.
| | 00:29 | This actually serves a number of purposes.
| | 00:32 | First of all, it can be distracting to
hold a brightly lit screen to your face,
| | 00:35 | especially if you're in a dimly lit room.
| | 00:37 | More importantly though, this also temporarily
deactivate the screens touch sensitivity,
| | 00:40 | which prevents you from accidently
tapping buttons with your cheek.
| | 00:45 | And of course having the screen turned off,
especially during long phone calls
| | 00:48 | conserves battery power.
| | 00:49 | But the second you take your phone away
from your head, the screen turns back on
| | 00:53 | and you have instant access to your phone.
| | 00:55 | Incidentally, the iPhone's ambient light
sensor is also located around this area
| | 01:00 | and it gauges the amount of light
where you currently are and can adjust
| | 01:03 | the screen's brightness to save power.
| | 01:04 | You can adjust the screen brightness settings in settings
| | 01:07 | and we'll take a look at this in a later chapter.
| | 01:10 | All right, so we're on a call.
| | 01:11 | Let's look at these buttons.
| | 01:13 | The first one is the Mute button.
| | 01:15 | Tap it once and the person on the other
end won't able to hear you,
| | 01:19 | but you'll still be able to here them.
| | 01:21 | This is useful if you need to talk to
someone in the room with you,
| | 01:23 | without the caller on the line hearing you.
| | 01:26 | I use this all the time when I'm on conference calls.
| | 01:28 | I'll tap the Mute button when I'm listening in
and I don't have to worry about
| | 01:32 | people hearing me clear my throat or typing emails.
| | 01:35 | Tap the Mute button again to turn it off.
| | 01:38 | The Mute button can also acts as the
Hold button when you press and hold it.
| | 01:43 | So when a call is on Hold, neither you
nor the person on the other line
| | 01:46 | will be able to hear each other,
unlike when a call is simply muted,
| | 01:49 | in which you can still hear the other caller,
but they can't hear you.
| | 01:53 | Again, maybe you're on a conference call
and someone comes into the room to talk to you,
| | 01:56 | you can tap the Hold button so
you're not trying to listen to the call
| | 01:59 | and the person in the room
with you at the same time.
| | 02:02 | To take the call Off Hold, tap and hold down
on the button for about a second.
| | 02:07 | You can also get the button
a quick double-tap to turn off Hold.
| | 02:11 | Next is the keypad, which is for those times
when you need to input touchtones during the call.
| | 02:16 | For example, if you're calling a company's
customer service line you might hear
| | 02:19 | something like, touch 1 for technical support,
touch 2 for sales, and so on.
| | 02:23 | All you have to do is open up the keypad
and touching the numbers
| | 02:26 | will send the touchtones over the line.
| | 02:28 | You also have the option to end the call
from here if you are done talking,
| | 02:30 | so you don't have to first hide
the keypad to hang up.
| | 02:33 | But if you're still on your call, tap Hide Keypad
to return to the 6 in call buttons.
| | 02:38 | Next to the Keypad is Speaker.
| | 02:40 | This is how you turn on
the speaker phone during a call.
| | 02:43 | So if you're in a conference call where
you are mostly listening in,
| | 02:45 | you might want to tap Speaker, so you can place
your phone down on your desk,
| | 02:48 | and still hear what people are saying.
| | 02:50 | Remember that both the Speaker and the Microphone
are along the bottom of the iPhone,
| | 02:53 | so keep that end facing you when you
have the phone sitting on your desk.
| | 02:57 | Tap Speaker again to return the audio
to the earpiece speaker
| | 02:59 | or if you're using the iPhone earbud headset,
turning off Speaker
| | 03:03 | will return the call's audio to your earbuds.
| | 03:06 | Now, one other thing to know about the
Speaker button is that it will change
| | 03:09 | if you're using a Bluetooth headset
to talk during your call.
| | 03:12 | In that case the button will be labeled Audio
instead of Speaker and you'll able to tap it
| | 03:16 | to route your call between
your Bluetooth headset and your speaker.
| | 03:18 | We'll look more at this in the upcoming movie
on using a Bluetooth headset.
| | 03:21 | Below Speaker we have Contacts.
| | 03:24 | Tapping Contacts opens your address book,
so you can look up numbers
| | 03:27 | and email addresses which might be useful
if you need to give information
| | 03:30 | to the person you're talking to.
| | 03:33 | You could also make a second call from here
if you need to talk someone else
| | 03:36 | during your current phone
call or set up a conference call.
| | 03:39 | We'll look more closely at conference calls
in an upcoming movie.
| | 03:43 | To return back to the in call screen
after you've opened Contacts,
| | 03:45 | just tap the green area at the top of the screen.
| | 03:48 | Next to the Contact button is the FaceTime button,
which lets you turn your call into a video call
| | 03:53 | when you're talking someone who
is also on an iOS device.
| | 03:56 | We'll get to that in its own movie.
| | 03:58 | The button on the bottom left is the
Add Call button which is used for
| | 04:02 | creating conference calls and we'll also take
a look at that topic in its own movie.
| | 04:04 | Now, you're not limited to just
using these 6 buttons during a call.
| | 04:08 | You can press the Home button to go to
your Home Screen and open other applications.
| | 04:12 | For example, maybe you are planning a trip
with the person on the other line
| | 04:14 | and you want to check the weather
for that weekend.
| | 04:18 | Notice the green touch to return to call area
remains at the top of the screen.
| | 04:22 | You may come across some apps that
won't work while you're on a call,
| | 04:24 | but I would say that the majority of them do.
| | 04:26 | So, during a call you can check the weather,
refer to your calendar
| | 04:30 | and do any number of other things.
| | 04:32 | Multitasking also works during a call,
so you can just double-click
| | 04:34 | the Home button to run other apps.
| | 04:38 | Again, just touch the green area at the top
of the screen to return to the in call screen.
| | 04:42 | Other buttons you can press during a
call include the Volume buttons,
| | 04:45 | which adjusts the volume of your call.
| | 04:47 | So if you're having trouble hearing the
person on the other line,
| | 04:48 | you can turn the volume up, or if they're
too loud, turn the volume down.
| | 04:52 | The only button you want to be
careful with is the Sleep/Wake button.
| | 04:55 | Pressing that button ends the call, so
unless you mean to hang up, don't press it.
| | 04:59 | The screen will eventually dim itself
and eventually turn off if you don't touch
| | 05:02 | anything during a call and tapping the
screen once will always turn it back on.
| | 05:06 | But there's no way to manually put
the screen to sleep during a call.
| | 05:09 | Of course, once you're done with
your phone call, you can tap End.
| | 05:12 | So, those are many of the options that
are available to you during a call
| | 05:14 | with the exception of making a conference call
and using the FaceTime feature,
| | 05:18 | but again, we'll look at those
topics in their own movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using FaceTime| 00:00 | Built into all iOS devices with front facing cameras
is a feature called FaceTime,
| | 00:04 | which is a video chatting feature that lets you
and the person you're calling
| | 00:08 | both see and hear each other.
| | 00:10 | It's a great way to have a face-to-face conversation,
to show someone where you're calling them from,
| | 00:14 | or just to see a friend's expression when
you share some cool news with them.
| | 00:18 | Now in order to use FaceTime, both callers have
to be on an iOS device with a front facing camera,
| | 00:23 | and both callers need to be connected
to either a Wi-Fi network,
| | 00:26 | or in the case of the iPhone,
FaceTime also works over cellular connections,
| | 00:29 | as long as your provider has allowed it.
| | 00:32 | Currently in the US, Verizon and Sprint
both allow FaceTime over cellular at no extra charge,
| | 00:37 | while AT&T only allows it
if your device is part of a shared plan.
| | 00:41 | The video will generally look much
better over a Wi-Fi connection though.
| | 00:44 | But other than making sure you have a
device with a front facing camera
| | 00:47 | and an Internet connection,
no set up is required to use FaceTime.
| | 00:51 | It's available by default, but you might want to
go into your Settings to FaceTime
| | 00:58 | and just make sure the FaceTime
switch is turned on.
| | 01:01 | One way to make a FaceTime call
is to first make a regular phone call.
| | 01:04 | I'm going to dial my friend Nick
from my list of Favorites here.
| | 01:12 | Hello.
| | 01:13 | Hey Nick, it's Garrick, can you hold on a second?
| | 01:15 | Okay.
All right.
| | 01:17 | So now Nick has answered the call.
| | 01:18 | I know he has an iPhone 4S and we're
both connected to our own Wi-Fi networks,
| | 01:22 | so I'm going to tap the FaceTime button.
| | 01:26 | Now, the person you're calling
has to tap Accept on their end
| | 01:29 | in order for the FaceTime call to connect.
| | 01:31 | That prevents someone from just seeing
your camera by tapping FaceTime on their end.
| | 01:35 | All right.
| | 01:36 | So, Nick has accepted my FaceTime invite,
and now we're both looking at
| | 01:40 | and hearing each other pretty much in real time.
| | 01:41 | How is it going Nick?
| | 01:43 | I'm pretty good.
| | 01:44 | Sounds good.
| | 01:45 | Now, you and the person you're calling
can rotate the phone to either landscape
| | 01:48 | or portrait orientation.
| | 01:50 | So if Nick rotates his orientation,
you can see what that looks like on his end.
| | 01:54 | You can see it just automatically shifts here.
| | 01:56 | I can do the same thing with mine.
| | 01:58 | So as you just saw, FaceTime defaults
to the front facing camera,
| | 02:01 | but you can switch cameras
at any point during the call,
| | 02:03 | which is great if you want to show something
to the person you're talking to.
| | 02:06 | For example, maybe I want to show Nick
this conveniently placed
| | 02:08 | group of snacks here at the end of my table.
| | 02:12 | I'm sure Nick looks super impressed by that.
| | 02:15 | He can do the same thing on his end.
| | 02:18 | I can see Nick is sitting outside.
| | 02:20 | He's got his nice lynda.com mug there.
| | 02:22 | All right, let's switch back to our front facing cameras.
| | 02:28 | Now, we can do other things during a FaceTime call.
| | 02:30 | We have a Mute button here.
| | 02:33 | So when I tap that I can still
see and hear Nick, but he can't hear me.
| | 02:36 | He can still see me though.
| | 02:38 | I'll turn off Mute.
| | 02:40 | You can also run other applications
while on a FaceTime chat.
| | 02:42 | For instance, I'll press the Home button there.
| | 02:46 | Now we won't be able to see each other
like this, but we can still hear each other.
| | 02:49 | This might be useful if you need to
look up a contact or an address to share
| | 02:51 | with the person you're talking to.
| | 02:53 | When I tap the green bar at the top of the screen,
we can now see and hear each other again.
| | 02:59 | All right, so I'm going to hang up
on Nick for a second here.
| | 03:01 | I'll talk to you in a second. So I hit End.
| | 03:05 | So, initiating a FaceTime chat is simply a matter
of tapping the FaceTime button during a call.
| | 03:10 | You can also initiate a FaceTime call
right away by going into your contacts,
| | 03:15 | and you notice here there's a FaceTime button,
tapping that immediately sends a request
| | 03:19 | to your contact. There he is again.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to hang up on you again.
| | 03:30 | All right, so that's how to initiate a FaceTime call.
| | 03:32 | Let's see what it looks like
when you receive a FaceTime call.
| | 03:35 | All right, so I see the message that
Nick wants to start a FaceTime chat.
| | 03:39 | I'm going to hit Accept, and there he is again.
| | 03:45 | So that's pretty much all I wanted
to show you there. So, thanks Nick.
| | 03:48 | No problem.
See you.
| | 03:50 | So that's what it looks like
when you receive a Facetime call.
| | 03:53 | In addition to working with iOS devices,
FaceTime also works with Mac's running
| | 03:57 | OS X Snow Leopard or later.
| | 03:59 | It's built in all new Macs and you can
also purchase FaceTime for $.99
| | 04:03 | from the Mac App Store if you have an older Mac.
| | 04:05 | Once it's installed, you will be able
to call your friend's iOS devices
| | 04:08 | as well as other Macs from your computer.
| | 04:11 | Calls to and from your Mac are tied to
your Apple ID and any email addresses
| | 04:14 | you've associated with your FaceTime account.
| | 04:17 | You can also associate email addresses
with your FaceTime account on your iOS device,
| | 04:20 | so whenever someone attempts
to FaceTime with you, both your Mac and
| | 04:23 | your iOS device will ring and you'll
have the choice of answering ether one.
| | 04:27 | On your device, go to Settings, FaceTime
again and here tap Add an Email to add
| | 04:34 | the email address you associated
with your FaceTime account on your Mac.
| | 04:38 | Friends using FaceTime on their Macs will
be able to use this address to contact you.
| | 04:42 | That's the FaceTime feature available
on all iOS devices with the front facing camera
| | 04:47 | and on any many Mac
with FaceTime and a camera.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making conference calls| 00:01 | With the iPhone, it's easy to setup a call
with multiple people, otherwise known
| | 00:04 | as a Conference Call.
| | 00:06 | In fact, you can host a call between up to
six people, including yourself on your iPhone.
| | 00:10 | Let's take a look at how this works.
| | 00:13 | So a call has come in, I'll answer it,
| | 00:15 | and it's my coworker Scott wanting
to discuss a project we're working on.
| | 00:18 | I think we should get an input from another one
of our coworkers while we're talking.
| | 00:22 | All I do is tap Add Call.
| | 00:25 | This takes me to my Contacts where I can
look up the person I want to add to this call.
| | 00:28 | I have access to my Favorites, Recent
Calls and the Keypad if I want to use any
| | 00:32 | of those methods to place a second call.
| | 00:34 | I'll go to my Favorites and place a Call.
| | 00:39 | Now up until this point, the person I
was originally talking to can still hear me,
| | 00:42 | unless I tap the Hold button.
| | 00:44 | But once I dial the second number,
Scott has put on Hold so I can hear the
| | 00:47 | second person's phone ringing.
| | 00:49 | Okay. So now Josh is on the line.
| | 00:51 | Notice that at the top of the screen,
I can see that Scott is still on hold.
| | 00:55 | If necessary, I can tap Scott to talk
privately to him, which puts Josh on Hold,
| | 01:01 | and I can tap Josh again,
and put Scott back on Hold.
| | 01:04 | To bring all three of us together into
a conversation, I tap Merge Calls,
| | 01:08 | and now we can all hear each other.
| | 01:10 | As I mentioned earlier, I can repeat
this process up to three more times
| | 01:13 | to add a total of five people to this call if need be.
| | 01:15 | I'll just tap Add Call again
and call up another contact.
| | 01:24 | After Francis answers, I tap Merge Calls
to merge her into the Conference Call.
| | 01:29 | Just be aware that each separate
call is counted as separate minutes
| | 01:32 | against your calling plan.
| | 01:33 | So if you're talking to five people for 10 minutes,
you're eating up 50 minutes of your plan's talk time.
| | 01:38 | You can see everyone on your call at
any time by tapping the arrow button.
| | 01:41 | This is where you can tap the red button
to hang up on any individual caller
| | 01:45 | without hanging up on the others,
or if you need to talk to one of these people
| | 01:48 | independently, you can tap Private,
which places all the other callers on Hold,
| | 01:52 | although they'll still be able
to talk to each other while you're
| | 01:55 | having your private side conversation.
| | 01:57 | Merge the calls together again to let
everyone hear everyone else once more.
| | 02:01 | When you're done talking to everyone,
tap End to hang up on everyone at once.
| | 02:05 | Now there may be times when you're on a call
during which time you receive another call,
| | 02:09 | and maybe you don't want to
create a Conference Call at all
| | 02:11 | between the two parties.
| | 02:13 | Here's how that works.
| | 02:14 | So, here's a call from Scott which I'll answer,
and we're having a conversation.
| | 02:21 | Now I see that a call from Josh has come in.
| | 02:23 | Now if I tap Ignore, I'll ignore Josh's calls
and send him to the voicemail.
| | 02:27 | If I tap End call and Answer,
I'll end my call with Scott and talk to Josh.
| | 02:30 | I want to tap Hold Call and Answer.
| | 02:33 | That allows me to place Scott on Hold
while I talk to Josh.
| | 02:36 | So this looks exactly like it did
when I initiated a Conference Call.
| | 02:39 | I can tap between Scott and Josh to talk
to them individually or I can tap Merge Calls
| | 02:44 | to create a Conference Call between the three of us.
| | 02:46 | That's how you manage Multiple Callers
and Conference Calls on your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding recent calls to your contacts| 00:01 | We've previously seen that you can
add contacts to your iPhone either
| | 00:04 | by importing them from your Mac or PC
when you sync your phone
| | 00:06 | or by manually entering them into your phone.
| | 00:09 | Another way to enter contact information
is by grabbing info from a recent call.
| | 00:13 | So I'm currently looking at my list of Recent calls.
| | 00:16 | The calls which are listed as numbers are
people I don't currently have in my contacts.
| | 00:20 | Adding a number to your contacts is as
easy as tapping the blue arrow
| | 00:23 | next to the number and then tapping either
Create New Contact to create a brand-new
| | 00:27 | contact entry for new person
or businesses that's not already in your contacts
| | 00:31 | or tapping Add to Existing Contact.
| | 00:33 | So for example, if this number is
from a friend of mine whose home number
| | 00:36 | I currently have in my Contacts, but maybe
he called me from work, I would tap
| | 00:40 | Add to Existing Contact and then find him
in my address book and tap his name,
| | 00:45 | and you can see that the number
I'm adding is here in blue.
| | 00:48 | You may want to tap the Label and
choose a different label for that number
| | 00:52 | and when you're done, tap Done.
| | 00:53 | Let's go back to Recent calls.
| | 00:56 | So if the person I'm adding doesn't
already exist in my Contacts, I can tap the
| | 01:00 | blue arrow next to the number
and choose Create New Contact.
| | 01:04 | Notice the number is already entered here.
| | 01:06 | Again, I can change the Label if
necessary and then I can add any other
| | 01:11 | information about this person like
their First and Last name or Street Address.
| | 01:15 | Tap Done when you're finished, and the
person will be added to your contacts.
| | 01:19 | Now unfortunately, there's no way to
assign contacts to groups on the iPhone.
| | 01:23 | If I go into my Contacts and look at
Groups, I'll see the groups I created
| | 01:28 | on a computer and sync to my iPhone,
which I showed you how to do
| | 01:32 | in the chapter on syncing with your computer.
| | 01:33 | So the New Contact I just added will
only show up if all groups here are checked.
| | 01:37 | So if you want to manage your contacts
by Groups, you'll have to do so on your
| | 01:41 | computer, and then sync to your phone.
| | 01:43 | But that's how you add recent calls
to your contact list on the iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing contacts| 00:01 | Occasionally, you may need to share
the contact information in your address
| | 00:04 | book with someone else.
| | 00:05 | Maybe you want to send a friend the
number and email address of a contractor
| | 00:08 | you used for home repair or the
number of the hotel you'll be staying at.
| | 00:12 | You can easily send contact information
from your iPhone to another phone or computer.
| | 00:16 | First, find the contact you want to send.
| | 00:21 | At the bottom of each contact, you'll
find the button labeled Share Contact.
| | 00:24 | You have the choice to send this
contact information via email or message.
| | 00:29 | Now, what you are going to send
here is referred to as a vCard.
| | 00:32 | A vCard is a small file containing all
the info from your contact formatted,
| | 00:37 | so that anyone who opens the vCard on the
device that understands that format,
| | 00:40 | will be able to instantly add that
contact to their own address book.
| | 00:44 | So, whether or not the person receiving
the info you're sending can use the vCard
| | 00:47 | is going to depend on whether they're using
a phone or a computer software
| | 00:50 | that can understand the vCard format.
| | 00:53 | For this example, I'll tap Message, and that
allows me to send the vCard as a text message.
| | 00:58 | I'll tap the plus symbol to find the
person I want to send this card to.
| | 01:02 | If I want to add an additional message,
I can type it below,
| | 01:11 | but for now I'll just tap Send,
and that's all there is to it.
| | 01:15 | Now let's see what this looks like
when you're on the receiving end.
| | 01:17 | Again, you don't have to have an iPhone
to receive contact info from an iPhone.
| | 01:21 | You just need a phone that understands vCards.
| | 01:27 | So here I see a notification that I
just received a text message. There it is.
| | 01:31 | Now here you can see the address I sent
and below that is the one I just received.
| | 01:35 | All I have to do is tap it to view its
contents, and if I want to keep it,
| | 01:40 | I can either create a new contact for this
information or add it to an existing
| | 01:43 | contact on my phone.
| | 01:47 | Now, this isn't exactly how it will
look on other phones that aren't iPhones,
| | 01:50 | but that's the gist of how it will work,
regardless of whether you're sending
| | 01:53 | the vCard by text message or over email.
| | 01:56 | Now, what if the friend you want
to send info to doesn't have a phone
| | 01:58 | that understands vCards.
| | 02:00 | In that case, go back to the
contact with the info you want send.
| | 02:06 | Maybe in this case, my friend just
wants the phone number from this contact.
| | 02:10 | I'll hold down on the number and you
want to be careful not to tap the number
| | 02:14 | or else you'll call it.
| | 02:15 | But you can see after holding down
for a second, I get the Copy button.
| | 02:18 | I'll tap that and now I can create a new
email message or create a text message.
| | 02:24 | I'll go to my Messages and I'll tap to bring
up the Paste button and paste that number in.
| | 02:32 | Now I can just tap Send to
send that information off.
| | 02:35 | Of course, this doesn't give your
friend the ability to instantly add this
| | 02:39 | contact info to his or her address book,
but this does let you send a number
| | 02:43 | or an email address to someone without
having to manually type it in yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assigning specific photos and ringtones to your contacts| 00:01 | Like many mobile phones these days,
the iPhone supports the ability to assign
| | 00:04 | specific ringtones to your contacts.
| | 00:07 | This offers you the advantage
of letting you know who's calling
| | 00:09 | as soon as your phone starts ringing
without even having to look at the phone.
| | 00:13 | To set up a custom ringtone, go into Contacts,
select your contact and here tap Edit.
| | 00:21 | Then tap the Ringtone field.
| | 00:23 | From here, you select any of the ringtones
that come with the iPhone,
| | 00:26 | as well as any custom ringtones
you've created or purchased.
| | 00:34 | Tap Save and then Done,
and that's all there is to that.
| | 00:39 | From this point on, whenever this
person calls me, I'll know it's them
| | 00:41 | by the custom ringtone that plays.
| | 00:49 | Similarly, you can also add custom
vibration patterns to a contact,
| | 00:52 | which can make it easy to know who's calling you
without even taking the phone out of your pocket,
| | 00:56 | if you remember which vibration
patterns you assigned to which contacts.
| | 00:59 | Tap Edit again and then tap Vibration.
| | 01:03 | From here, you can pick one of
the custom vibration patterns.
| | 01:11 | I'll tap Done, and then Done again, and
now I've added a custom vibration pattern.
| | 01:17 | Another way you can customize your
contacts is by adding photos to them.
| | 01:20 | So when someone in your contacts calls you,
not only will you hear a custom ringtone,
| | 01:23 | but you'll also see their picture appear
on your screen.
| | 01:26 | Now there are two ways to
assign a photo at your contacts.
| | 01:29 | In both cases, you can use either an existing photo
of the person or shoot a new photo.
| | 01:34 | From here on the Contact,
tap the Edit button and then tap Add Photo.
| | 01:38 | This gives you the option of Take Photo,
which will turn on your camera
| | 01:42 | or choose Existing Photo, which will
bring up your Phone's Photo Library,
| | 01:45 | so you can select the picture.
| | 01:47 | So if you are going to choose an
Existing Photo, just tap Chose Photo,
| | 01:49 | which we'll see in action in a moment.
| | 01:51 | But if you're planning on taking a New Photo,
I suggest not doing it from here,
| | 01:55 | because the photo will then only exist
in this contact and will not be available
| | 01:58 | from your iPhone's Photo Library.
| | 02:00 | It's not a huge deal, but if you think
you might want to use the photo
| | 02:03 | you're about to take for something else later,
cancel from here
| | 02:09 | then open your camera app, take your photo
of your contact and that photo
| | 02:12 | will be stored in your photo library.
| | 02:14 | Now I'm not going to shoot a photo
right now, but you get the idea.
| | 02:17 | Let's go to my Photo Library.
| | 02:20 | From here, I can select the photo
I want to use and then I can tap
| | 02:23 | the Share button in the lower left-hand corner.
| | 02:25 | One of the options here is Assign to Contact.
| | 02:29 | I'll select my contact.
| | 02:31 | Now before I tap Choose, notice it says,
Move and Scale at the top of my screen,
| | 02:35 | which lets me know I can drag the photo
around as well as zoom in and zoom out.
| | 02:40 | Basically, this allows me to set the
photo the way I want it to appear
| | 02:43 | when my friend calls me.
| | 02:46 | What you're actually seeing here is
a template of the screen you'll see
| | 02:49 | when your iPhone rings.
| | 02:50 | The area at the top is where the caller
ID appears and the area at the bottom
| | 02:54 | is where you'll see the Decline and
Answer buttons or the answer slider.
| | 02:57 | So you want to make sure that the
part of the photo you want to see
| | 03:00 | is not obstructed by these elements.
| | 03:02 | Once you have it looking the
way like, tap Choose. That's it.
| | 03:07 | Now when Scott calls me, I hear his custom
ringtone, his custom vibration pattern,
| | 03:11 | and I see the photo I assigned to him.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the included headset| 00:01 | In addition to using the iPhone's built-in earpiece
or its speakerphone to hold
| | 00:04 | your phone conversations, you can also use
the earbud headset that was packed
| | 00:07 | in the box along with your phone.
| | 00:09 | The current earbuds called the EarPods feature
a small remote unit attached
| | 00:13 | to the right earbud's cable.
| | 00:14 | It has these Plus(+) and Minus(-) buttons.
| | 00:17 | The center portion is a button, too,
making this a three-button device.
| | 00:20 | This headset lets you control functions
related to phone calls as well as
| | 00:24 | video and audio playback.
| | 00:25 | In this movie, we're going to focus on
using the headset during phone calls.
| | 00:28 | Obviously the headset has to
be plugged into your iPhone.
| | 00:31 | You can place calls with the headset
using voice commands but we'll cover
| | 00:34 | voice control a little later in this chapter.
| | 00:36 | Let's say I get an incoming call while
my headset is plugged into my iPhone.
| | 00:42 | To answer an incoming call,
press the center button once.
| | 00:46 | You can then hold your
conversation through the headset.
| | 00:49 | Press the center button again
to hang up when you're done.
| | 00:51 | (ringtone playing)
| | 00:56 | If you want to silence the phone but
continue to let it ring
| | 00:59 | press either the
Plus (+) or Minus (-) button.
| | 01:01 | This is the equivalent of pressing
the Volume control buttons
| | 01:04 | on the phone itself when a call comes in.
| | 01:06 | The phone will continue to ring
in the sense that your caller will still hear
| | 01:08 | ringtones for the full 20 seconds
it takes for your voicemail service
| | 01:11 | to answer the call and you still have
the option of answering the call
| | 01:14 | at any time during that 20 seconds.
| | 01:18 | (ringtone playing)
| | 01:19 | If you want to send an incoming call
immediately to voicemail press and hold
| | 01:21 | the center button for about
two seconds and then release.
| | 01:25 | That release part is important.
| | 01:27 | If you just continue to hold down the
button the phone will continue to ring.
| | 01:30 | When you release you'll hear two low beeps
to confirm that you have declined the call.
| | 01:33 | (ringtone playing)
| | 01:34 | All right, so Scott is calling again.
| | 01:38 | I'll answer by pressing the center button once.
| | 01:40 | Now you can also use the earbud remote
to toggle between two calls if you get
| | 01:44 | another call while you're talking to someone.
| | 01:46 | When a second call comes in, just
press the center button once
| | 01:49 | to put your original call on hold
and now you're talking to the second caller.
| | 01:53 | At that point, you can switch back and forth
between the callers by pressing
| | 01:56 | the center button on the remote.
| | 01:58 | If you want to initiate a conference call though,
you have to
| | 02:00 | use the merge calls button on the phone screen.
| | 02:04 | If you're on a call and a second call comes in
and you want to end the current call
| | 02:08 | before answering the new call
press and hold the center button
| | 02:10 | for about two seconds and then release.
| | 02:14 | You'll again hear two low beeps, this time
letting you know that you ended the first call.
| | 02:17 | You can also always glance at your iPhone screen
to make sure you hung up on the first caller.
| | 02:22 | And finally, you can use the Plus (+)
and Minus (-) keys to increase or lower
| | 02:25 | the volume of the call in the headset.
| | 02:29 | It's important to note that you don't have to
use the earbuds to control your phone at all.
| | 02:32 | Even with the earbuds plugged-in
you can still control your iPhone
| | 02:36 | from its screen just like you do
when you're not using earbuds.
| | 02:38 | So if you're not inclined to memorize
all the functions of the remote on the headset
| | 02:41 | you don't have to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a Bluetooth headset| 00:01 | In addition to using the iPhone's
built-in earpiece, its speakerphone
| | 00:04 | or the included earbud headset to make
your phone calls, you can also pair the iPhone
| | 00:08 | with any Bluetooth headset
from a third-party manufacturer.
| | 00:11 | A Bluetooth headset gives you the
advantage of having no wires between your
| | 00:14 | headset and your phone allowing you
to keep your phone in your pocket
| | 00:17 | or elsewhere nearby and you don't have to
worry about your earbuds getting yanked
| | 00:21 | out of your ears by accident.
| | 00:23 | You can find Bluetooth headset at
any electronic store these days.
| | 00:26 | In order to use a Bluetooth headset
with your iPhone, you have to do what's
| | 00:29 | called pairing them together.
| | 00:31 | Essentially, this lets the two devices
recognize each other so you don't have to
| | 00:34 | go through any kind of lengthy
setup process after the initial pairing.
| | 00:38 | This is also how your iPhone will
distinguish your Bluetooth device from any
| | 00:41 | other Bluetooth devices that might be nearby.
| | 00:44 | To pair your headset with your iPhone,
follow the instructions that came with it.
| | 00:47 | Specifically you're looking for the
instructions for making your headset
| | 00:50 | discoverable which is a special mode
that sends out a, 'Hey, I'm here and ready
| | 00:54 | to be paired' signal to any nearby phones.
| | 00:55 | For this particular headset I put it
into Discoverable mode by holding down the
| | 01:00 | Power button for a few seconds.
| | 01:02 | Now I go to my iPhone and I
go into Settings and Bluetooth.
| | 01:07 | If it's not already on I turn Bluetooth On.
| | 01:10 | At this point I see the
headset I've set as Discoverable.
| | 01:13 | This is where you'll also find a list
of any other Bluetooth devices
| | 01:17 | you've paired with your phone.
| | 01:18 | You can pair multiple devices with your iPhone.
| | 01:20 | So if you wanted to, you could keep one
Bluetooth set in your car, one in your home,
| | 01:24 | one at work and so on.
| | 01:26 | Now, I tap the headset I want to pair with.
| | 01:29 | With some models, you may be prompted
to enter a passkey by tapping in into a keypad
| | 01:32 | that will appear on your iPhone screen.
| | 01:34 | The passkey will be in your
headset's instruction manual.
| | 01:37 | Commonly it's something easy like 0000 or 1234.
| | 01:42 | The point isn't to have a secure passkey
but to make sure you manually enter it
| | 01:45 | into your phone to confirm that you
want to pair with this particular headset.
| | 01:49 | So now I'm paired with my headset.
| | 01:51 | Now, let's talk about how
to use the Bluetooth headset.
| | 01:54 | When you're connected to your Bluetooth
device, you'll see a Bluetooth icon at
| | 01:57 | the top of the iPhone screen.
| | 01:58 | This tells you that your
iPhone and device are connected.
| | 02:02 | If the Bluetooth icon is gray,
it means Bluetooth is turned on,
| | 02:04 | on your phone but no device is currently connected.
| | 02:08 | So let's say a call comes in while
your Bluetooth headset is connected.
| | 02:11 | (ringtone playing)
| | 02:13 | To answer the call and have the call
routed to your headset, press the Answer
| | 02:17 | button on your headset.
| | 02:19 | Check your headset's manual
to see which button that is.
| | 02:21 | Even when your headset is connected,
you can still use the iPhone's built-in
| | 02:24 | earpiece to answer the call.
| | 02:26 | Just don't answer it with your headset's
buttons and instead answer using
| | 02:29 | the iPhone's controls.
| | 02:30 | Notice the button that's
normally labeled Speaker now says Audio.
| | 02:34 | This button allows you to switch the call
between your phone and your Bluetooth headset.
| | 02:38 | So if you initially answer with your phone,
tap audio and then select your headset
| | 02:42 | to switch the call over to Bluetooth,
or if you're on your headset and
| | 02:46 | find it's battery is dying, you can
tap audio and switch the call
| | 02:49 | back to the iPhone and then take off
your headset to charge it.
| | 02:54 | As I mentioned, you can pair your
iPhone with multiple Bluetooth headsets,
| | 02:59 | just so your device to be discoverable and
return to the Bluetooth settings on your iPhone.
| | 03:03 | This is also where you can
delete any devices you no longer use.
| | 03:06 | Just tap the device and tap Unpair.
| | 03:11 | Also note that you're not limited
to pairing your iPhone
| | 03:14 | with just Bluetooth headsets.
| | 03:15 | You can find Bluetooth car speaker
phone kits, Bluetooth GPS devices,
| | 03:19 | stereo Bluetooth headsets for listening
to your music and even Bluetooth
| | 03:23 | motorcycle helmets.
| | 03:24 | Just about any Bluetooth device made
to communicate with mobile phones
| | 03:27 | will work with your iPhone.
| | 03:28 | You just have to hunt around and do some
research to find the right devices for yourself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Forwarding calls| 00:00 | Built into your iPhone's calling plan
is Call Forwarding.
| | 00:03 | Turning on this feature lets you route
all of your iPhone's incoming calls
| | 00:07 | to another number of your choice.
| | 00:08 | This can be useful in several different scenarios.
| | 00:11 | For example, if your iPhone's battery
is about to die and you're expecting
| | 00:14 | an important call you can forward your
calls to your home or office phone
| | 00:18 | so you don't have to worry about providing
an alternate number to your callers.
| | 00:21 | To turn on call forwarding, go to
Settings, Phone, and Call Forwarding.
| | 00:32 | And all you do here is just tap
the switch to the On position.
| | 00:37 | Next, enter the number you
want to forward your calls to.
| | 00:46 | And you can see now my calls
are being forwarded to that number.
| | 00:50 | Now, a couple of things you have to
know about call forwarding.
| | 00:53 | You have to be in an area where
you're connected to your cellular network
| | 00:56 | in order to turn call forwarding on,
because the Call Forwarding settings
| | 00:58 | are not stored on your phone itself.
| | 01:01 | What you're doing is sending a message
to your cellular provider
| | 01:04 | letting their system know that you would like all
calls to be forwarded to the number you provide.
| | 01:08 | Similarly, you won't be able to turn off
call forwarding unless your phone
| | 01:11 | is in your network area either.
| | 01:13 | But this also means that you phone
doesn't have to be turned on
| | 01:16 | for call forwarding to work.
| | 01:18 | So, as long as you're on network when
you turn Call Forwarding on,
| | 01:20 | you can turn off your phone, leave it at home
and know that your calls will still be
| | 01:25 | forwarded to whatever number you provided.
| | 01:26 | But also note that calls forwarded
from your account still count against
| | 01:30 | the minutes in your calling plan.
| | 01:31 | So a 10-minute call forwarded to your office
still counts as 10 minutes used on your iPhone.
| | 01:36 | When you have Call Forwarding
turned on, you'll see this phone
| | 01:38 | with an arrow icon at the top of your screen
reminding you that your calls are being forwarded.
| | 01:42 | So remember to come back here into
Settings and turn off Call Forwarding
| | 01:45 | when you're done using it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Turning Call Waiting on and off| 00:00 | Built into your iPhone's calling plan and turned on
by default is the Call Waiting feature.
| | 00:05 | As you probably know, call waiting is
the feature that lets you know
| | 00:08 | a second person is calling you
while you're on the phone with someone else.
| | 00:11 | In an earlier movie, we saw how you can
switch back and forth between your callers
| | 00:15 | and even merge the two calls together
into a conference call.
| | 00:18 | But there may be times when you
want to turn call waiting off.
| | 00:21 | For example, you might be about to
start an important work related call
| | 00:24 | and you want to make sure
you're not distracted by other callers.
| | 00:27 | By turning off Call Waiting, all callers
will be sent directly to your voicemail.
| | 00:31 | To do so, go to Settings, Phone, Call Waiting.
| | 00:38 | And here you can just tap the On/Off switch
to turn call waiting on or off.
| | 00:42 | Similarly to call forwarding, your call waiting
settings are not stored on your iPhone.
| | 00:46 | What you're doing here is sending
a message to your cellular provider
| | 00:49 | letting their system know that
you would like call waiting turned off.
| | 00:52 | So you have to be on your cellular
network to use this On/Off switch.
| | 00:55 | Once Call Waiting is turned off,
if you're on a phone call and another call comes in,
| | 00:59 | that second call will go straight to voicemail
instead of interrupting your current call.
| | 01:03 | Most of the time though, you'll probably
want to keep call waiting turned on,
| | 01:07 | since the iPhone is so good at
managing multiple calls
| | 01:09 | by letting you easily ignore second calls
or switch back and forth between callers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Turning Caller ID on and off| 00:00 | Caller ID is another feature that's on
by default on your iPhone
| | 00:03 | and a feature that everyone pretty much
takes for granted these days.
| | 00:06 | When people call your phone, you'll see
their number appear on the screen
| | 00:10 | while the phone is ringing.
| | 00:12 | This lets you see if you recognize the number
and decide whether to answer the call or not.
| | 00:17 | When people whose phone numbers you
have listed in your Contacts call your phone,
| | 00:20 | you'll see their names appear in the same
way you've entered them into your contacts.
| | 00:26 | You can't turn off the ability to see the number
or the names of the people calling you
| | 00:29 | and frankly I can't think of a good reason
to do so,
| | 00:32 | but you can turn off the ability for others to see
your Caller ID information when you call them.
| | 00:37 | Now whatever reason you have to hide
your identity from your callers until they pick up
| | 00:40 | is your own business,
I'm just here to tell you how to do it.
| | 00:43 | Go to Settings, Phone, Show My Caller ID,
and here you can tap the switch to off.
| | 00:54 | When you have Shown My Caller ID off
and you place a call,
| | 00:57 | the person receiving your call will see a variety of
messages depending on the phone you're calling.
| | 01:01 | They might see private call, or blocked number,
or caller ID unavailable.
| | 01:07 | These days a lot of people won't even
pick up if they don't know who's calling
| | 01:10 | and some businesses won't accept blocked calls,
but if you ever need to turn off
| | 01:14 | your Caller ID now you know
where to do it.
| | 01:15 | Just remember to turn it back on
when you're done concealing your identity.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating custom ringtones with iTunes| 00:00 | We saw earlier that you can select from over
two dozen ringtones built into the iPhone,
| | 00:04 | but for some people none of these ringtones
quite fully expressed the personality
| | 00:08 | and force of character that our ringtones
are apparently supposed to express these days.
| | 00:11 | It seems like you can't find a cell phone that
has a ringtone that sounds like a phone anymore.
| | 00:15 | Ringtones these days seem to be all
about playing clips of your favorite song.
| | 00:20 | If you're one of these people who likes
to have music play as a ringtone on your iPhone,
| | 00:23 | you'll be happy to know you can generate
a ringtone from any song in your iTunes Library.
| | 00:27 | Now, there are ways to create ringtones
with audio editing applications
| | 00:30 | like GarageBand on the Mac and
maybe Audacity for Windows.
| | 00:33 | And while those applications give you a
lot more control over the length of the ringtone
| | 00:37 | and the ability to fade ringtones in and out,
teaching you how to use
| | 00:40 | those applications would require
a different tutorial altogether.
| | 00:43 | And what I want to show you here is a quick
way to use iTunes to create your ringtones.
| | 00:47 | So here in iTunes, first locate the song you want
to turn into a ringtone in your music library.
| | 00:53 | Now, if you're using a song you purchased
off the iTunes Store, see the end of
| | 00:55 | this movie for important information.
| | 00:57 | For now, I'm using a song I imported off a CD.
| | 01:00 | Next, play the song and note the time code
for the section you want to use as the ringtone.
| | 01:06 | (music playing)
| | 01:19 | So, that's the part of the song I want
to use as my ringtone,
| | 01:22 | and that's about the first 14 seconds of this song.
| | 01:25 | Now that I know the section of the song
I want to use,
| | 01:28 | I'm going to right-click on the file
and choose Get Info.
| | 01:31 | And here, I'm going to go to the Options tab.
| | 01:33 | This is where you will find the
Start Time and Stop Time options.
| | 01:37 | This allows you to set the
song to only play a specific part.
| | 01:40 | This is normally useful where you
have a song that's maybe a live recording
| | 01:43 | or maybe you have 30 seconds of talking or the
crowd cheering before the band starts playing.
| | 01:47 | You could click Start Time and set the song
to always start 30 seconds into the track.
| | 01:51 | But in this case, I want to start it at
the beginning of the song
| | 01:53 | but I want it to stop about 14 seconds in.
| | 01:56 | So, I'll check Stop Time and change this to 0:14.
| | 02:01 | Now, this doesn't alter the song in
any way, all I'm doing is telling iTunes
| | 02:04 | that anytime I play this track I only want
to hear the first 14 seconds. I'll click OK.
| | 02:10 | Next, I'm going to save a copy of this
clipped version of the song as an AAC file.
| | 02:15 | I can either right-click on the file
and choose Create AAC version,
| | 02:19 | or you will also find that command
under the Advanced menu.
| | 02:22 | Now, if you don't see Create AAC version,
and instead see something like
| | 02:27 | Create MP3 Version, you need to go to
iTunes>Preferences,
| | 02:31 | if you're on Windows you'll go to Edit>Preferences,
and here under the General tab go to Import Settings.
| | 02:36 | Then make sure the Import Using menu
is set to AAC Encoder.
| | 02:41 | So, with that file selected, I'll right-click on it
and choose Create AAC version.
| | 02:48 | It just takes a second and now
I have a 14 second version of the song.
| | 02:53 | Now at this point it's a good idea to
go back to the original version of the song,
| | 02:55 | Get Info and turn off the Stop Time,
because in the future I probably
| | 03:02 | want to listen to the song in its entirety.
| | 03:04 | Next, I want to look at the actual song file
on my computer of the shortened version.
| | 03:09 | So, I'll right-click on it again,
and this time choose Show in Finder.
| | 03:13 | If you're on Windows you'll choose
Show in Windows Explorer,
| | 03:16 | and that shows me the actual file.
| | 03:17 | Now, I'm going to make some room on my
desktop here just by changing the size of
| | 03:21 | my iTunes window, and I'm going
to drag that file to my Desktop.
| | 03:27 | So, this is an AAC file
which has the extension of .M4A.
| | 03:32 | All you have to do to turn this into a
ringtone is change that extension to M4R,
| | 03:36 | where R stands for ringtone.
| | 03:39 | On a Mac I'm going to be asked if I'm
sure I want to change the extension.
| | 03:42 | I'll say, I do want to use .M4R,
and now it's a ringtone file.
| | 03:46 | You can even see in the icon here it says Ring.
| | 03:48 | But before I drag this back into iTunes,
I'm going to go back and get rid
| | 03:51 | of the short file that's here in my library.
| | 03:53 | Because sometimes when you drag a
similarly named file back into iTunes
| | 03:56 | it doesn't import properly.
| | 03:58 | So, I right-click on it and choose Delete.
| | 04:03 | Now drag that M4R file back into iTunes,
and you'll notice that it doesn't show up here.
| | 04:09 | Where it did show up is in the Tones section,
here is the file right here.
| | 04:13 | So, now I have brand-new ringtone and
I can drag this to my iPhone the next time
| | 04:17 | it's connected and then choose
it as a ringtone for my iPhone.
| | 04:20 | I showed you how to change ringtones in
the first chapter, so you can check back
| | 04:23 | there if you need a review.
| | 04:25 | Now, if you're a Mac user and you have GarageBand
you can create your own ringtones
| | 04:28 | and export them directly into iTunes
from GarageBand, so you don't
| | 04:32 | have to bother with this file extension renaming thing.
| | 04:34 | If you're on Windows and using another
sound editing program, just be sure to
| | 04:38 | export your clip in an iTunes compatible format,
maybe WAV or AIF and then
| | 04:42 | convert it to an AAC, and then find
the AAC file and give it that .M4R extension,
| | 04:47 | and then reimport it into iTunes.
It takes more steps, but again it's free.
| | 04:52 | Now, I mentioned earlier that if you
want to turn music you purchase from
| | 04:55 | the iTunes Store into a ringtone, you can
do this as long as this music purchased
| | 04:58 | from about mid-2009 and later.
| | 05:01 | Music purchased prior to that is protected
by DRM or Digital Rights Management Technology
| | 05:05 | that prevent your music from being copied
or played on unauthorized computers.
| | 05:09 | Apple has since removed DRM, but if
you still have older songs you purchased
| | 05:13 | before DRM was removed you won't be able to
use the technique I showed you in this movie,
| | 05:17 | because iTunes won't let you create
a copy of protected music.
| | 05:20 | The way you can tell if you have DRM
protected music is to go into your Music Library,
| | 05:24 | select the track, right-click on it
and choose Get Info.
| | 05:28 | Under the Summary tab, if it says,
Kind:Protected AAC audio file,
| | 05:32 | you'll know that it's DRM protected.
| | 05:35 | More recently purchased music will be
labeled Purchased AAC audio file
| | 05:42 | and you're free to copy it as much as you
like and you can make it into a ringtone
| | 05:45 | following the steps I showed you in this movie.
| | 05:48 | So, that's a quick and easy method for creating
ringtones for your iPhone using only iTunes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Texting and using iMessages| 00:00 | Unless you've been living in a cave or
on a remote island for the past several years,
| | 00:04 | you probably know what texting is.
| | 00:06 | But briefly, texting or as it's officially known
Short Messaging Service or SMS
| | 00:11 | is a service for sending short messages
usually under 200 characters
| | 00:15 | or a few sentences from one phone to another.
| | 00:17 | The idea behind texting is that it's
immediate communication in the same sense
| | 00:20 | that a phone call is immediate but it's also
less formal than sending an email to someone.
| | 00:24 | Texting is for times when you want to ask question
or say something to a friend or coworker,
| | 00:28 | but don't want to speak on the phone
either because it would be unnecessary
| | 00:31 | or because you or your recipient are in
an environment where talking on the phone
| | 00:34 | is just not possible or maybe inconsiderate.
| | 00:38 | In addition to text messages, you can
even send and receive videos and short
| | 00:40 | video clips via text messaging.
| | 00:42 | Those are commonly referred to as
Multimedia Messaging Services or MMS.
| | 00:47 | So, let's take a quick walkthrough
of texting on the iPhone.
| | 00:50 | To send a text message from your iPhone,
tap the Messages icon.
| | 00:53 | If you've never sent a text message before,
the first thing you will see
| | 00:56 | will be a new Message screen asking you enter the
name or number of the person you want to text.
| | 01:01 | If you have received text before you'll
see a list of all your past and current conversations
| | 01:05 | in which case, tap the New Message button
to create a new message.
| | 01:09 | Start typing a name or number.
| | 01:11 | If the person's name appears in your
contacts the iPhone will suggest it.
| | 01:14 | If one of the suggestions is correct tap the names
so you don't have to type the entire thing out.
| | 01:19 | Additionally, you can tap the Plus (+)
symbol to go right to your Contacts
| | 01:23 | and browse for the person you want
to send the text to from here.
| | 01:25 | I'll just cancel that.
| | 01:28 | You can even send the text message
to multiple recipients.
| | 01:30 | For instance, maybe you're on a vacation
and you want to text to three other people
| | 01:34 | you're traveling with to let them know
you're in the hotel lobby,
| | 01:38 | just enter another number or
browse your Contacts list.
| | 01:47 | Be aware though that if you text multiple
recipients the replies of anyone
| | 01:50 | not using an iPhone may only come to you
and not to other people you texted.
| | 01:54 | If everyone is on iOS device though,
you can all converse back and forth
| | 01:57 | and you all receive each other's texts.
| | 02:00 | Next, type out your message
by tapping in the text field,
| | 02:07 | then tap Send, and that's all there is to it.
| | 02:10 | Within moment your recipients will receive
a text message as long as their phones are turned on.
| | 02:15 | If a recipient's phone is currently turned off
they will receive the message when they turn it back on.
| | 02:20 | If the person I'm texting sends a message back to me
while I'm still in the messages app it appears like this.
| | 02:26 | Now, if I'm not currently in the messages app
when I receive the message,
| | 02:28 | maybe I'm checking the weather
and a message comes in,
| | 02:33 | I can read the first line of the text
in this notification that pops up.
| | 02:36 | As we saw in the movie on Notifications in chapter one,
I have the option to either ignore this message,
| | 02:40 | which disappears after a few seconds
and stay on the Weather app,
| | 02:43 | or I could tap the notification
to close weather and go back
| | 02:47 | to my conversation to type my reply.
| | 02:49 | If I miss the chance to tap the notification,
remember I can drag down from the
| | 02:52 | top of the screen to open Notification Center
and tap my message from there.
| | 02:58 | And that's gist of texting.
| | 02:59 | Now, let's take a look at how
to send a picture or video.
| | 03:02 | And I'm going to send this one just to Scott.
| | 03:04 | So, I'm going to go back to my main
messages list, and here's a previous conversation
| | 03:07 | I was having with just Scott.
| | 03:09 | To send a photo or a video, tap the Camera icon.
| | 03:12 | That gives you the choice of shooting
a new photo or video or choosing
| | 03:15 | an existing one from your photo library.
| | 03:18 | If you choose to shoot a new photo, the
camera will open and you can take your picture.
| | 03:21 | But for this example, I'll tap Choose Existing.
| | 03:25 | Browse for the photo you want
to select and then tap Choose.
| | 03:33 | If you want to type a caption, your
reason for sending the photo
| | 03:36 | or some other text to go along with it go ahead,
or you can just leave this blank
| | 03:40 | and tap Send, and that's it.
| | 03:42 | You can do the same thing with short videos.
| | 03:44 | Just select the video clip instead of a still photo.
| | 03:47 | But be aware that the video will
be compressed and won't look nearly
| | 03:50 | as nice and sharp on your recipient's
phone as it does on your iPhone.
| | 03:53 | You're also limited to sending clips
that are only about a minute long
| | 03:56 | but you can use the iPhone's editing tools to
trim down your clips before sending them.
| | 04:01 | And of course you can receive MMS
messages from your friends as well.
| | 04:06 | They don't have to have iPhones to send
and receive photos to and from your phone.
| | 04:09 | They just need a phone and a plan
that accommodates text and MMS.
| | 04:13 | Now, only 50 messages or so
stay in your Message list at once.
| | 04:17 | So, if a friend sends you a photo or
video that you want to keep,
| | 04:20 | tap the image to view at a full size.
| | 04:23 | Then tap this button in the upper right-hand corner
and choose Save to Camera Roll.
| | 04:27 | That stores the image in your Photo Library
where you can access it at anytime.
| | 04:31 | So, that's the basic gist how to
send and receive text messages.
| | 04:35 | Now, I also want to point out that if
you're texting with friends who are also
| | 04:38 | on iOS devices whether it's the
iPhone, iPad or iPod touch,
| | 04:42 | you can take advantage
of feature called iMessage.
| | 04:44 | iMessage works just like text messaging
except unlike regular text messages
| | 04:49 | iMessages are free so you can send
as many messages back and forth
| | 04:53 | between you and your friends on iOS devices
all without being charged by your wireless carrier
| | 04:57 | and iMessage also works over
both cell networks and Wi-Fi networks.
| | 05:00 | So, you can text to in from non-cellular
devices like the iPad and iPod touch.
| | 05:05 | Now if you're on an iPhone, your phone
number is all you need to use iMessage.
| | 05:08 | But if you're on a non-cellular device
like an iPod touch or even a Mac,
| | 05:12 | you can use your Apple ID
as your contact for iMessage.
| | 05:15 | Let me show you where to do that in iOS.
| | 05:17 | So, all you need is an Apple ID, to turn
on iMessage go to Settings>Messages
| | 05:28 | and here make sure iMessage is turned on.
| | 05:32 | So, you can see here on my iPhone under
Send & Receive I currently see my phone number.
| | 05:36 | If I tap that, I can tap
Use your Apple ID for iMessage
| | 05:43 | and here enter your Apple ID
and your password and Sign In.
| | 05:54 | And now, I can see that my friends will
be able to contact me through iMessage
| | 05:57 | through both my phone number and my Apple ID.
| | 06:02 | Now other options we have here
are Send Read Receipts.
| | 06:05 | When it's switched on, this lets people who have
sent you messages know that you read their message.
| | 06:12 | This is also where you can switch on
the options for MMS Messaging, Group Messaging
| | 06:15 | and you can also include a
Subject Field and a Character Count,
| | 06:18 | but those are off by default.
| | 06:20 | But the real beauty of iMessage is
that you can use the same Apple ID
| | 06:23 | across multiple iOS devices.
| | 06:25 | So, if I were to sign into my iPad with the
same Apple ID I've entered on my iPhone,
| | 06:28 | my messages would be sent to both
devices and I could respond to them
| | 06:32 | from either device as well.
| | 06:34 | But again, messages only works with iOS
devices and Macs running the Messages app.
| | 06:39 | Also anytime you use your Apple ID
on an iOS device to enable iMessage
| | 06:42 | you'll get an alert on your other devices letting
you know that that ID was used on that device.
| | 06:47 | This is just a safeguard to let you know
on the off chance that anyone else has
| | 06:50 | used your ID to access your messages.
| | 06:53 | But just as an example,
I'll go back to my Messages.
| | 06:59 | With iMessage is turned on,
I can text Scott as usual,
| | 07:09 | and since Scott is on an iPhone
as well my messages default to iMessages.
| | 07:13 | You can tell what type of message
or conversation you're having
| | 07:16 | by the color of the text bubbles.
| | 07:18 | Traditional text messages appear in green bubbles
while iMessage appears in blue.
| | 07:23 | And yet another advantage of iMessage
is that you can see when the person
| | 07:26 | you're texting is replying.
| | 07:28 | Notice this bubble with the ellipses, this tells me
that Scott is typing something back to me.
| | 07:32 | Okay, so that's how to send and
receive text and multimedia messages.
| | 07:37 | Let's finish here by looking at
how we manage our text conversations.
| | 07:41 | Here in Messages is a list of all
the text conversations you had,
| | 07:44 | or more accurately this is a list of all the
people you had text conversations with
| | 07:48 | in chronological order with the most
recent conversations at the top.
| | 07:53 | This is nice because the people you
chat with most frequently will always
| | 07:56 | be at the top of this list.
| | 07:57 | So, if you want to send one of these
people a text message you don't have
| | 08:00 | to type in their number
or search through your contacts.
| | 08:02 | Just find the previous conversation
you had and tap it.
| | 08:05 | Even if the previous conversation happened
three weeks ago
| | 08:08 | their information is still here so you can just
type your message and hit Send.
| | 08:18 | To go back to the Message List,
tap Messages button.
| | 08:22 | Now, you can also delete conversation
from this list if you need to.
| | 08:25 | Either swipe your finger across the conversation you
want to delete, which reveals the Delete button --
| | 08:30 | I'll cancel that by tapping Done --
or tap Edit and tap the little red icons
| | 08:37 | next to the messages you want to delete,
and then tap delete.
| | 08:43 | Similarly, you can delete portions
of individual conversations.
| | 08:48 | Maybe for example your friend sent you
an embarrassing photo from the weekend,
| | 08:50 | you can't do anything about the fact
that your friend has this photo,
| | 08:54 | at least not with your iPhone but you
can at least get the copy off of your phone.
| | 08:58 | Just tap Edit and check the circles next to
any parts of the conversations you want to delete,
| | 09:05 | then tap Delete and then
tap Delete Selected Messages.
| | 09:11 | Lastly, you'll sometimes come to the point
where it becomes apparent
| | 09:14 | that texting is not the proper medium
for the conversation you're having.
| | 09:17 | Maybe things are getting heated
or could just be that they are too many details
| | 09:21 | or too much to type.
| | 09:22 | Just scroll up or tap the top of the conversation
to scroll all the way to the top.
| | 09:25 | And here you can tap Call
to immediately place a call to this person.
| | 09:29 | You don't have to close messages
and open the phone app to do so.
| | 09:32 | Notice here you can also tap Contact information
to see the person's contact info.
| | 09:38 | If you have a long conversation history
with this particular person
| | 09:41 | you will also see Load Earlier Messages here
as well, and that will allow you
| | 09:46 | to view more than the 50 messages
currently saved on your phone.
| | 09:48 | And that is texting and using
iMessage with your iOS device.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. EmailImporting email accounts from your computer| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look at all things email.
| | 00:03 | The iPhone, and iPod touch both come
with the mail app, a full-fledged email client
| | 00:07 | for reading, sending,
and managing your email accounts.
| | 00:11 | The first thing you need to do is set up
your email account or accounts on your device.
| | 00:15 | Probably the easiest way to do this is
to just sync your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:18 | with your Mac or PC, and
copying over your account information.
| | 00:22 | That way, there's no need to do any kind of
manual set up on the iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:25 | Now, in order for this to work on a Mac,
you have to be using OS X's
| | 00:29 | built-in mail application as your email program.
| | 00:32 | If you're on Windows, you need to be using
Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express, or Windows Mail.
| | 00:37 | iTunes will detect the email accounts
you manage from these programs.
| | 00:41 | So, with my iPhone selected here in
iTunes, I'll select the Info Tab,
| | 00:42 | and I'll scroll down, and check Sync Mail Accounts.
| | 00:49 | You can see it's detected the email
accounts that I have in my mail app.
| | 00:54 | If I look in my mail app, I can
see these two accounts listed here.
| | 00:57 | All I have to do here is check the accounts
that I want to have access to on my iPhone.
| | 01:03 | I'll leave them both selected.
| | 01:04 | But it's important to know what it says below here.
| | 01:08 | Syncing mail account syncs your
account settings but not your messages.
| | 01:11 | And it tells me that to add accounts
or to make other changes,
| | 01:14 | I have to tap Settings, then Mail,
Contacts, Calendars on my iPhone.
| | 01:17 | So, that basically tells me that I'm going to
be syncing my username and password
| | 01:21 | and my connection info that I'll need
to access these email addresses,
| | 01:24 | but not the messages themselves.
| | 01:25 | So, if you want to make sure the messages
on your computer and iPhone are the same,
| | 01:29 | you have to do that by setting
certain options in your email accounts.
| | 01:33 | We'll take a look at how to
do that in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:35 | But for now, this is all I have to do to
get my email account information onto my phone.
| | 01:39 | So now I'll click Apply.
| | 01:43 | And now, I'll be able to send and receive
emails from these accounts on my iPhone.
| | 01:47 | If you have an email account that you
don't manage on your computer,
| | 01:50 | or you created an email account that you want
to use exclusively on your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 01:54 | for some reason, you'll have to
set that account up on the device itself.
| | 01:58 | And we'll look at how to
do that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up Exchange, iCloud, Gmail, Yahoo!, Hotmail, or AOL email accounts| 00:00 | Now, let's take a look at how to set up
your email accounts on your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:04 | without having to sync it with your computer.
| | 00:06 | Start by tapping the Mail app.
| | 00:07 | If you're currently not managing any
email accounts on your device,
| | 00:09 | you'll see this screen which lists six of the
most popular email services around.
| | 00:13 | We have iCloud, Microsoft Exchange,
Gmail, Yahoo, AOL, and Hotmail.
| | 00:18 | All you have to do here is tap
the name of the service you use.
| | 00:21 | iCloud is Apple's free online or
cloud service for storing your content
| | 00:25 | and includes a free email address.
| | 00:27 | You might have created an iCloud
account when you set up your iPhone.
| | 00:30 | If you don't yet have an iCloud email
address and would like one,
| | 00:33 | you can set one up by going to the iCloud Settings
on your device,
| | 00:35 | and we'll see that in action a little bit later.
| | 00:37 | Next is Microsoft Exchange.
| | 00:39 | You'll most likely only have an Exchange account
if that's the email system your company uses.
| | 00:43 | Also listed here is Gmail which you probably
know is Google's free email service
| | 00:46 | and you can also get free accounts
from Yahoo! AOL, and Hotmail.
| | 00:50 | Now, you can't register for a new email
account from this screen.
| | 00:52 | This screen is only for setting up
existing email accounts.
| | 00:55 | If you like to set up a new account,
you have to visit one of the services
| | 00:58 | on your web browser and sign up.
| | 01:00 | Once you have an account you want to
manage on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 01:03 | you can come back to this screen.
| | 01:04 | Now, these are the most popular services,
so Apple has made it easy
| | 01:07 | to just enter a few pieces of
information to set up your accounts.
| | 01:10 | If you have an email account with the
provider not listed here,
| | 01:12 | you'll just tap Other, and go through
a slightly longer setup process,
| | 01:15 | but we will look at the
Other Options in another movie.
| | 01:17 | So, if you have an account from one of
the services, setting up your email is easy.
| | 01:21 | Let's say I have an iCloud account.
I'll just tap iCloud.
| | 01:23 | And all I have to do here is
enter my Apply ID and password.
| | 01:28 | Then I'll tap next.
| | 01:32 | Now, iCloud is asking me if it can
use the location of my phone,
| | 01:35 | because iCloud includes other features
like the Find my Phone feature,
| | 01:38 | and I'm going to allow that.
| | 01:40 | So, the options you see here help me
determine what portions of my iCloud account
| | 01:43 | I want to sync with my iPhone.
| | 01:45 | This part is unique to setting up an iCloud account.
| | 01:47 | We'll look at another type of account
in a moment, but for now,
| | 01:49 | I'm going to turn off everything except mail
because I just want to sync with my mail,
| | 01:54 | and we'll tap Save.
| | 01:58 | That takes me right to my inbox
where I can now see my incoming mail
| | 02:01 | and read and respond to it. All right.
| | 02:03 | Let's set up another account.
| | 02:04 | Once you've set up one account, you no longer
open the Mail app to set up additional accounts.
| | 02:08 | Instead, click your Home button, go
to Settings>Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
| | 02:14 | Then here tap Add Account.
| | 02:16 | Now, you get the same Add Account
screen we saw before.
| | 02:19 | I will select Gmail this time.
| | 02:21 | And here I will enter my name, email
address, password, and a description,
| | 02:25 | and my iPhone will handle the rest
of setting this account up for me.
| | 02:30 | Then I'll tap Next.
| | 02:33 | You can see Gmail gives me slightly
different options here,
| | 02:36 | I can choose to sync my mail as well as my
Google Calendars and any notes.
| | 02:40 | I'll leave things as they are and tap Save.
| | 02:43 | Now I see both my iCloud and Gmail
accounts listed in my Settings.
| | 02:48 | Notice the badge that appears on the mail icon.
| | 02:51 | This lets me know how many new messages are
waiting for me in my various email accounts.
| | 02:54 | Let's open Mail again.
| | 02:56 | To access the email from either of
these accounts, I'm going to go back to my
| | 03:00 | main mailboxes area where you can see
both my iCloud and Gmail accounts listed.
| | 03:04 | So, for instance, if I wanted to read
my iCloud email, I would tap iCloud,
| | 03:08 | and that takes me to the iCloud inbox.
| | 03:10 | Alternately, I can tap All Inboxes
which lists all of your incoming email
| | 03:15 | with the most recently received messages
listed from top to bottom
| | 03:18 | regardless of which inbox they belong to.
| | 03:19 | It's a nice way to quickly check all
your new email without having to switch
| | 03:23 | back and forth between accounts.
| | 03:24 | And that's how to set up your email
on your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 03:27 | if you use Exchange, iCloud, Gmail,
Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.
| | 03:32 | We'll look at how to set up email accounts
other than these in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up other types of email accounts| 00:00 | If you have an email account that isn't one
of the six types that the iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:04 | can set up automatically for you,
maybe your email account
| | 00:06 | is through your Internet service provider
or through the company you work for,
| | 00:09 | you can still manage your email on your device.
| | 00:12 | Start by opening Settings and go to Mail,
Contacts, Calendars, and in here, tap Add Account.
| | 00:18 | To set up your email, tap Other.
| | 00:20 | Then tap Add Mail Account.
| | 00:22 | Next, complete these four fields.
| | 00:24 | In the Name field, type the name that
you want to appear in the From field
| | 00:27 | when other people receive the
emails you send to them.
| | 00:29 | So, decide whether you want them to see your
full name, just your first name, or some nickname.
| | 00:33 | Next, enter the email address
you want to manage from your phone.
| | 00:37 | Then the password, and I can either
leave the Description field as is
| | 00:41 | or type-in some other description.
| | 00:43 | I'll just leave it as is, and I'll tap Next.
| | 00:46 | At this point, the iPhone tries to figure out
if it can determine the other settings
| | 00:49 | it needs to access this email based on
your email address and password.
| | 00:52 | If you have an email address
from a large and well-known company,
| | 00:54 | this might be all you need to do.
| | 00:56 | But if your iPhone or iPod doesn't
recognize your email provider,
| | 00:58 | you'll see this next screen in which you'll
have to complete some more information.
| | 01:02 | All the information you enter here will be
given to you by your email providing service.
| | 01:05 | So, what you enter here will be completely
different than what I'm typing in this example.
| | 01:09 | The first choice here is to pick either IMAP or POP.
| | 01:11 | Again, in many cases, your email
provider will tell you which of these two types
| | 01:14 | of email protocols it uses.
| | 01:16 | Many providers offer you a choice.
| | 01:18 | I'll go into a lot more detail about
IMAP and POP in an upcoming movie
| | 01:21 | on keeping your iPhone email
synced with your computer.
| | 01:23 | But I will say here that if you're
adding an email account through
| | 01:26 | your iPhone or iPod touch, and you also read
and manage that email on your computer,
| | 01:30 | you should choose IMAP if you have the choice.
| | 01:32 | It's going to make it much easier to keep your
email organized across your computer and iPhone.
| | 01:38 | Next, complete the sections under
Incoming Mail Server and Outgoing Mail Server.
| | 01:42 | Again, you'll have to get this
information from your email provider.
| | 01:46 | Tap Next when you're done.
| | 01:48 | You're iPhone or iPod will attempt to
connect to your email service
| | 01:51 | based on the information you entered.
| | 01:53 | If you get any kind of error message,
double-check your Settings and try again.
| | 01:56 | If all goes well, you're done, and
you can now access email on your device.
| | 02:00 | As we saw in the previous movie, I have
here the choice to sync both my email,
| | 02:03 | and in this case, my notes.
I'm going to leave Notes off and tap Save.
| | 02:07 | And now my account has been added to my iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping your iPhone or iPod touch email synced with your computer| 00:00 | One issue that can arise whenever you read
and manage email on more than one device,
| | 00:03 | whether that includes a second computer,
your iPhone, or an iPod touch,
| | 00:08 | is the issue of how to keep
your email on your devices synced.
| | 00:11 | For example, if both your main computer
and your iPhone are set up to check
| | 00:15 | for and download new email messages
periodically, it's possible to end up
| | 00:18 | with some messages stored on your phone
and not on your computer or vice versa.
| | 00:23 | Now, this is generally a problem that comes up
when you're managing a POP-type email account.
| | 00:28 | Previously, when we were looking at
how to set up email accounts,
| | 00:30 | we saw that the two main types of email
protocols are POP and IMAP.
| | 00:35 | POP used to be the most common type of
email service used by Internet hosting providers
| | 00:38 | and it basically works like this.
| | 00:41 | Email that's sent to your account is
stored on your email provider's server
| | 00:44 | until your email program, whether it's
the email program on your computer
| | 00:47 | or your iPhone, notices the new
message and downloads it off the server.
| | 00:52 | Once the message has been downloaded
from the server, it's usually deleted
| | 00:55 | anywhere from immediately
to within one or two weeks.
| | 00:58 | At that point, the only copy of
the email is found on your computer.
| | 01:02 | Similarly, when you send email through a
POP account, a copy of the sent message
| | 01:06 | is only stored on the computer you sent it from.
| | 01:08 | If you only manage your email from one
computer, this isn't usually a problem.
| | 01:13 | But imagine if you use your iPhone or iPod touch
to also check for and download your emails.
| | 01:18 | If your computer detects a new email
and downloads it before your iPhone does,
| | 01:21 | you won't have a copy of that email on your iPhone,
or if your iPhone downloads an email first,
| | 01:26 | you won't have a copy of that email
on your computer.
| | 01:28 | So, it's very easy to end up with some
emails on your computer,
| | 01:31 | and some emails on your iPhone,
and you'd have to search through both
| | 01:34 | if you were looking for
a specific message you received.
| | 01:38 | Now, this issue is partially addressed by
default in the iPhone or iPod touch's settings.
| | 01:42 | I'll go to Settings>Mail, Contacts, Calendars,
| | 01:50 | and here I'll select the POP account I've created.
| | 01:55 | Now, I'll choose Advanced.
| | 01:57 | And here under Incoming Settings, notice
that Delete from server is set to Never.
| | 02:02 | This means that when my iPhone grabs
new messages from the server,
| | 02:05 | it leaves a copy on the server, which is then
recognized by my home computer
| | 02:08 | as a new message, so it will be downloaded
to my home computer as well.
| | 02:12 | But this is only useful if my iPhone sees
the new message before my computer does.
| | 02:16 | If my computer sees the new message first,
it might grab it and delete it off the server
| | 02:20 | before my iPhone downloads it.
| | 02:22 | So, to make sure the email on your
iPhone and computer stays synced,
| | 02:24 | you have to set up a similar preference on
your computer's email client as well.
| | 02:27 | Essentially, you want to find the preference
that tells your computer's email program
| | 02:30 | to leave messages on the server
just like the setting on the iPhone does.
| | 02:36 | If you're using Mail on a Mac, go to
Mail>Preferences, and select your account.
| | 02:43 | Then go to the Advanced Tab, and uncheck
Remove copy from server after retrieving a message.
| | 02:52 | If you're using Microsoft Outlook on
Windows, here I'll go to the File Tab,
| | 02:57 | to my Account Settings, double-click my account.
| | 03:05 | And here, I'll click More Settings.
| | 03:09 | Under the Advanced Tab, I'll uncheck
Remove from server after, in this case 14 days,
| | 03:14 | but that doesn't matter because I'm unchecking it.
| | 03:17 | If you use another email program,
you should still be able to find the setting
| | 03:20 | to leave messages on your server.
| | 03:22 | So, basically with both your iPhone and your
computer leaving new messages on the server,
| | 03:26 | both should have identical copies
of incoming messages in their inboxes.
| | 03:30 | But of course, this doesn't address the issue of sent
messages being stored on two separate devices.
| | 03:35 | So, if you compose an email and send it
from your iPhone, a copy of the sent message
| | 03:38 | will not be on your home computer,
and you'll have to look on your phone
| | 03:41 | if you need to check what you wrote.
| | 03:44 | Really, POP email can be a huge headache
when you're managing email on multiple devices.
| | 03:48 | That's why most email providers and
email users use the IMAP email protocol.
| | 03:52 | Unlike POP email, IMAP email
is all kept and managed online.
| | 03:57 | So, if you read a new incoming message
on your computer, your iPhone will still
| | 04:00 | download a copy of the message as well.
| | 04:02 | It just won't show up as a new message since you
will have already read it on your computer,
| | 04:06 | and that will be reflected on the IMAP server.
| | 04:08 | But that's actually a good thing because once you
read an email message on your computer,
| | 04:12 | you don't want to get a notification
on your phone that you have a new
| | 04:14 | email message only to find
it's the one you already read.
| | 04:17 | The important thing is that your email
messages, both received and sent,
| | 04:20 | will remain synced across your devices
if you're using an IMAP account.
| | 04:24 | And like I said, many email providers have
both POP and IMAP services available these days.
| | 04:29 | So if you have a choice, I
definitely recommend going with IMAP.
| | 04:32 | You won't have to go in and change any
of those preferences we were looking at
| | 04:36 | in your computer's email programs or on your iPhone,
and managing, and reading email
| | 04:40 | will be a lot less time-consuming
because you'll have identical information
| | 04:42 | on both your computer and your device.
| | 04:45 | Now, if you have an email address through your work
and it's a Microsoft Exchange Service
| | 04:48 | or if you're using an iCloud or GMail account,
then you don't have to worry about any of this.
| | 04:53 | All the email on your devices will always be synced.
| | 04:56 | The info I discussed in this movie is
really only to explain the differences
| | 04:59 | between POP and IMAP accounts and the
impact they have on email management.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Composing email| 00:00 | Now, let's take a look at how to compose
email messages from your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | You can compose email from any screen
in the Mail App by tapping the Compose button
| | 00:08 | in the lower right-hand corner.
This opens a new blank message.
| | 00:12 | You can fill out the fields at the top in any
order you like, but let's work our way down.
| | 00:15 | In the To field, either start typing the address
of the person you want to send the email to,
| | 00:19 | or press the Plus (+) button to browse through
your contacts, and select the recipient from there.
| | 00:24 | If you don't need to use the Cc or Bcc
fields, you can just leave them blank.
| | 00:27 | In the From field, you can choose which one of your
email addresses you want to send your email from.
| | 00:31 | I'll leave it as is.
| | 00:33 | Next, type a subject for your email.
| | 00:35 | It's considered good form and a courtesy
to include a subject line in your emails,
| | 00:39 | so your recipients know what
the email is about and also so they have
| | 00:42 | an additional way of searching for the email
later, should they need to refer back to it.
| | 00:46 | All that's left is to type your message.
| | 00:49 | Tap in the body of the message and start typing.
| | 00:52 | Bear in mind that as with most other
applications in which you can type,
| | 00:55 | you can rotate the iPhone, or iPod touch
to type in Landscape mode,
| | 00:58 | which you might find easier and more comfortable.
| | 01:02 | You can also apply some basic formatting to
your text which you might want to do for emphasis.
| | 01:06 | Just select the word or words you want
to format, then click the triangle here
| | 01:10 | which you might find to reveal
the Bold, Italics, and Underline options.
| | 01:14 | You can choose any combination of the three.
| | 01:16 | Tap anywhere away from the text to deselect it.
| | 01:20 | You can also adjust the quote level of
a paragraph by selecting any word in it
| | 01:23 | and then tapping the triangle
until you see the Quote Level button.
| | 01:29 | And here, you can tap to
increase or decrease the Quote Level.
| | 01:32 | You can see these lines appearing on
the side as I increase the Quote Level.
| | 01:36 | This can be useful if you're
quoting someone else in your email.
| | 01:39 | When you're done typing, you can tap
Send to send it off, or if you need
| | 01:43 | to save the message until you have more
time to finish it, you can tap Cancel,
| | 01:47 | which gives you the option to
either save or delete the message.
| | 01:50 | Tap Save Draft if you want to get back to it later.
| | 01:53 | That places it in the Drafts folder for
that email account where you can
| | 01:56 | access it again by navigating out here to the
main Mail screen, tapping the account
| | 02:00 | in which you were composing the
message, and then tapping Drafts.
| | 02:03 | Then here, you'll find your saved message.
| | 02:05 | Just tap it to open it again, tap
anywhere in it to begin editing,
| | 02:14 | make any necessary changes, and then send it off.
| | 02:22 | So, that's how you compose a message from scratch.
| | 02:24 | Now, other ways to create new messages
include replying to a received email,
| | 02:27 | which you do by simply opening a
message you've received,
| | 02:31 | and then tapping this curved arrow button.
| | 02:34 | You're given the choice to Reply and
write a message back to the sender
| | 02:36 | or Forward if you want to send
the email on to someone else.
| | 02:39 | You can also print the email from here if you're
on a network with an AirPrint-enabled printer.
| | 02:43 | I'm just going to cancel that for now.
| | 02:45 | You can also send emails from various
apps like your Photo Library or from Safari.
| | 02:48 | But new to iOS 6, you can now attach photos
to a new message from the Mail app itself.
| | 02:52 | Previously, you had to go out to your Photo Library
to copy a photo, and paste it into your message.
| | 02:57 | But now you can just compose a new
message and then just tap where you want
| | 03:00 | the photo to appear in the message.
| | 03:01 | Tap the right triangle once,
and choose Insert Photo or Video.
| | 03:06 | This opens your Photo Library and you can browse
to find the photo or video you want to attach.
| | 03:10 | Once you select the photo,
it's inserted into your message.
| | 03:13 | Now this doesn't mean you have to start
composing a message in order to attach a photo.
| | 03:16 | You can do it in the other direction too.
| | 03:18 | Let's cancel this message and I'm just
going to delete the draft,
| | 03:22 | and I'm going to open my Photos app.
| | 03:27 | Let's say you're browsing through your photos
and you find a photo you want to send to a friend.
| | 03:31 | I need to tap the screen once to bring
the buttons back and
| | 03:33 | now I can tap the Share button, and choose Mail.
| | 03:37 | That opens a new message with the photo attached.
| | 03:40 | So we can email a photo directly from the Photos app.
| | 03:42 | I'll just cancel that.
| | 03:45 | Similarly, if I come across a web page
I want to forward to someone,
| | 03:49 | I can tap the Share button in Safari
and choose Mail from here.
| | 03:53 | And again, a new message opens and
notice the Subject has been filled in
| | 03:56 | with the title of the web page and the address of
the page appears in the body of the message.
| | 04:00 | So, those are some of the main ways you
can create a new email message,
| | 04:02 | and how you can add attachments
like photos and web links.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Receiving and reading email| 00:00 | Now, let's talk about how the iPhone and
iPod touch check for new email
| | 00:03 | and what you can do with the emails you receive.
| | 00:06 | Depending on the type of email account
you have, either your messages show up
| | 00:09 | on your iPhone or iPod as soon as they
arrive on your email server,
| | 00:12 | or your device is set to check for new
messages at set durations of time.
| | 00:16 | Email systems such as Microsoft Exchange,
Yahoo Mail, Gmail, and iCloud
| | 00:20 | are what is known as push email.
| | 00:22 | Instead of waiting for your phone to
check if new messages are on the server,
| | 00:25 | the server pushes the new message to your phone,
so they show up almost immediately
| | 00:29 | after the person sending the email
hits the Send key on his or her computer,
| | 00:32 | barring of course any network traffic
that may be clogging things up.
| | 00:36 | Now this does depend on how
you have certain options set.
| | 00:38 | Let's look in Settings>Mail, Contacts, Calendars.
| | 00:43 | And in here, I'll tap Fetch New Data.
| | 00:45 | And here's where you find the on/off switch for Push.
| | 00:48 | If you don't have any email accounts
that support Push, turn it off
| | 00:51 | because having Push on does tax your
battery more than having Push off.
| | 00:54 | So, even if you do have Push email accounts,
you might occasionally want to turn Push off
| | 00:58 | as a battery conservation step.
| | 01:00 | When Push is off or if your email
account doesn't support Push,
| | 01:04 | Mail checks for new messages on your server
based on the Settings selection under Fetch.
| | 01:08 | You can choose every 15, 30, or 60 minutes.
| | 01:11 | Notice it says here that checking for new mail
less frequently will also conserve battery life.
| | 01:16 | If you select Manually, your iPhone,
and iPod touch will not check for new mail
| | 01:19 | until you open the Mail application.
| | 01:21 | Additionally, you can tap Advanced to assign
different Fetch settings to individual accounts.
| | 01:25 | So, for instance, if you want to make sure
your work email gets to you immediately,
| | 01:29 | you can set it to Push.
| | 01:30 | But leave your personal email address
set to Fetch even if it supports Push.
| | 01:34 | Okay, so those are the ways
Mail checks for new messages.
| | 01:37 | Now, let's take a look at what you can do
with the messages you receive. I'll go to Mail.
| | 01:41 | And again, the act of opening the Mail app
makes it connect to your email servers
| | 01:45 | to check if any new messages have arrived.
| | 01:47 | And new to iOS 6, you can also drag
the screen down and release it anytime
| | 01:51 | to check for new mail messages manually.
| | 01:53 | So, if you're eagerly awaiting a message
from someone, you can sit there
| | 01:56 | pulling down on the screen to
make Mail check your inboxes.
| | 01:58 | This works on any specific mailbox screens
too and not just on the main Mailbox screen.
| | 02:04 | But here on the main Mailbox page,
you see a list of all your inboxes.
| | 02:08 | This lets you quickly scan all your mail accounts
and see how many new messages are in each one.
| | 02:12 | Now you could tap each individual
inbox to see the messages in it,
| | 02:15 | but by reading your email that way, you have
to keep returning to the main Mail screen
| | 02:19 | to access your other email inboxes.
| | 02:21 | A sometimes more convenient alternative
is to tap All Inboxes, which lists the contents
| | 02:25 | of all of your account inboxes
in chronological order, so you can read
| | 02:29 | all your incoming email regardless
of which accounts it was sent to.
| | 02:32 | Let's go back to the main screen for a moment.
| | 02:35 | Under the Inboxes section, is the Accounts section,
and it's here where you can
| | 02:38 | access your various account folders in full.
| | 02:40 | So, if I tap iCloud, I can access all the folders
associated with this account and not just my inbox.
| | 02:46 | So, if you need to access your other folders,
that's how you get to them.
| | 02:49 | Let's go back to the main screen again.
| | 02:51 | Now, let's look at some of the
specifics of reading your messages.
| | 02:54 | I'll go into one of my email inboxes, and again,
I can browse through my messages by scrolling through.
| | 03:01 | To read a new message in full, just tap it.
| | 03:02 | Mail can be read in both
Portrait and Landscape modes.
| | 03:08 | I prefer to read my mail in Portrait
most of the time, but also remember that
| | 03:12 | you can turn on Orientation Lock if need be
by double-clicking the Home button
| | 03:15 | to open the Multitasking toolbar,
flicking to the right, and then tapping
| | 03:19 | the Orientation Lock button.
| | 03:20 | This can be convenient if you like to read
your email while lying on your side in bed.
| | 03:24 | But if you're sitting or standing up,
it's nice to be able to rotate your
| | 03:27 | device to Landscape to make the text bigger.
| | 03:29 | I'll leave the Orientation Lock off for now.
| | 03:34 | While in Mail, you can use
the standard finger gestures.
| | 03:37 | Swipe up, and down to scroll, pinch out to zoom in,
you can drag around while you're zoomed in,
| | 03:41 | and you can double-tap text
to go back to the standard size.
| | 03:45 | You can reply to or forward email
by tapping the curved arrow button.
| | 03:49 | Incidentally, if you want to quote a
line of text in reply,
| | 03:55 | you can make a selection, and when you tap Reply,
| | 04:03 | notice the selected text is included as a quote.
| | 04:05 | That's pretty much how it works in
regular email programs on your computer.
| | 04:08 | I'll just cancel this for now.
| | 04:10 | If on your computer or through your email host website,
you've created folders to store your messages,
| | 04:13 | you can tap the Folder button to move the message
you're reading to one of those folders.
| | 04:18 | You can't create folders using your
iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 04:21 | so those folders have to be created
on your computer beforehand. I'll tap Cancel.
| | 04:25 | You can also delete messages
by tapping the Trashcan button.
| | 04:28 | So the message gets sucked down into the trashcan.
| | 04:31 | If you tap Trash accidentally, navigate
into your Accounts list of folders that we looked at earlier,
| | 04:37 | and then tap Trash to find your email message.
| | 04:39 | Then select the message, tap the Folder
button, and then you can move your file
| | 04:43 | back into the Inbox or any other folder of your choice.
| | 04:46 | So, now if I go back to my Inbox,
I'll see my message has been moved back here.
| | 04:52 | Now if you want to delete or move a bunch
of messages all at once,
| | 04:55 | go back to your Inbox and tap the Edit button.
| | 04:58 | Then tap each message you want to delete or move.
| | 05:01 | Then tap either Delete or Move.
| | 05:03 | I'll just cancel that for now.
| | 05:05 | If the message you receive contains
links to any web pages like this one does,
| | 05:11 | you can just tap the link to open the web page.
| | 05:13 | That opens Safari and takes me to the website.
| | 05:15 | Let's go back to Mail.
| | 05:18 | Similarly, if the email contains an
address or a phone number,
| | 05:21 | Mail will recognize them as such, and you'll be
able to tap the address to open the Maps app,
| | 05:26 | or tap the phone number to immediately dial it.
| | 05:28 | You can see there's an address
here at the bottom of this email.
| | 05:30 | Tapping that opens up the Maps application.
| | 05:37 | If the email contains any photos you'd
like to save, just hold your finger down on the image,
| | 05:42 | and after a second, you'll see the buttons
to either save the image,
| | 05:46 | which places a copy of the image
in your photo library or Copy,
| | 05:49 | which lets you copy the image so you can
paste it into another email message,
| | 05:53 | an MMS text message, or some other application.
| | 05:55 | Now, when you read an email, it gets
marked as a read message, and the blue dot
| | 05:59 | next to it in your email list is removed.
| | 06:01 | Occasionally, you might want to remind yourself
to read a message more closely at a later time.
| | 06:05 | Now, you might have created a folder for
important messages that you can move it to,
| | 06:08 | but one way I like to remind myself
to get back to a message,
| | 06:12 | is to tap this Flag icon,
and then choose Mark as Unread.
| | 06:15 | That places the blue dot back next to
the message as well as counts the message
| | 06:18 | among the number of unread emails
on the Mail icon badge, making it very obvious
| | 06:22 | to me that I need to go to
my Inbox and read my messages.
| | 06:26 | As soon as you open the email though,
that blue dot will be removed.
| | 06:29 | We also have the option to flag
the email with the Flag button.
| | 06:31 | That's just another way you can
mark a message to get back to it later.
| | 06:35 | You can see that puts a little Flag icon
right next to the subject of the message,
| | 06:39 | which also appears here in the main Inbox.
| | 06:41 | The meaning of the flag is entirely up to you.
| | 06:43 | It could be used to indicate to yourself
that you've read the email,
| | 06:46 | but that you need to reply to it soon, or you
could use it as a reminder to file it away
| | 06:50 | in its own folder later on.
| | 06:51 | It's entirely up to you.
| | 06:53 | If you want to unflag the email, just tap it,
tap the Flag button again, and tap Unflag.
| | 06:59 | So, those are some of the options you have
available when receiving and reading email.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assigning VIPs| 00:01 | When we were looking at the main
Mail screen in the previous movies,
| | 00:04 | you might have noticed this VIP mailbox.
| | 00:06 | This is a new feature of iOS 6 Mail
that lets you designate specific people as VIPs,
| | 00:12 | and any message you receive from them
after that will be displayed in the VIP Inbox.
| | 00:16 | This makes it easy for you to quickly
know whether an incoming message
| | 00:20 | is from someone important to you regardless of
which of your email addresses the message is sent to.
| | 00:24 | You can set up VIP as a couple of different ways.
| | 00:27 | You can start from right here on the
main Mailboxes screen, and tap VIP.
| | 00:31 | Since I currently have no VIPs, I can tap Add VIP.
| | 00:34 | That takes me to my Contacts, and here I just
browse through and find the person I want to add.
| | 00:40 | This person is now a VIP.
| | 00:42 | And it doesn't matter how many
email addresses your contact has.
| | 00:45 | Any emails you receive from this person
from now on will appear in the VIP box.
| | 00:49 | So, now if I go back to the main
Mailboxes screen and tap VIP,
| | 00:54 | I'll see all the messages I've received
from this person.
| | 00:57 | Another way to make someone a VIP is
directly from an email you've received.
| | 01:00 | I'll go to my iCloud Inbox.
| | 01:04 | And maybe I want to make sure I don't
miss any newsletters from lynda.com.
| | 01:07 | I'll tap the address at the top of the email,
and here, I'll tap Add to VIP.
| | 01:13 | You might have noticed that a star
appears next to the email address.
| | 01:16 | Now, if I go back to the main
Mailboxes screen and tap VIP,
| | 01:23 | I'll see the messages from both of
the contacts I've added.
| | 01:25 | And when they send me new emails, those
messages will appear in the VIP box too.
| | 01:30 | Now, Mail isn't moving the
messages to a special folder or location.
| | 01:33 | The VIP Mailbox is simply a way of
filtering your messages,
| | 01:37 | so the emails you get from your VIPs
can be accessed from one location.
| | 01:41 | The messages will still show up
in the respective inboxes as well.
| | 01:45 | If you need to manage your
VIPs, tap the blue arrow.
| | 01:48 | Here, you can tap a name to see the
email addresses associated with each person.
| | 01:54 | You can also slide your finger across a
name to reveal the Delete button,
| | 01:57 | which lets you remove a person from your VIP list.
| | 02:01 | You can also tap Add VIP to
add more people to the list.
| | 02:05 | There's also a VIP Alerts button here.
| | 02:08 | That takes you to the Notification Center for VIPs.
| | 02:11 | We looked at Notifications in the first chapter,
but here, you can choose
| | 02:14 | whether you want a message to pop up
when you get an email from a VIP.
| | 02:18 | You can also choose whether you want a special
sound to play when VIP messages appear.
| | 02:22 | You can also specify if a preview
of the message text shows up in the alerts
| | 02:26 | that appear, or, on the screen
when your phone is locked.
| | 02:29 | If you leave these on, you'll be able to
read the first couple of sentences
| | 02:32 | of your message without opening the Mail app.
| | 02:34 | So, that's how you set up VIPs in Mail,
making it easy to quickly identify
| | 02:38 | the messages from the people you care about.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Searching your mailboxes| 00:00 | There will be times when you need to
refer back to a previously received email,
| | 00:04 | but you might not remember which out of
the scores or even hundreds of emails
| | 00:08 | in your inbox the information you need is in.
| | 00:10 | That's when Mail Search bar comes to the rescue.
| | 00:12 | The Search Bar is actually hidden at
the very top of the list of emails in your Inbox,
| | 00:16 | or any other folder of emails
you happen to be looking at.
| | 00:19 | To reveal it, just pull the list down slightly,
or if you're scrolled way down,
| | 00:24 | remember you can tap the top of
your screen to jump back up to the top.
| | 00:28 | Also, if you want to search all of your
inboxes simultaneously,
| | 00:31 | go back to the main Mail page, and tap All Inboxes.
| | 00:37 | To perform your search, tap in
the Search field and begin typing.
| | 00:42 | Notice you can search the From, To,
and Subject fields of your emails,
| | 00:46 | or tap All to search all three fields simultaneously
as well as the content of your emails.
| | 00:51 | Here, you can see that the messages
that match my search are now listed.
| | 00:54 | I can tap any one of them to read them.
| | 00:56 | Now if you use an IMAP or an exchange email account
| | 00:59 | and you didn't find the message you were looking for,
one possibility is that the message is old enough
| | 01:03 | that it's no longer on your phone.
| | 01:06 | For example, I'll go back to the list of
emails, and clear out the Search field.
| | 01:09 | And let's say that I know the word
'Party' appeared at one point
| | 01:11 | in the Subject line of an email I received.
| | 01:13 | So, I'll tap Subject and type 'Party'.
| | 01:18 | Notice we see the option here to continue
the search on the server, which lets your iPhone
| | 01:22 | or iPod connect to your email server,
and search the older messages there.
| | 01:27 | And here, it's found an older email
that has the word 'Party' in the subject.
| | 01:31 | You can actually control how many
messages are stored on your phone
| | 01:34 | and we'll take a look at how to do
that in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:36 | But what I want to get across here is
that if you have an IMAP account,
| | 01:39 | you can still access older emails on your
server from your iPhone, or iPod touch.
| | 01:45 | But if you're using a POP email account, older
messages will no longer be accessible on the server.
| | 01:48 | Most likely, you'll find them on your computer
inside of whichever email program you use there.
| | 01:53 | As I mentioned earlier, if you have
the option to switch to IMAP email,
| | 01:56 | I recommend doing so.
| | 01:58 | One last thing I want to mention about
Search is to remind you that you can also
| | 02:01 | search your email from outside of the Mail app.
| | 02:04 | From your home screen, just flick the screen
to the right to reveal the Spotlight Search area.
| | 02:08 | Spotlight searches your entire device.
| | 02:10 | Here, you can type-in your search term.
| | 02:12 | Maybe I want to look for other
messages from my friend Jade.
| | 02:16 | Notice that the possible matches are not just
emails, but other items begin to appear as well.
| | 02:21 | I see here contact info as well as mail messages.
| | 02:24 | We also have the option to search
the web or search Wikipedia.
| | 02:27 | But if I wanted to read one of her messages,
I just tap it and it opens in Mail.
| | 02:32 | Now, if you find the list of results in
the Spotlight Search too busy
| | 02:35 | with all the different types of search
results you can have, you can go into
| | 02:38 | Settings>General, and Spotlight Search.
| | 02:42 | Here, you can tap to uncheck and check
the kind of items you want to see results for,
| | 02:46 | and you can even drag their handles
up and down in the list to prioritize them.
| | 02:50 | So, those are the ways you can search your email
as well as the rest of your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting mail options| 00:01 | Now, let's take a look at some important
settings you should be aware of
| | 00:03 | for managing your email on
your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:06 | Let's go into Settings>Mail, Contacts, Calendars
and scroll down to the items under the Mail heading.
| | 00:14 | In a previous movie, I mentioned that
you can control to some extent
| | 00:17 | how many messages are stored
in your email inbox on your phone.
| | 00:21 | By tapping Show here, you can choose to save
between 50-1000 of your most recent messages.
| | 00:27 | If you're using IMAP or Exchange Email,
your older messages will still be on
| | 00:30 | your server and accessible from your phone
by scrolling down to the bottom of
| | 00:33 | your email list, and tapping Load More Messages.
| | 00:37 | We can see this if I go back to Mail,
looking one of my inboxes, scroll down.
| | 00:44 | You can see I have a Load More Messages
link and that there are 270 messages total.
| | 00:49 | Tapping that will load the next selection of messages.
| | 00:54 | Now, before we go back to Settings,
note how each of my messages displays
| | 00:58 | two lines of text from the body of the email.
| | 01:01 | This lets you preview the contents
of the email before you open it.
| | 01:04 | Let's go back to Settings.
| | 01:08 | And here, I'll tap Preview.
| | 01:11 | You can choose to preview between
0 and 5 lines of the body of your email.
| | 01:14 | Just be aware that the more lines you preview,
the more space each message will
| | 01:18 | take up in your list, meaning, you might
have to spend more time
| | 01:20 | scrolling to get to older messages.
| | 01:21 | I'll leave that as is.
| | 01:24 | Next, we have the option to turn
the 'To' and 'CC' labels on and off. I'll turn it on.
| | 01:29 | Let's go back to Mail to see the results.
| | 01:34 | Notice that places a little 'To' label
in the Preview area of the email.
| | 01:37 | This is a quick way to see if the email message
is addressed to you, or if you
| | 01:40 | were CCed on the email, you'll see a little CC there.
| | 01:44 | And that can help you prioritize
which emails are the most important.
| | 01:47 | Generally, the ones in which you are in the 'To' field
might be the ones you want to get to first.
| | 01:52 | Let's go back to Settings.
| | 01:55 | Next, we have Ask Before Deleting,
which just determines whether you
| | 01:58 | get a message asking you to confirm do you
want to delete a message when you
| | 02:02 | tap the Trash button in mail.
| | 02:03 | In a previous movie, I showed you how to
get deleted messages back,
| | 02:07 | lso I tend to eave this option off so it doesn't
take two steps to delete a message.
| | 02:10 | Next, we have Load Remote Images.
| | 02:12 | If the emails you receive contain embedded images,
that require mail to load
| | 02:15 | them over the Internet, your setting here
determines whether Mail will do so or not.
| | 02:20 | Some people prefer not to download things
like company logos, and other sorts of
| | 02:24 | images that may appear in the emails you receive.
| | 02:26 | Next, we have Organize By Thread,
and that's on by default.
| | 02:33 | Here's an example of a threaded message.
| | 02:35 | This lets you keep related messages grouped
together when viewing them in mail.
| | 02:39 | That way, you can easily read through
a multiple email conversation even one
| | 02:42 | that occurs over several responses over several days
without having to scroll
| | 02:46 | through your inbox in chronological order.
| | 02:48 | Threaded emails keep all the responses in one thread.
| | 02:52 | You can recognize threaded emails when a number
appears to the right side of the preview area.
| | 03:00 | Next, we have Always Bcc Myself.
| | 03:03 | With this option on, any email you send
will also be invisibly sent to yourself.
| | 03:07 | Some people like this option, so they always
have a copy of any email they send out,
| | 03:10 | but I think that's what the Sent folder is for,
and I prefer not to clutter up my inbox
| | 03:15 | with emails I wrote myself.
| | 03:17 | So I leave this off.
| | 03:18 | Next, we have Increase Quote Level.
| | 03:20 | When you reply to an email, the email you're replying to
is automatically included in your response.
| | 03:24 | So, for example, if I go back to my Inbox,
and I reply to this message,
| | 03:34 | you see the previous email is indented, and
the one prior to that, is indented even further.
| | 03:44 | So, Increase Quote Level just indents
the quoted email, so your recipients
| | 03:48 | can easily see which part of the message is your reply,
and which part is their original message.
| | 03:53 | Next is Signature, which is the text that appears
automatically at the end of any email you send.
| | 04:00 | The default message will be sent from
my iPhone or sent from my iPod touch.
| | 04:04 | Some people like to put their full
names here or their phone number.
| | 04:07 | Just tap in the field to make any edits.
| | 04:11 | Whatever you put here, I suggest keeping
some kind of message to let people know
| | 04:14 | you sent your email from your iPhone or iPod
which could explain why your reply was short,
| | 04:18 | and it also makes the occasional typo
a little more understandable.
| | 04:22 | But basically, anything you type in here
will appear in the email messages you send.
| | 04:26 | New to iOS 6, you can also create individual
signature lines for each email account.
| | 04:31 | Just tap Per Account.
| | 04:32 | So, for instance, you can place your contact info
in your work email address and
| | 04:36 | maybe a goofy or inspirational quote
in your personal email address.
| | 04:40 | Also, you're always free to clear these fields
if you don't want a signature at all,
| | 04:44 | or you can leave the signatures here,
and delete them from any individual emails
| | 04:47 | you write where you don't
want the signature included.
| | 04:52 | So you can see I have 'Sent from my iPhone 5'
here in this message.
| | 05:02 | But I can easily delete that.
| | 05:08 | I'll leave this set to All Accounts.
| | 05:11 | And the last setting here is Default Account.
| | 05:14 | From here, you can choose which of the
multiple email accounts you may have will
| | 05:17 | be the default account you send messages from.
| | 05:20 | Notice my iCloud account is selected.
| | 05:22 | So, if I go back to Mail, you can see in the 'From' field
| | 05:28 | that my lyndadotcom@me.com address
is the one being used.
| | 05:31 | That's my iCloud account.
| | 05:32 | But remember, you can always tap the
'From' field and choose to send the email
| | 05:36 | from any of your other accounts.
| | 05:37 | Let me cancel this.
| | 05:43 | If you're in the inbox of any of your accounts,
tapping the Compose button
| | 05:49 | places the address of the account you're currently in,
in the 'From' field.
| | 05:53 | And speaking of multiple accounts,
if you ever need to deactivate an account,
| | 05:57 | maybe it's the weekend and you don't want
to receive any work emails,
| | 06:00 | go back into Settings, back into the
main Mail, Contacts, and Calendars area,
| | 06:06 | and tap the account you want to temporarily turn off.
| | 06:09 | If it's an IMAP, iCloud, or Exchange account,
slide the Mail switch to off.
| | 06:14 | If it's a POP account, slide the Account switch to off.
| | 06:17 | That hides the account in mail
and your device won't look for anymore new mail
| | 06:20 | from this account until you turn it back on.
| | 06:22 | But all of your currently stored emails
and settings for this account will remain on your device.
| | 06:26 | They will just be inactive until you
turn the account back on.
| | 06:29 | If you really want to completely delete
an account off your phone, maybe you
| | 06:32 | just don't use that address anymore,
scroll down, and tap Delete Account.
| | 06:36 | But be aware that this will erase all messages
and settings pertaining to this account.
| | 06:40 | So, make sure you really do want to delete
the account, and not just make it inactive.
| | 06:44 | So, those are the settings you
should be aware of for using the Mail app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Surfing the WebWeb browsing with Safari| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to look at
using iOS' built-in web browser Safari
| | 00:04 | to surf the web, and we'll see some
other cool tricks you can do while you're
| | 00:08 | surfing around on the Internet.
| | 00:09 | Let's begin with a quick tour around Safari.
| | 00:11 | You launch Safari by tapping its icon.
| | 00:14 | Now, I'm looking at a new blank browser window.
| | 00:17 | If you've previously used Safari,
you'll most likely see the last page
| | 00:20 | you were browsing when you reopen it.
| | 00:21 | Let's start our tour at the top of the screen,
and work our way down.
| | 00:25 | First, we have the address bar.
| | 00:26 | This is where you enter the URL or address
of the website you want to visit.
| | 00:30 | Just tap in the field once, and type in the address
of the website you want to see.
| | 00:34 | For example, maybe I want to visit apple.com.
| | 00:37 | Notice that you have a '.com' button here so you
can just tap it once to add the .com to the address.
| | 00:42 | Now, before we visit apple.com, I'm going to delete
the .com, and show you another cool tip.
| | 00:47 | Hold down on the .com button.
| | 00:48 | And after a second, you get the other options
of .net, .edu, .us, and .org.
| | 00:53 | So, you also don't have to type out those options
if the website you're visiting ends with one of them.
| | 00:59 | Also, if you have international keyboards
activated as we saw how to do earlier,
| | 01:02 | the corresponding domains will also show up.
| | 01:04 | For example, if you have the Chinese keyboard set up,
you'll see .hk, .tw, and so on.
| | 01:09 | But I want to go to apple.com,
so I'll leave it as is and tap Go.
| | 01:15 | So now, I'm looking at apple.com on my iPhone,
and I'm seeing it exactly as it
| | 01:19 | looks on a browser on a computer.
| | 01:20 | Notice how quickly it loaded too.
| | 01:22 | When you're on a Wi-Fi network, web pages
will load just about as fast on your
| | 01:25 | iPhone or iPod touch as they do on your computer.
| | 01:28 | If you're on an iPhone and you're connected
to your cellular provider's network,
| | 01:31 | your speed is going to depend on
which network type you're connected to.
| | 01:34 | The older 3G networks will tend to
load pages very slowly, while LTE networks
| | 01:38 | may provide faster service
than even some home Wi-Fi services. All right.
| | 01:42 | So, that's the address bar where you type in
the address of the web pages you want to visit.
| | 01:46 | The other thing I want to mention
about the address bar right now is that
| | 01:50 | this is also where you find the button to
reload or refresh the page which is
| | 01:52 | the circular arrow to the right of the field.
| | 01:54 | If you need to reload the page, maybe
you want to see if it's been updated since
| | 01:57 | you last loaded it, just tap the Reload button.
| | 01:59 | Notice while the page is loading, the Reload button
turns into an X which is the Stop button.
| | 02:04 | You can tap the Stop button
to stop the page from loading.
| | 02:06 | Lastly, when you tap into the Address bar
to type in a new address,
| | 02:10 | notice we have an X in a circle here.
| | 02:13 | That's the button to clear the entire address field,
so you have an empty field
| | 02:16 | to type in, without having to
hold down the Delete button.
| | 02:19 | But I do want to stay on this page
for the moment, so I'll tap Cancel.
| | 02:23 | All right. So, that's the Address bar.
| | 02:24 | To the right of that is the Search bar.
| | 02:26 | By default, Safari uses Google
as its built-in search engine.
| | 02:29 | So, any term, or phrase you type into
the Search field will be submitted through Google.
| | 02:33 | Let's tap in the Search field,
and let's search for me, Garrick Chow.
| | 02:40 | And I'll tap Search.
| | 02:43 | Now, notice in the address bar that we're
looking at the search results at Google.com.
| | 02:47 | Google is one of the many websites
that recognizes when you're visiting your site
| | 02:50 | on an iPhone or iPod touch,
and then presents you with the page
| | 02:53 | formatted to look good on your device.
| | 02:55 | Notice I don't have to scroll
left or right to view my results.
| | 02:58 | I just scroll up and down.
| | 03:00 | I can see here that lynda.com shows up
as one of my top results.
| | 03:04 | To visit any link on a web page, just tap it.
| | 03:07 | Now, we're looking at my page on lynda.com.
| | 03:10 | Let's go to the homepage.
| | 03:13 | lynda.com has been optimized to detect
mobile browsers, so it defaults
| | 03:16 | to our mobile site on the iPhone.
| | 03:18 | Also, like many sites with mobile versions,
we offer you the ability to switch to the full site.
| | 03:26 | Now, it's not very easy to read the page
at this size, most web pages are
| | 03:29 | designed to be viewed on computer monitors,
which are wider than they are tall,
| | 03:33 | and we're currently browsing
on the iPhone in Portrait orientation.
| | 03:36 | You might find it easier to flip the phone
to Landscape to view the web page.
| | 03:41 | That makes things a little easier to read.
| | 03:42 | The only thing about Landscape mode
is you might find it more difficult
| | 03:46 | to comfortably hold the phone, or iPod touch
in Landscape than in Portrait.
| | 03:49 | Let's flip it back to Portrait, and I'll show you
a few other ways to make web pages easier to read.
| | 03:54 | Now, as you might expect, you can use
the pinching out method to zoom in on a web page,
| | 03:58 | and then drag around to look
at different portions of the site this way.
| | 04:02 | Maybe here I want to look at the blog.
| | 04:05 | Having the page larger makes it much
easier to click on a link.
| | 04:09 | In this case, the blog opens
in a new browser window,
| | 04:12 | and I'll talk about that in just a moment.
| | 04:13 | So, the text in the main portion of the blog
here on the left side of the screen
| | 04:18 | is really tiny right now because Safari
loads pages so you can see their entire width.
| | 04:22 | Now, as we just saw, we can pinch out to zoom in.
| | 04:25 | But a much easier and quicker method is to simply
double-tap the column of text you want to read.
| | 04:30 | So then, back to its original size here,
and I double tap, it's resized and
| | 04:34 | repositioned to perfectly fit on my screen.
| | 04:35 | And I think you'd agree that the text
is much easier to read at this size.
| | 04:40 | Double-tapping the text again zooms
back out to the Full Page Width View.
| | 04:43 | Now, there's another thing about double-tapping
web pages that I want to mention.
| | 04:46 | When you're zoomed in, double-tapping
near the top or bottom of the screen
| | 04:51 | will scroll the page up or down.
| | 04:53 | The closer you tap to the top or bottom, the
more the page will scroll, which is pretty cool.
| | 04:58 | But if you double-tap too close to do the center,
the page will just zoom out.
| | 05:02 | So, it does take some practice to figure out
exactly where to double-tap to scroll,
| | 05:05 | and where to double-tap to zoom in and out.
| | 05:07 | Also, as we've seen in other applications,
tapping once at the top of the Safari screen
| | 05:11 | will immediately scroll you
all the way back to the top of the page.
| | 05:14 | All right. Let's look at the buttons
across the bottom of the screen.
| | 05:16 | Currently, the first two buttons
on the bottom-left are grayed out.
| | 05:19 | Those are the Back and Forward buttons.
| | 05:22 | I'll just click the title of this first blog post
to go to that entry.
| | 05:25 | I can see now that activates the Back button.
| | 05:27 | This works just like the Back button
on any other web browser.
| | 05:30 | Tap it once to go to the previous page.
| | 05:32 | Once you've done that,
the Forward button becomes available.
| | 05:36 | Tap it to go to the page you were just on.
| | 05:39 | The center button is the Share button,
and we've seen this in action before.
| | 05:42 | It gives you several options
for sharing, printing, copying, or saving
| | 05:45 | the content of the page you're on.
| | 05:47 | We'll come back to this a little later.
| | 05:49 | The Next button is for adding bookmarks,
and viewing your history which are
| | 05:52 | a pretty robust set of features, so we'll look
at them in their own upcoming movie.
| | 05:56 | And the final button on the lower-right
corner of the screen is the Pages button.
| | 05:59 | Sometimes you want to visit another website
or a web page without losing the page
| | 06:02 | you're currently viewing.
| | 06:04 | Just tap the Pages button,
and here you can tap New Page
| | 06:08 | to generate and open a new blank browser page.
| | 06:10 | I'll tap in the address field,
and let's visit apple.com again.
| | 06:16 | Notice the Pages icon now has a little 3 in it
indicating that I have three Safari windows open.
| | 06:21 | Another scenario in which you might want
to open a new window is if you want to
| | 06:24 | follow a link on a web page, but again,
without closing the current web page.
| | 06:28 | For example, maybe here on Apple's page, I want
to tap the iPhone image to read more about the iPhone.
| | 06:33 | But I also want to leave the Apple homepage open.
| | 06:35 | All I have to do is hold down on the link,
and after a second, some buttons appear.
| | 06:40 | Select Open in New Page.
| | 06:43 | And as you can see, that generates a new page
and loads the Links page,
| | 06:47 | and you can see the Pages button now
indicates that I have 4 pages open.
| | 06:50 | I can switch back and forth between my
open web pages by tapping the Pages button,
| | 06:53 | flicking to the one I want,
and then tapping it to view it.
| | 06:59 | You can have up to 8 pages open at once.
| | 07:02 | If you've reached your 8 page limit,
or if you just want to close a page you
| | 07:05 | no longer want open, tap the Pages button,
and tap the X button to close the page.
| | 07:11 | Even if you only have one page open, you can still
tap the Pages button and tap the X to close it,
| | 07:16 | leaving you with just a single blank browser page.
| | 07:20 | Okay. So, that's the basics of loading
and browsing web pages in Safari.
| | 07:23 | In the rest of this chapter,
we'll look at other things you can do
| | 07:25 | while using Safari to surf the web.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving bookmarks and viewing the History list| 00:00 | As with all other web browsers you can
save your favorite or frequently visited
| | 00:04 | web page in Safari as bookmarks,
which lets you load those pages with a single tap
| | 00:08 | rather than having to manually
type in their addresses each time.
| | 00:11 | To create a bookmark first browse
to the page you want to bookmark.
| | 00:14 | In this case I'm on the lynda.com homepage then
tap the share button at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:20 | From here tap Bookmark.
| | 00:23 | That opens the Add Bookmark screen.
| | 00:26 | This first field is for giving your bookmark a name.
| | 00:28 | The text Safari has placed in
here is the title of the web page,
| | 00:31 | but in this case it's probably a little too verbose.
| | 00:34 | So I'll tap the X button to clear this field
and then I'll type lynda.com homepage.
| | 00:40 | Below the name is the actual address
of the page you're bookmarking.
| | 00:43 | This can't be edited here.
| | 00:44 | It's just here for you to confirm
that this is the page you want to save.
| | 00:48 | Below that is where you can decide
which folder to save this bookmark in.
| | 00:51 | I'll show you how to create folders in
a moment, but for now I'm just going
| | 00:53 | to save this bookmark in the main
Bookmarks folder on my iPhone.
| | 00:56 | I'll tap Save and that's
all there is to saving a bookmark.
| | 01:00 | To access your bookmarks tap the Bookmark icon.
| | 01:03 | Here you'll find all the bookmarks
you have created as well as any folders
| | 01:06 | you synced from Safari on your computer
and your reading list which we'll get to later.
| | 01:11 | At the bottom of this list you'll also find
a small selection of bookmarks
| | 01:13 | that are included by default in Safari like
Apple, Yahoo!, Bing, and Google
| | 01:17 | as well as bookmarks to the mobile
versions of Apple's iPhone user guide.
| | 01:21 | To load any bookmark page just tap it.
| | 01:23 | Here's the one I created.
| | 01:25 | You can see it reloads lynda.com.
| | 01:28 | So again to bookmark a page just visit the page,
tap the share button, add the bookmark
| | 01:36 | and rename the bookmark if necessary,
but I'll leave it as is and tap Save.
| | 01:41 | Now as your bookmarks list
begins to grow you might want
| | 01:45 | to do some housekeeping now and then.
| | 01:46 | Just tap the Bookmarks button and then tap Edit.
| | 01:50 | Now you're free to rearrange the order of the
bookmarks in your list that you have created
| | 01:53 | by dragging the handle next
to any one of them up or down.
| | 01:56 | Notice you can't drag around
the default bookmarks at all.
| | 01:59 | So I can't drag lynda.com
homepage down below those.
| | 02:02 | But if you do want to delete
any of those bookmarks just tap the red
| | 02:05 | delete symbol and then tap Delete.
| | 02:07 | This is also where you can create
new folders to organize your bookmarks.
| | 02:11 | Just tap New Folder.
| | 02:12 | Maybe I want to create a folder
called Reference to store web pages
| | 02:16 | I use to look up information.
| | 02:17 | Now if I wanted to I can put
this folder inside another folder.
| | 02:20 | You can click Bookmarks to navigate to another
folder I may have previously created,
| | 02:24 | but I want this to be in the main Bookmarks list.
| | 02:27 | So I'll tap Done and now I have a
Reference folder at the top of my list.
| | 02:31 | You can also tap any bookmark to
rename it or move it to another folder.
| | 02:35 | So there's probably no need to
have to say lynda.com homepage.
| | 02:38 | Let's just make it lynda.com and now
I'll tap Bookmarks to view my folders
| | 02:44 | and I'll place this bookmark
in the Reference folder.
| | 02:48 | I'll tap Done and Done again
and if I look inside Reference
| | 02:54 | I'll find my lynda.com bookmark.
| | 02:55 | Let's go back to the main Bookmarks list.
| | 02:58 | Now the other folder you'll find in here
by default is History
| | 03:02 | and like the history list you'll find in all other
web browsers this gives you a list
| | 03:05 | of all the pages you've recently visited.
| | 03:08 | The top of the list shows you the pages
you visited today and as you scroll down
| | 03:11 | you'll find folders that have been
generated containing links
| | 03:14 | to the pages you visited earlier.
| | 03:16 | This is really convenient to have when
you want or need to return to a page
| | 03:19 | you visited earlier,
but can't remember the address.
| | 03:22 | Just open Bookmarks and
browse to your History list.
| | 03:24 | Of course, there are maybe reasons you
might not want Safari to store
| | 03:27 | a list of the pages you visited.
| | 03:28 | I'll leave those reasons to your imagination,
but you can erase your history list by tapping Clear.
| | 03:33 | Notice you have no options
to clear just a single entry.
| | 03:36 | If you tap Clear History
it'll erase every item in your History list
| | 03:41 | as well as your Google search history.
| | 03:42 | Let's cancel that for a moment.
| | 03:44 | Now what I mean by your Google search history
is that Safari also remembers your
| | 03:48 | most recently searched terms.
| | 03:49 | So if I closed bookmarks by tapping Done
and then tapping the Search field,
| | 03:55 | you can see my name right under the search
field because I recently searched for my own name.
| | 03:59 | So clearing your history also clears
out these Google searches which again
| | 04:02 | may be a good or a bad thing.
| | 04:04 | Now before we wrap this movie up let me
show you one more way to clear your history.
| | 04:08 | I am going to press the Home button to close Safari
and now I'm going to go into Settings
| | 04:13 | and if I scroll down I'll find Safari settings
and here we'll find the option to clear history as well.
| | 04:20 | This is identical to clearing your history in Safari,
but what you'll also find here
| | 04:24 | is the button to clear cookies and data.
| | 04:27 | Cookies are small pieces of data
websites store in your browsers,
| | 04:31 | usually to personalize your experience.
| | 04:32 | That's all sites like Amazon.com can
display your name at the top of their page
| | 04:36 | when you visit them.
| | 04:37 | If you have an account with the Amazon
they placed a cookie in your browser
| | 04:41 | so the website knows it's you
when you visit the next time.
| | 04:44 | Clearing cookies stops that from happening.
| | 04:46 | Web browsers also have something
called a cache and a cache is saved data
| | 04:50 | from websites that includes things
like buttons, banners, and other images
| | 04:53 | that are stored on your device so they
don't have to be downloaded
| | 04:56 | each time you visit the site.
| | 04:58 | If you find that a site is behaving or
looking strange you can come in here
| | 05:01 | and try tapping Clear Cookies and Data
to remove the stored data from Safari
| | 05:05 | so it has to download fresh data from the
website which should clear up your problems.
| | 05:09 | So there's your lesson on bookmarks,
history, and clearing your Safari history
| | 05:13 | as well as cookies and data.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving images| 00:00 | Occasionally, you may come across an
image on a web page that you'd like to save
| | 00:04 | on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:06 | For example, I'm looking at the Science page
of the New York Times website
| | 00:09 | and maybe I want to have a copy
of this photo on my iPhone.
| | 00:13 | To do so I just hold down on it and
after a second several options appear.
| | 00:18 | Now because this image is also a link,
meaning that tapping it will take me
| | 00:22 | to the article it's from, I see the options
to open, meaning if I want to follow
| | 00:25 | this link to the page that it's linked to,
I can tap open or open it in a new page,
| | 00:30 | which again follows the link,
but opens a new browser window.
| | 00:33 | If the image you held down on isn't a link,
you won't see these first options.
| | 00:37 | But the one I'm interested in
here is Save Image. I'll tap that.
| | 00:41 | What happens is that a copy of the image has now
been saved to my photo library on my phone.
| | 00:46 | I'll press the Home button to close Safari
and open my photo library
| | 00:51 | and here in my camera roll I find the image.
| | 00:53 | It really doesn't get much easier than that.
| | 00:55 | Now let's just go back to Safari
| | 01:00 | and I'll hold down on the image again.
This time I'll select copy.
| | 01:05 | Copy is useful if you want to place the image
into another app or maybe send it in an email.
| | 01:10 | For example, I'll open mail and
then I'll create a new message.
| | 01:17 | Now I'll double-tap in the body
of the message and select Paste.
| | 01:22 | Notice what happened here.
| | 01:24 | The web address of the page the image
was linking to got pasted into my message
| | 01:28 | and that's not what I wanted.
| | 01:30 | I wanted to put a copy of the image here.
| | 01:32 | But since that image is also a link on the
web page I can't do it by copying and pasting.
| | 01:37 | Let's delete that.
| | 01:39 | Instead I'll tap in this blank area
of my email message
| | 01:44 | and I'll tap the triangle to the right of this pop-up
and choose Insert Photo or Video.
| | 01:49 | Now I can browse through my library
and select that photo.
| | 01:52 | Now it's added to my email message.
| | 01:56 | But if the photo on a web page is not a link,
copy works the way you might expect.
| | 02:01 | Let's cancel this message and go back to Safari.
| | 02:06 | Here I'll follow the link to the article
it's linking to by tapping the photo
| | 02:12 | so the photo on this page is not a link.
| | 02:14 | Notice when I hold down on it I only get
the options to save the image or copy it.
| | 02:19 | Let's choose copy.
| | 02:21 | Now I'll go back to mail,
compose a new message,
| | 02:27 | and then I'll press-and-hold in the body of the message,
| | 02:33 | and choose Paste and the image itself now gets pasted in.
| | 02:34 | That's how to save images you come across in Safari
and some of the options and workarounds
| | 02:38 | you have for mailing or sharing the images
with someone else.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Filling out forms and using AutoFill| 00:00 | Because browsing on your iPhone or iPod touch
is so similar an experience
| | 00:04 | to browsing on your computer,
you'll probably find yourself visiting
| | 00:07 | and using all the sites you normally visit
on your desktop computer
| | 00:10 | such as your banking website or online stores.
| | 00:12 | When it comes to ordering items or
managing various bank or credit card accounts
| | 00:17 | you often have to fill in various form fields,
which frankly can get a little tedious
| | 00:20 | and time-consuming on the iPhone keyboard.
| | 00:23 | Fortunately, like its full-fledged counterpart
on your computer,
| | 00:25 | Safari for the iPhone and iPod touch includes an
autofill feature,
| | 00:29 | which fills in your name, address and passwords
automatically when you type in the form fields.
| | 00:35 | To activate the autofill feature go
to Settings>Safari, then tap AutoFill.
| | 00:43 | Here you have two options to turn On or Off.
| | 00:46 | The first is Use Contact Info.
| | 00:48 | By tapping it on you're telling Safari
to use the contact information
| | 00:52 | for yourself in your list of contacts.
| | 00:53 | Make sure it's your name that
appears in the My Info area.
| | 00:56 | If it doesn't tap My Info,
which opens up your contact list.
| | 01:01 | Then find your personal info and tap it.
| | 01:04 | I'm just going to cancel since it is using my info.
As long as you leave Use Contact Info on,
| | 01:08 | anytime you tap into a field
where you have to enter your name,
| | 01:11 | address, phone number, and so on
you'll be able to tap an Autofill button,
| | 01:16 | which will fill out the form
with the info from your contact.
| | 01:18 | We'll see this in action in a moment.
| | 01:20 | The second option here is names and passwords.
| | 01:22 | With this option on Safari will offer to remember
names and passwords you enter on websites.
| | 01:26 | So you won't have to type them
in manually again in the future.
| | 01:29 | So let's leave both of these options
On for now and press the Home button
| | 01:32 | to close settings and let's go into Safari.
| | 01:35 | Here I have a form at lynda.com
for signing up for a promotional pass
| | 01:38 | to the online training library.
| | 01:40 | As you can see there are several fields to fill out here.
| | 01:43 | I'll tap in the first Name field and notice
in addition to the keyboard appearing
| | 01:47 | above it I have some buttons that include AutoFill.
| | 01:49 | I'll tap AutoFill and just like that
most of the information has been completed.
| | 01:55 | Conveniently, the fields that Safari
fills out for you are highlighted in yellow.
| | 01:58 | So you can make sure your information
went into the correct fields.
| | 02:01 | If you need to change anything just tap
into the field you need to edit
| | 02:05 | and make the necessary changes.
| | 02:06 | You can also use the previous and next
buttons to jump from field to field
| | 02:10 | so you don't have to constantly tap
the field before you type into them.
| | 02:12 | So again this information is pulled
from your contact information
| | 02:16 | so only the info you have in contacts
can be used to autofill a form.
| | 02:19 | Now let's look at the names
and passwords feature in action.
| | 02:23 | Let's tap Done here.
| | 02:25 | I have the Yahoo! homepage open here
and I want to check my Yahoo! email.
| | 02:29 | So I'll tap Mail and here I need to
enter my username and password
| | 02:34 | to access my account and I'll tap Sign In.
| | 02:41 | Now I'm asked by Safari if I
want to store this information.
| | 02:44 | You can tap Yes to accept;
or Never for this Website,
| | 02:47 | which will set it so Safari will never bug you
to remember this password again;
| | 02:51 | or Not Now, if you don't want to save
the username and password at this time,
| | 02:54 | but want the option to do so in the future.
I'll select Yes.
| | 02:58 | If you do have Safari save your passwords
you should be cautious about which sites you allow.
| | 03:03 | If your iPhone or iPod touch is lost or stolen,
you probably don't want anyone
| | 03:06 | being able to access your
bank account info automatically.
| | 03:09 | Also, be sure to check out the movies
and the chapter on keeping your device safe,
| | 03:12 | especially the movie on passcode
protecting your phone
| | 03:15 | if you intend on storing the passwords
to sensitive sites on your device.
| | 03:18 | But for non-sensitive sites, storing your log in
information can be a major convenience
| | 03:21 | and save you the time of having to type in
your log in info manually each time.
| | 03:24 | For example, I'll sign out of my account.
| | 03:29 | The next time I want to check my email,
you'll notice that my ID and password
| | 03:33 | are already filled in here.
| | 03:34 | Even if they weren't I can just tap AutoFill
to automatically enter the info and
| | 03:41 | sign in very easily and quickly.
| | 03:45 | Now if you ever change your mind about
which items you want Safari remembering,
| | 03:48 | return to the AutoFill settings where
you can turn one or both options off.
| | 03:54 | This is also where you can tap Clear All,
which will cause Safari to forget
| | 03:57 | all the names and passwords you
previously had it remember.
| | 04:00 | That's how you use the AutoFill feature
of Safari in iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating web clips| 00:00 | In a previous movie we looked at how to bookmark
the web pages you visit most frequently,
| | 00:04 | which is a convenient way to visit those pages
without having to type in their full addresses
| | 00:08 | each time you want to view them,
but that still requires opening Safari,
| | 00:11 | opening your bookmarks list
and tapping the bookmark
| | 00:14 | and come on that's three separate steps.
| | 00:16 | There are might be certain web pages you
visit every hour or every couple minutes.
| | 00:20 | If that's the case you're a prime
candidate to use the web Clips feature.
| | 00:23 | web Clips let you place a custom icon
representing your favorite web page
| | 00:27 | right onto your home screen,
or one of your other screens if you choose,
| | 00:30 | that take you right to the page when tapped.
| | 00:32 | Currently, I'm on the lynda.com blog page
and I want to make this into a web clip.
| | 00:36 | Now one very cool thing about web clips
is that you can set the zoom level
| | 00:40 | for the part of the page you
want to make into the clip.
| | 00:42 | You can have the page completely zoomed
out like I have here
| | 00:45 | and when I create my web clip this is what I'll see.
| | 00:47 | But maybe the part of the site you're interested in
is only one particular portion of the page.
| | 00:51 | Maybe it's your local sports team stats
displayed in the corner of the page
| | 00:55 | or maybe it's the weekend
weather on some other page.
| | 00:57 | In this example I want to make sure I'm
zoomed into the column of blog text on the left.
| | 01:03 | That way I won't have to zoom
in each time I open the blog.
| | 01:06 | I'm going to position this so the title of the
first article is flashed to the top of the screen.
| | 01:11 | So that's how I'd like the page should
be displayed when I tap the web Clip icon.
| | 01:15 | Now I'll tap the Share button
and here I'll tap Add to Home Screen.
| | 01:21 | On the screen give your
web Clip a short concise title.
| | 01:24 | I'll just call this lynda blog.
| | 01:26 | Notice we also see a preview of what
the icon we're creating will look like.
| | 01:29 | Now this might not be the most
appropriate image to be your icon,
| | 01:32 | but unfortunately there's no way to change it.
| | 01:34 | The image is based on the appearance
of the screen when you tapped
| | 01:36 | the Add to Home screen button.
| | 01:38 | So now I'll tap Add
and just like that
| | 01:42 | the icon is added to the first
available space on my screen.
| | 01:46 | When I tap it I'm taken to the zoomed
in view of the page we were looking at.
| | 01:50 | So this is pretty much the fastest way
to open the web page
| | 01:53 | or a portion of a web page
that you visit frequently.
| | 01:56 | If you ever want to get rid of the
web Clip just hold down on its icon,
| | 01:58 | or any other apps icon for that matter,
| | 02:02 | and again that enters you
into the Organization mode.
| | 02:05 | Then just tap the X icon and
confirm you want to delete it.
| | 02:13 | There's no way to edit a web clip.
| | 02:14 | So if the page you created
the clip for changes its layout
| | 02:17 | or if you want to save a clip
for a different portion of the page
| | 02:19 | you'll have to delete your current clip
and create a new one from scratch.
| | 02:23 | But as you just saw that's very easy to do.
| | 02:25 | So there you have the web Clip feature,
a speedy way to load your favorite web pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Reader and the Reading List| 00:00 | Safari in iOS 6 comes with two features
that can make reading web pages
| | 00:04 | easier and more convenient.
| | 00:06 | When you come across text heavy pages
sometimes it's difficult to read
| | 00:10 | the text without having to pinch out to
zoom in and when you get the text
| | 00:13 | to a legible size you then have to drag the page
back and forth to be able to read everything.
| | 00:17 | But Safari is able to detect large
chunks of text on most web pages
| | 00:21 | and when it does you'll see this button
labeled Reader in the address bar.
| | 00:25 | Tapping it brings up a version of the
web page with just the text and images
| | 00:28 | ignoring the layout of the page itself
and any other distraction
| | 00:31 | such as ads and interface elements.
| | 00:34 | So as you can see here I now see the
title of the article, the text,
| | 00:37 | and then the images that were in the article,
and overall I can read the text
| | 00:40 | of the page much more easily this way.
| | 00:42 | You'll also find this font size button
in the upper left-hand corner,
| | 00:45 | which you can use to make
the text larger or smaller.
| | 00:51 | Reader also recognizes when an article spans
multiple web pages and automatically
| | 00:54 | loads the text from subsequent pages here.
| | 00:56 | So you don't have to click
links to read the entire article.
| | 00:59 | Whenever you see that Reader button
you can tap it to have a more legible
| | 01:02 | version of the page you're viewing.
| | 01:04 | Tap Done to return to the original page.
| | 01:06 | The other feature of Safari introduced
in iOS 5 is called Reading List,
| | 01:10 | which lets you save web pages to read later.
| | 01:12 | To use it just load the page you want
to save to your Reading List,
| | 01:14 | tap the button here at the bottom of the screen,
and tap add to Reading List.
| | 01:20 | Another way to add a page to your Reading List
is to hold down on a link to a page
| | 01:25 | for example this link to another article here,
| | 01:28 | which will give you the option
to add to your Reading List.
| | 01:31 | You may also notice that the Bookmarks
button briefly changes
| | 01:34 | to the reading glass icon with a little
progress bar underneath.
| | 01:38 | That just tells you Safari is
saving your page to the Reading List.
| | 01:41 | You can access pages you've added to your
Reading List by tapping the Bookmarks button
| | 01:44 | and selecting your Reading List.
| | 01:47 | This list can be filtered to show
all the Reading List items
| | 01:49 | or just the nes you haven't read.
| | 01:51 | I haven't read either of these articles
yet so they both appear in both lists.
| | 01:55 | Not just that, but your Reading List also syncs
with your iCloud account, if you have one.
| | 01:59 | So web pages you saved to your Reading
List on your device will automatically appear
| | 02:02 | in Safari on your computer so
you can continue reading them there.
| | 02:06 | But what I think is the best feature
of the Reading List is that
| | 02:08 | it saved the pages so you can read them offline.
| | 02:11 | Meaning, you can come back and view
the pages you've added your Reading List
| | 02:14 | without an Internet connection.
| | 02:15 | For example, if you're about to hop on a plane
and will be without an Internet connection
| | 02:20 | for several hours, you could visit a web page,
add it to your Reading List
| | 02:23 | and then read the page during your flight.
| | 02:25 | Of course, any links on the page
will be unusable without an Internet connection,
| | 02:28 | but you'll be able to read any of
the pages you saved to your
| | 02:30 | Reading List in their entirety.
| | 02:32 | So here you have the Reader and Reading List
features of Safari here in iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a personal hotspot| 00:01 | Surfing the web from your iPhone is great,
but without question sometimes
| | 00:04 | you just need to use your regular
computer to access the Internet.
| | 00:07 | Maybe you have a file you need
to email from your computer.
| | 00:10 | Maybe you need to write a long email
and you want to use a real keyboard.
| | 00:13 | Of course, you won't always be able to
find Internet access for your computer,
| | 00:16 | especially when you're on the road.
| | 00:18 | If you need to be connected and online
in a moment's notice, or just want
| | 00:20 | the same convenience of being able to
get online as your iPhone can
| | 00:24 | over your cellular provider's data network,
then you might want to look into
| | 00:27 | the iPhone's Personal Hotspot capability.
| | 00:30 | In a nutshell, creating a Personal Hotspot
with your iPhone
| | 00:33 | means you're sharing your phone's Internet
connection with your computer.
| | 00:36 | This is also referred to as tethering.
And obviously this is an iPhone only
| | 00:40 | feature since the iPod touch does
not connect to cellular networks.
| | 00:44 | Once tethering is enabled you can
share your iPhone's Internet connection
| | 00:47 | via USB, Bluetooth, or over Wi-Fi.
| | 00:49 | Let's take a look at how to
enable the personal hotspot.
| | 00:53 | Now on all US carriers the Personal Hotspot
feature is going to be an additional cost.
| | 00:57 | So you have to contact your service
provider to get the service turned on.
| | 01:01 | Also be aware that data transferred
over your phone to your computer
| | 01:04 | counts against whichever monthly
data plan you've chosen.
| | 01:06 | So you probably don't want to start
transferring tons of files
| | 01:09 | or streaming lots of movies over your
computer through your iPhone.
| | 01:12 | In some countries tethering is built into
the calling plan and you won't need to turn on
| | 01:17 | the service or pay anything extra.
| | 01:19 | If you're not sure if you have
tethering or not contact your provider,
| | 01:22 | but here in the US we have to tell our
service providers to turn on the service
| | 01:25 | and add it to our bill.
| | 01:28 | You can go to Settings>General>Cellular.
| | 01:34 | And if you haven't enabled the Personal
Hotspot you'll see a button here
| | 01:36 | to set up your personal hotspot.
| | 01:38 | And you can tap it to either call your
provider or to go directly to their website.
| | 01:42 | Once it's turned on, like it is on my phone,
I can go to the main Settings page
| | 01:48 | and here I'll find Personal Hotspot, and what
you'll find here is a simple on off switch.
| | 01:53 | Just tap the switch to turn on tethering.
| | 01:57 | Now if you currently don't have
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi turned on
| | 02:00 | you'll see this message asking
if you want to turn Bluetooth on
| | 02:02 | or if you just want to use Wi-Fi and USB tethering.
| | 02:05 | I'll tap turn on Bluetooth,
And that's all there is to enabling tethering.
| | 02:11 | Now although you could connect your
phone to your computer via Bluetooth
| | 02:14 | or through the USB cable as we see here,
Wi-Fi is definitely the easiest method
| | 02:18 | because it doesn't involve any cables
at all and you don't have
| | 02:20 | to pair your phone with your computer
as you have to do with Bluetooth.
| | 02:24 | Also, over Wi-Fi you can connect up to
five computers to share
| | 02:27 | your phone's Internet connection.
| | 02:29 | You're even provided with a random Wi-Fi password.
| | 02:32 | If you want to change the password, you can tap it
and enter a password of your own,
| | 02:36 | but I'll leave this default random password.
| | 02:40 | All I have to do now is find my iPhone's
Wi-Fi network on my computer
| | 02:44 | and then enter the password to connect.
| | 02:46 | So here on my computer I'll search
for my wireless network
| | 02:51 | and here I see Garrick's iPhone,
which is my Wi-Fi network
| | 02:55 | and here I'll enter the password to connect.
| | 03:01 | Now I'm connected to the Internet
through my iPhone cellular connection.
| | 03:04 | That's all there is to it.
| | 03:07 | In a few seconds you should see a blue
bar appear at the top
| | 03:10 | of your iPhone's screen indicating
the tethering is in action.
| | 03:13 | This blue bar will be here as long
as your computer is tethered to your phone,
| | 03:16 | but you can continue to use your phone
as always by taking calls,
| | 03:19 | playing games or checking email.
| | 03:23 | Back on your computer you can now surf
the Internet, check your email
| | 03:27 | and do any other web related activities you need to.
| | 03:30 | Of course, since you're connected
through your iPhone's network
| | 03:32 | you'll be getting approximately the
same speeds as your phone does.
| | 03:35 | So don't expect blazing fast Internet speeds
unless your phone is connected to an LTE network.
| | 03:40 | Still it's pretty cool to be able to get
online wirelessly through your phone like this.
| | 03:45 | When you're done surfing you can tap
the blue bar at the top of your screen
| | 03:49 | to go back to the Personal Hotspot settings
and turn Personal Hotspot Off again.
| | 03:56 | So that's how to tether your iPhone
to your computer through Wi-Fi.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using iCloud tabs| 00:00 | With the release of iOS 6, Apple
introduced the new feature called iCloud tabs
| | 00:05 | that allows you to sync the open tabs
in Safari with your other iOS devices
| | 00:09 | and with any Macs running OS X
Mountain Lion with Safari.
| | 00:11 | For example, let's say you were
reading an article on a magazine website
| | 00:14 | in Safari on your Mac at home,
but before you finish reading it
| | 00:17 | you have to leave to catch a train.
| | 00:19 | As long as you leave your Safari window
open on your Mac you can open Safari
| | 00:23 | on your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch on the
train as long as you have an Internet connection
| | 00:26 | and have instant access to the pages
that are open on your computer
| | 00:29 | and pick up where you left off.
| | 00:31 | So let's take a look at how to set this up.
| | 00:33 | Now you can also sync between iOS
devices only like in iPad and in iPhone,
| | 00:37 | but if you want to sync with the desktop
version of Safari it has to be
| | 00:40 | on a Mac running OS X Mountain Lion.
| | 00:42 | This feature is currently unavailable to Windows users.
| | 00:45 | So here on my Mac I'm going to go to
System Preferences and I'll select the iCloud.
| | 00:51 | All you need to do here is check Safari.
| | 00:54 | That gives me a message letting me know
that the information on my Mac
| | 00:56 | will be uploaded to iCloud and merged
with the bookmark stored in Safari.
| | 01:00 | If you're okay with that, click Merge.
| | 01:03 | And that's all the setup
you need to do on the Mac.
| | 01:04 | Now before we switch over to the iPhone,
notice I have two tabs open in Safari on my Mac,
| | 01:09 | I have the lynda.com blog page
and I have Apple's iPhone features page.
| | 01:15 | Okay so on my iPhone I go to
Settings>iCloud and here I just flipped
| | 01:22 | the Safari switch to on.
| | 01:25 | Also here on my iPhone I get the
message telling me my Safari data
| | 01:28 | will be merged with iCloud. I'll tap Merge.
| | 01:32 | And now if I open Safari and I go to my
bookmarks, notice there's an iCloud tabs folder.
| | 01:39 | Selecting it shows me all the pages
that are open on any of my devices
| | 01:42 | that are using iCloud tabs on the same Apple ID.
| | 01:45 | So in this case I see both my Mac and my iPad
on which I had previously turned on iCloud tabs.
| | 01:50 | So all I need to do is tap one of these items.
| | 01:54 | And it opens up here in Safari and
these tabs will all stay constantly in sync.
| | 01:58 | So for example, if I browse to another
page on lynda.com
| | 02:04 | and then I go back to Safari on my Mac
and click the iCloud button,
| | 02:08 | I'll see the list of my devices here as well
and here's the page I just opened on my iPhone.
| | 02:12 | So this is a really easy way to keep
your browsing synced across your devices.
| | 02:16 | Now if for some reason you don't want a
page you're viewing on your Mac to show
| | 02:19 | up on your iOS devices, you can either
turn iCloud tabs off in System Preferences
| | 02:24 | or temporarily enable private
browsing by going to Safari>Private browsing.
| | 02:30 | Click OK and with that turned on,
any pages or tabs you open will stay
| | 02:34 | on your Mac only and won't
get synced to your devices.
| | 02:37 | Now if you decide to turn iCloud tabs off
on your iPhone or other iOS devices,
| | 02:41 | again by going to Settings>iCloud
and here I'll turn off Safari.
| | 02:45 | You'll see this message asking you what
you want to do with any of
| | 02:48 | the bookmarks and tabs you previously
synced with your device.
| | 02:51 | Keep on My iPhone,
keeps everything as it currently is,
| | 02:53 | meaning the pages you might have opened that
were synced from your Mac will stay open in Safari,
| | 02:56 | but you'll no longer be synced after that;
| | 02:59 | or Delete from My iPhone will remove the data
you synced over.
| | 03:03 | But that's how to sync your browsing data between
your Mac and your iOS devices using iCloud tabs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. The iPod Part of the iPhoneBrowsing your library| 00:01 | In this chapter we're going to look
at the Music and Video apps
| | 00:03 | of the iPhone and iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | Both devices work the same way and they
allow you to carry around a lot of music
| | 00:09 | and video content to keep yourself
entertained while you're out and about.
| | 00:13 | Exactly how much depends on the size
of your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:16 | and the size of your music and video files,
but even the smallest capacity devices
| | 00:19 | can hold hours of content.
| | 00:21 | Now this chapter assumes that you've
already synced your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:24 | with iTunes and copied the
music and videos you want to it.
| | 00:27 | If you don't know how to do this, go
back and watch Chapter 3
| | 00:30 | on Synching Your Device with Your Computer.
| | 00:32 | Also if you're using the iTunes Match service,
remember that although you may
| | 00:35 | see your music collection on your device
you may still have the tap songs
| | 00:38 | or albums to download them.
| | 00:41 | See the movie on iTunes Match
if you haven't watch that already.
| | 00:43 | Okay I'll start by tapping music on my iPhone.
| | 00:46 | Unless you're already playing music
you'll be taken to one of the five categories
| | 00:50 | at the bottom of the screen,
depending on how you setup your iPod
| | 00:52 | or iPhone you may see some different
categories but currently I have playlists,
| | 00:56 | artists, songs, albums and more.
| | 01:00 | I'll show you how to customize which buttons
appeared on here in just a moment,
| | 01:03 | but each one of these is a way of browsing
through the music stored on your device.
| | 01:08 | Playlist lets you browse through the playlists
you've created and sync from iTunes.
| | 01:12 | Artists, allows you to search
your library by the artist name.
| | 01:16 | Songs by the song name, and
Albums let's you search by album name.
| | 01:20 | There's also the More category where you'll find
categories like audio books,
| | 01:24 | if you have any audio books,
compilations, composers and so on.
| | 01:27 | These are just additional ways to
find the content you are looking for.
| | 01:30 | For instance, if you listen to a lot
of classical music you might find the
| | 01:33 | composer's category more
useful than the artist category.
| | 01:37 | You can customize which categories
appear along the bottom of your screen
| | 01:39 | by tapping the Edit button here in More section.
| | 01:42 | That reveals icons for all the different
available category types
| | 01:45 | and all you have to do is drag the ones you want
to the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:48 | For instance, I'll drag Composers over Artists
and it's immediately replaced.
| | 01:54 | If I change my mind I just
drag artist back to where it was.
| | 01:58 | Tap Done to close this area.
| | 02:00 | Another way to browse through your
music is to flip it in to landscape mode
| | 02:03 | while you have any of these
categories other than more selected.
| | 02:07 | That takes you into cover flow mode
which displays your music in the form of
| | 02:10 | a cover art for each album, flick left
and right to browse through your collection.
| | 02:17 | Tap the cover to flip it over
and view the songs on that album.
| | 02:21 | You can tap a song from here to start
it playing or tap anywhere else to flip
| | 02:24 | the cover over again.
| | 02:26 | Alternately, you can use the
i button to flip covers over.
| | 02:31 | And that's gist it of how you browse
through your music on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 02:35 | In upcoming movies, we'll look at
selecting and playing your music and videos
| | 02:39 | as well as how to control playback and
how to browse and purchase more music.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing and controlling music| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how
to play and control your music.
| | 00:03 | I'll type music on my iPhone
to enter into my music library.
| | 00:07 | To start a song playing, first locate
it using one of the categories
| | 00:10 | at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:11 | I currently have Artist selected and I can
scroll through to find the artist I want to play.
| | 00:15 | I'll select the Jellybricks.
| | 00:17 | Next is the list of each album
from this artist I have on my iPhone.
| | 00:21 | Some of these might not be the entire albums.
| | 00:23 | It depends on the way you've
copied over through your device.
| | 00:25 | I'll select Goodnight to Everyone.
| | 00:27 | And now I'm seeing the
list of songs on this album.
| | 00:29 | The first button at the top of the
screen is Shuffle, which you can tap if you'd
| | 00:32 | like to play the current list in random
order or just scroll through and tap the
| | 00:37 | song you want to play.
| | 00:38 | Songs will play continuously, so if
you want to listen to the entire album in
| | 00:41 | order just tap the first song.
| | 00:45 | That takes me to the Now Playing screen
and the song starts playing right away.
| | 00:48 | I'm just going to pause this so
it's not playing while I'm speaking.
| | 00:51 | I am also seeing the lyrics for this
particular song, I'm just going to tap the
| | 00:54 | screen to make those disappear for a moment.
| | 00:57 | So here in the now playing screen,
I can see my album artwork at a nice large
| | 00:59 | size and I have several
controls and options available.
| | 01:03 | Starting at the bottom of the screen,
the first item is the Volume slider.
| | 01:06 | Drag this to the left and right to
increase or decrease the playback volume.
| | 01:10 | You can also use the volume Up and
Down buttons on the side of the phone
| | 01:13 | and you'll see the Volume slider move
to reflect the change in volume.
| | 01:17 | The playback controls are right above
the Volume slider and we've just seen that
| | 01:20 | you can tap the Play/Pause
button to play and pause the music.
| | 01:23 | Tap the Back or Forward buttons on
either side to go back or forward one track.
| | 01:29 | Now if the song is already playing,
the Back button will take you to the
| | 01:31 | start of the current song, so if you
want to jump back to the previous song,
| | 01:35 | tap the Back button twice.
| | 01:36 | You can also hold down the Back and
Foward buttons to rewind and fast forward
| | 01:40 | through the currently playing track.
| | 01:42 | The longer you hold down on the button,
the faster it will jump ahead or back.
| | 01:45 | You can watch the progress in the Progress bar
above the artwork to see
| | 01:48 | where you are in the song.
| | 01:50 | If your song has lyrics embedded in it,
as this one does, you'll see them appear as well,
| | 01:54 | if you have that option turned on
on your iPod settings,
| | 01:57 | and I'll show you how
to do that in the later movie.
| | 01:58 | But again, I can tap the screen
to make them appear or hide them.
| | 02:02 | So the Progress bar at the top of the
screen tells you how far along you are in
| | 02:05 | the song, with the elapsed time to the left of
the slider and the remaining time to the right.
| | 02:09 | You can drag or scrub the slider itself
to jump right to a portion of the song
| | 02:13 | that you want to hear.
| | 02:15 | Sometimes you want to go to a very
specific section of the track you're playing.
| | 02:18 | You can adjust the sensitivity of
scrubbing by dragging your finger down.
| | 02:21 | Notice I get a display telling me that
I've turned on half speed scrubbing,
| | 02:27 | then quarter speed
| | 02:29 | and then finally fine scrubbing.
| | 02:31 | At any one of these levels you can start
dragging left to right and you'll see
| | 02:34 | a difference in how much the
scrubber point moves along the bar.
| | 02:40 | We have a couple of other buttons
in the
progress slider area as well.
| | 02:44 | Over to the left, we have the Loop button.
| | 02:46 | Tap it once to repeat the selected
album or playlist over and over again.
| | 02:49 | Tap it the second time to repeat just
the current song over and over again.
| | 02:53 | Notice the tiny one symbol
that appears on the icon.
| | 02:56 | Tap at the third time to turn looping off again.
| | 02:59 | The button in the center is for album
creating Genius playlist and the button on the
| | 03:02 | right is for shuffling the current
or playlist which will play the songs
| | 03:06 | in a random order
and you can just turn that on or off.
| | 03:10 | Double-tapping the album cover flips
it over to reveal the songs on the album
| | 03:14 | which you can then scroll through and
then tap any songs to start it playing.
| | 03:18 | (music playing)
| | 03:21 | If you like to rate your songs in iTunes,
you'll be happy to know that you can
| | 03:23 | rate them on your iPod or iPhone too.
| | 03:25 | Just drag your finger along the dots at the
top of the screen to rate the selected song.
| | 03:30 | In iTunes, you can create playlists
based on the ratings you've assigned songs.
| | 03:33 | To return to the Cover view again, tap the
tiny Cover icon in the upper right-hand corner.
| | 03:38 | Let's start the song playing again.
| | 03:42 | While the song is playing you can
continue browsing through your library
| | 03:44 | by tapping the arrow in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 03:48 | This is useful if you're playing DJ and
you want to find the next song to play
| | 03:51 | before the current song ends.
| | 03:53 | You can always get back to the
currently playing songs and playback controls by
| | 03:56 | by tapping Now Playing.
| | 03:59 | And here we can adjust the song
settings or change the volume.
| | 04:05 | You can also open other apps and perform
many other tasks while your music is playing.
| | 04:12 | Notice the small Play button that
appears at the top of the screen.
| | 04:15 | This is to remind you that you're
currently playing music which you might
| | 04:17 | not know if you have your earphones
plugged in into your device,
| | 04:20 | but without them being in your ears.
| | 04:24 | At any time, a quick double-click of the
Home button opens up the Multitask pane.
| | 04:26 | Click the pane to the right to reveal
the Mini-controller,
| | 04:29 | which is nice if you need
to pause your music quickly.
| | 04:32 | You can also use the Back and Forwad
buttons to navigate the current playlist
| | 04:36 | or tap the Music button to go
back to the iPod interface.
| | 04:38 | Let's start the music playing again.
| | 04:40 | (music playing)
| | 04:42 | To conserve your battery and to avoid
accidentally tapping buttons
| | 04:44 | while you're listening to music, you can click the
Sleep button to turn the screen off.
| | 04:48 | (music playing)
| | 04:50 | Your music will continue to play and the
Volume buttons on the side of the phone
| | 04:53 | will continue to work.
| | 04:54 | Even while the screen is locked, you
can double-click the Home button to bring
| | 04:57 | up the Mini-controller.
| | 04:59 | So again, you can quickly
pause your music if necessary.
| | 05:02 | So those are the controls for playing
your music on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 05:06 | Now before I wrap up this movie,
I want to mention that there are couple of
| | 05:08 | other control options you'll see if you're
playing back something like an audio book.
| | 05:12 | I'll go back to my library and
under More, I'll select Audiobooks.
| | 05:17 | Here I will start in audiobook playing.
| | 05:23 | Let's pause that for the moment.
| | 05:24 | While playing an audiobook, you have
the option of playing the audio back at a
| | 05:27 | slower or faster speed.
| | 05:28 | Some people like to get through their
books faster while others have trouble
| | 05:32 | understanding fast narrators.
| | 05:33 | You can tap the Speed button to cycle
through the playback speeds of realtime,
| | 05:38 | twice as fast
| | 05:40 | or half speed. I'll leave mine set to real time.
| | 05:43 | Also convenient to audiobooks
is a 15-second Rewind button.
| | 05:45 | Sometimes you just zone out while
listening to an audiobook and suddenly realize
| | 05:49 | you don't remember what was just read.
| | 05:51 | Instead of having to manually scrub
back or rewind, tap the 15-second Rewind
| | 05:54 | button to jump at 15 seconds in the time line.
| | 05:57 | And if that's not far enough back, just
keep tapping it until you get back to a
| | 06:01 | part of the book you recognize.
| | 06:03 | Similarly, you can tap the 15-second
Fast-forward button to jump ahead
| | 06:06 | if you rewound too far.
| | 06:07 | And be aware that these two special
buttons are only available from the
| | 06:10 | Now Playing screen and not the Mini-controller
you see when you double-click the Home button.
| | 06:14 | Those are the controls for playing
back music and other audio files
| | 06:17 | on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing and controlling video| 00:01 | The controls for playing videos on your
iPhone and iPod touch are similar to the
| | 00:04 | ones for playing music and audio files,
but there are some differences and some
| | 00:08 | things unique to video playback
that you should be familiar with.
| | 00:10 | So in this movie, we're
looking at how to play videos.
| | 00:14 | Your videos are accessible
by tapping the Videos app.
| | 00:17 | Videos are categorized into
Movies, TV shows, and Music Videos.
| | 00:21 | Generally, any movie you copy into iTunes
to place on to your phone or iPod touch
| | 00:25 | is considered a movie unless you go in
and change the info to TV Show or Music Video.
| | 00:30 | If you purchase a TV show or music video
from the iTunes store, it will have the
| | 00:34 | correct classification when you download it.
| | 00:36 | Having your videos properly
classified isn't a huge deal but it does make
| | 00:39 | browsing through TV shows a lot
easier, especially if you have several
| | 00:42 | episodes of the same show.
| | 00:44 | You can tap on show title to view all the
episodes on a separate screen instead of
| | 00:48 | having them all in your main
video's page to scroll through.
| | 00:51 | To play any video, just tap it.
| | 00:54 | Videos only play in landscape mode but
you can rotate your device to either side.
| | 00:59 | While the video is playing, single-tap
the screen to show and hide the controls.
| | 01:03 | The controls will also disappear after
a few seconds if you don't touch them
| | 01:07 | but it's faster to just tap the screen if
you know you're not going to use the controls.
| | 01:13 | We have the standard Play and Pause buttons
with the Back and Forward buttons on either side.
| | 01:19 | Holding down on either button skips
backwards and forwards that increasing
| | 01:22 | speeds the longer you hold them down.
| | 01:24 | (video playing)
| | 01:31 | Or tap the Back button to jump
back to the beginning of the video.
| | 01:34 | In the case of this video, it has
chapter markers so tapping back takes me back
| | 01:38 | to the previous chapters.
| | 01:45 | Volume can be controlled either by
dragging the Volume slider left or right.
| | 01:48 | (video playing)
| | 01:56 | Or you can use the Volume
buttons on the side of the phone.
| | 02:00 | (video playing)
| | 02:03 | At the top of the screen is the Progress
bar with the elapse time to the left of
| | 02:06 | the slider and the remaining time to right.
| | 02:09 | We can drag in the Progress bar to
go to a specific part of the video.
| | 02:12 | Although it's not noted here, you have to
same fine-tuning controls available for
| | 02:15 | videos as you do for music playback.
| | 02:17 | To be more precise on which part of
the movie you're dragging to,
| | 02:20 | place your finger on the dot in the Progress
bar and drag down away from the bar.
| | 02:24 | The further away from the bar, the
slower that I will move when you
| | 02:26 | drag your finger horizontally.
| | 02:39 | Some other buttons you might see depend
on how the video you're watching was formatted.
| | 02:43 | If the video includes subtitles or
chapter markers, you'll see those buttons by
| | 02:46 | the playback controls as well.
| | 02:48 | Here's the button for subtitles.
| | 02:55 | You can see the subtitles there.
| | 02:57 | (video playing)
| | 03:01 | And here's the button for chapter markers.
| | 03:02 | (video playing)
| | 03:15 | Now unlike with playing music, you
obviously can't keep playing a video while
| | 03:18 | you're doing something else on the phone
because the video takes up the entire screen.
| | 03:22 | So pressing the Home button or putting
the screen to sleep stops the video and
| | 03:25 | when you're done watching the video,
tap Done to return to your library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the included earbud controls| 00:00 | If you use the earbud headset that came
with your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 00:03 | you can control your music playback
using the built-in remote control attached
| | 00:07 | to the right earbuds cable.
| | 00:09 | The iPhone comes with a headset that
includes the Volume controls in addition to
| | 00:11 | the Center button used for controlling playback.
| | 00:13 | With your headset plugged into your device,
you still need to browse your music library
| | 00:17 | and pick the song or playlist
you want to listen to.
| | 00:20 | (music playing)
| | 00:25 | All of your phone's audio will
go through your headphones
| | 00:27 | when they're plugged-in.
| | 00:29 | If you unplug the headphones,
| | 00:32 | the music will automatically pause.
| | 00:34 | This prevents your music from blaring
out of your phone if you accidentally
| | 00:36 | yank the headphones out, if that happens,
just plug them back in and start the music again.
| | 00:41 | There are only a handful of click
actions for controlling your music playback
| | 00:44 | with the earbuds, but they very
convenient to know if your iPhone or iPod
| | 00:47 | is tucked in to your pocket and you want
to pick a different song or pause
| | 00:51 | or rewind without having to pull your device out.
| | 00:53 | Now I'm only going to cover the music and video
playback-related earbud controls here.
| | 00:57 | If you want to learn about the controls
you used during phone calls,
| | 01:00 | go back to the chapter on the phone
part of the iPhone for that information.
| | 01:03 | First, play the currently selected song
y clicking and releasing the Center button once.
| | 01:09 | To skip to the next song in the album
or playlist double-click the button.
| | 01:13 | (music playing)
| | 01:22 | To go back, click the Center button three times.
| | 01:24 | (music playing)
| | 01:31 | Basically, if only two or three seconds
of the current song have passed,
| | 01:34 | triple-clicking the center button will take
you to the previous song, but if more than
| | 01:38 | three seconds have passed triple-clicking
will start the current song over.
| | 01:41 | To fast forward playback, press the
Center button twice but hold it down on the
| | 01:45 | second click until you fast forward
to the part you want to listen to.
| | 01:48 | (music playing)
| | 02:01 | To rewind the song, triple-click the
button and hold down on the third click
| | 02:04 | until you get back to the part
of the song you want to listen to.
| | 02:07 | (music playing)
| | 02:16 | Basically, remember that forward
actions are double-clicks
| | 02:19 | and backward actions are triple clicks.
| | 02:21 | (music playing)
| | 02:24 | Other than that, the only other controls
available in terms of your music playback
| | 02:27 | are the Volume controls
on the iPhone's earbuds.
| | 02:30 | Just use them to turn the volume up or down.
| | 02:34 | (music playing)
| | 02:46 | The earbud controls are essentially
the same for playing back video as well.
| | 02:50 | Click once to play and pause.
| | 02:52 | (video playing)
| | 02:56 | You can double-click to jump forward
to the next video on the playlist and
| | 02:59 | triple-click to go back to the
beginning of the current video.
| | 03:02 | You can also double-click
and hold to fast forward.
| | 03:04 | (video playing)
| | 03:08 | Or triple-click and hold to rewind.
| | 03:10 | (video playing)
| | 03:21 | So the controls for video are pretty
much the same as the controls for audio.
| | 03:24 | Now that's the extent of what you can
control by clicking the buttons on the earbuds,
| | 03:28 | but because the earbuds that come with the iPhone
also have a built-in microphone.
| | 03:31 | You can also control your device with your voice
| | 03:34 | and we'll look at that in an upcoming chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adjusting your iPod settings| 00:00 | In this chapter, we've looked at a lot
of controls and behaviors of your iPhone
| | 00:03 | and iPod that are dependent on
some of their default settings.
| | 00:07 | If your own device hasn't been behaving
the same as you've been seeing in these movies
| | 00:10 | or if you'd like to turn off
some of these default behaviors
| | 00:13 | I'll show you where to find them here.
| | 00:15 | Tap Settings and scroll down to Music.
| | 00:20 | Here's where you'll find most of the
preferences that will determine
| | 00:23 | your iPhone's behaviors when playing music.
| | 00:25 | First is Shake to Shuffle.
| | 00:27 | With this turned on, if you're in the
music app, shaking your phone
| | 00:30 | will start a random song playing
from your currently selected playlist.
| | 00:33 | Now in order for this to work, you
have to already be playing a song
| | 00:35 | and your screen has to be on.
| | 00:38 | That prevents you from accidentally shuffling songs
if you're running with your iPod
| | 00:40 | or if it's just bumping
around on your car's dashboard.
| | 00:43 | I don't use this feature much myself
since I always seem to shake my phone
| | 00:46 | and jump to another song by accident.
| | 00:48 | You can turn it on if you
want though, to give it a try.
| | 00:51 | Next, we have the sound check
feature which is off by default.
| | 00:53 | Inevitably, some of the songs in your music
library are going to be louder than other songs.
| | 00:57 | This just has to do with the way they
were originally recorded and released
| | 01:01 | and to some extent how they were encoded.
| | 01:03 | For example, songs recorded these days are a
lot louder than songs recorded back in the 60s.
| | 01:08 | So if you're shuffling songs in your collection,
you might be playing an older song
| | 01:10 | that requires you to turn up the volume
so you can hear it at a decent level,
| | 01:13 | only to have your ears blown off by the next song
that was recorded in the past year or so.
| | 01:18 | Sound check automatically controls the
playback level of all songs so they all
| | 01:21 | playback at relatively the same volume.
| | 01:24 | Quiet songs become a little bit louder
and louder songs become a little bit quieter
| | 01:27 | and they sort of meet in the middle.
| | 01:29 | Personally, I'm not really a fan of how Sound
Check make some songs sound, so I leave this off.
| | 01:33 | But if you're listening to a
playlist that includes a wide range of songs
| | 01:36 | spanning several decades and you want
to make sure everything plays back at a
| | 01:39 | consistent volume level,
you can try turning it on.
| | 01:42 | Next, we have the EQ options, which
are essentially a collection of preset
| | 01:46 | audio adjustment settings for tweaking the
frequencies of the music you're listening to.
| | 01:50 | Notice we have several EQ selections to choose from,
covering a wide range of genres and scenarios.
| | 01:55 | So if for example you found that
you're not getting the bass response you'd
| | 01:58 | like out of the tracks you're playing you
might come in here and choose the bass booster.
| | 02:03 | If you're listening to an audiobook, you
might want to choose the spoken word EQ settings.
| | 02:08 | If you come in here while music is
playing, you'll hear the changes to the sound
| | 02:11 | of your music as you tap different selections.
| | 02:13 | Just be aware though that using the EQ
settings does drain your battery a little
| | 02:16 | bit faster, so I'll use my EQ
settings set to Off for now.
| | 02:21 | The next setting here is Volume Limit
and this just lets you set your iPhone or
| | 02:23 | iPod so the volume level never
goes louder than the limit you set.
| | 02:28 | This is good for anyone who's guilty of
listening to their music way too loud
| | 02:31 | or for parents want to protect their kids' ears.
| | 02:33 | You'll probably want to have music
playing as you drag the slider to set the
| | 02:36 | limits so you can hear
the results of your setting.
| | 02:39 | I'll just leave this at the
highest setting for now though.
| | 02:42 | Next is Lyrics & Podcast Info.
| | 02:45 | If you have songs that include
embedded lyrics, you'll see the lyrics appear
| | 02:47 | when you play them or if your podcasts
which include embedded show information,
| | 02:51 | you'll see that information
appear when you play the podcast.
| | 02:55 | If you don't see the lyrics or
podcast info, that information is either not
| | 02:58 | included or try tapping the album or
podcast artwork to make them appear.
| | 03:02 | Of course if you don't want to see that
stuff, go back to the settings here and
| | 03:05 | turn lyrics and podcast info off.
| | 03:08 | The last option in this
section is Group By Album Artist.
| | 03:11 | This mainly applies to compilation albums
that include songs byseveral different artists.
| | 03:15 | Keep this option on if you want to be
able to get the compilation songs by the
| | 03:18 | name of the album artist, which is
commonly just various artists or something
| | 03:22 | like that; or you can turn it off if
you'd like to be able to find the songs by
| | 03:26 | songs by browsing for a specific artist.
| | 03:27 | If you've signed-in your iCloud account
through the iCloud settings on your device,
| | 03:30 | the next item here is iTunes Match,
which again, is Apple's $25 year
| | 03:34 | service that allows you to sync your
iTunes library to your iCloud account
| | 03:38 | so you can download any of your songs at any time.
| | 03:41 | I've talked about iTunes match in the
chapter on syncing with your computer
| | 03:44 | so you can go back for a review there, if necessary.
| | 03:47 | The last option here is Home Sharing.
| | 03:49 | This is a feature in iTunes that lets
you easily share your iTunes library
| | 03:53 | with other computers and iOS
devices on your home network.
| | 03:55 | You have to first enable home sharing
with your Apple ID through iTunes,
| | 04:00 | then enter your Apple ID on your iOS device
and you'll be able to browse and play
| | 04:03 | content from your iTunes library from your device.
| | 04:06 | That does it for music preferences.
| | 04:08 | Let's go back to Settings and
select the Video Preferences.
| | 04:11 | The first item here is Start Playing,
and all this determines is where videos
| | 04:15 | you had previously been
watching will pick up from.
| | 04:18 | The default choice is Where I left Off,
which I think it makes sense because
| | 04:21 | you'll most likely want to start
watching a video where you last left off.
| | 04:25 | The other option here is From Beginning,
but I feel like if you wanted to watch
| | 04:28 | video from the beginning, you
could just tap the Back button once.
| | 04:31 | So I'll leave Where Left Off selected.
| | 04:33 | Some videos you watch will have
closed caption text embedded in them.
| | 04:37 | Here, you can decide whether you want
Closed Captioning to be on or off by default.
| | 04:41 | Regardless of your choice though, you
can still turn Close Captioning on and off
| | 04:44 | while watching a video.
| | 04:45 | This is just for setting the default behavior.
| | 04:47 | And Below that, you'll find another place to
sign-in with your Apple ID to use Home Sharing.
| | 04:51 | It doesn't matter whether you sign-in
under Video Settings or under Music Settings,
| | 04:54 | as we saw previously. Either one works.
| | 04:57 | That does it for the Music and Video Playback preferences.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing and buying with the iTunes app| 00:00 | Built into every iOS
device is the iTunes Store App.
| | 00:04 | Here, you can browse, sample, purchase
and download music, videos, audio books
| | 00:08 | and custom ring tones.
| | 00:10 | Basically, everything that's available
to the iTunes Store in your computer
| | 00:13 | is available through the iTunes App.
| | 00:15 | If you're on an iPhone, you can even
purchase and download movies over your
| | 00:19 | cellular network when you're
not connected to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 00:21 | You can start by tapping Music at the
bottom of the screen and here you can
| | 00:24 | browse through New Releases,
Singles and other featured items.
| | 00:28 | You can tap to See All in any
category, to see the items in a list.
| | 00:31 | At the top of the main screen, you can
browse by Genre, Featured Items and Charts.
| | 00:37 | Similarly, tap Movies and you can
browse through a large selection of Hollywood
| | 00:43 | and independent movies.
| | 00:44 | The same goes for TV Shows.
| | 00:46 | Here, you can browse for and purchase
entire seasons or series runs of TV shows.
| | 00:51 | If you can't find what you're looking
for through these categories, tap Search
| | 00:55 | and here you can have
exactly what you're looking for.
| | 00:58 | I'll look for the band, the Jellybricks.
| | 01:01 | Here, I'll find both Songs
and Albums from the band.
| | 01:06 | I'll tap an Album to browse its contents
and on each album page you can sample
| | 01:10 | 90 seconds of any track by tapping it.
| | 01:16 | If you're ready to buy the song or video you
sampled, tap its Price, and then tap Buy Song.
| | 01:24 | Purchasing content from the iTunes
Store requires you to have a free Apple ID.
| | 01:28 | If you've ever purchased from the
iTunes Store through your computer,
| | 01:30 | you already have an account, so you
can use your existing Apple ID.
| | 01:33 | If you've never purchased anything
through the iTunes Store before,
| | 01:36 | you'll have to create an Apple ID and I showed
you how to do that in an earlier chapter.
| | 01:40 | I already have my apple
ID Username entered here.
| | 01:42 | Now I just need to enter the Password.
| | 01:44 | So, you can see 1 has appeared here.
| | 01:46 | If I tap that, and go to Downloads, I
can watch the progress of my download.
| | 01:51 | You might have also noticed that a
Complete My Album button has appeared here
| | 01:54 | at the top of the screen.
| | 01:56 | This allows me to purchase the rest of
this album if I choose to by tapping
| | 01:59 | the $5 button, in this case.
| | 02:02 | Once it's done, it disappears from the downloads area,
and I'll now find it in my music app.
| | 02:08 | It's almost scary how easy it is to purchase
music and videos from the iTunes Store.
| | 02:12 | Now let me show you where your iTunes
account info is stored on your device.
| | 02:18 | Go to Settings>iTunes & App Stores.
| | 02:24 | Here's where you'll see the account
name you have stored on your phone.
| | 02:27 | From here you can view your account
details by tapping View Apple ID
| | 02:30 | and choosing View Apple ID.
| | 02:32 | I'll tap Done to close that.
| | 02:34 | Tapping your name also allows you
to sign out log out of your account.
| | 02:38 | I mentioned this because some
people have more than one Apple ID.
| | 02:41 | For instance, I have one personal
account and one for work,
| | 02:43 | both with their own associated credit cards.
| | 02:45 | So if I want to make sure my purchases
are charged to the right card,
| | 02:48 | this is where I come to sign in
and out of my accounts.
| | 02:51 | If you've forgotten your username or
password, you can also tap iForgot
| | 02:55 | and you'll be directed to a website
where you can retrieve your information.
| | 02:58 | Just cancel out of there and let's
go back to the iTunes Store again.
| | 03:03 | So also in the More section, you can
browse through other types of content
| | 03:07 | like Audiobooks and ring tones.
| | 03:08 | The Purchased area is where you'll find
the list of all the Music, Movies and TV Shows
| | 03:12 | you've ever purchased through the store.
| | 03:14 | Each category is organized by the All
and Not on This Phone Tabs.
| | 03:17 | All shows you everything you've purchased
in this category, while Not on this Phone
| | 03:21 | is really nice to have because you can
quickly see which items you've bought
| | 03:21 | That's how to purchase and manage
content from the iTunes Store
| | 03:23 | but aren't currently on your phone,
and then you can tap any one of these items
| | 03:27 | to download it to your device.
| | 03:34 | directly on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using AirPlay to stream content wirelessly from an iPhone to an Apple TV or AirPort Express| 00:00 | Back with the Release of iOS 4.2,
Apple introduced AirPlay, a feature that
| | 00:05 | allows you to stream music from your
iTunes Library to any AirPlay-enabled device,
| | 00:08 | like an Airport Express, an Apple TV,
or one of many third-party Airplay products
| | 00:13 | that are hitting the market,
like stereos and remote speakers.
| | 00:15 | All you have to do is make sure that your iPhone
and AirPlay device are both on the same network.
| | 00:20 | For this example, I have an Airport Express
and an Apple TV all connected to the
| | 00:24 | same network my iPhone is currently on.
| | 00:26 | So, let's go to my iPhone and tap Music.
| | 00:28 | Here I'll start a song playing.
| | 00:34 | All right, just hit Pause.
| | 00:36 | Now notice this button that appears
to the right of the volume controls,
| | 00:39 | that's the AirPlay button and it appears when
an AirPlay device is detected on your network.
| | 00:43 | When I tap it, buttons for
each of the devices appear.
| | 00:46 | So you can see my iPhone is
currently selected as a Playback device.
| | 00:50 | I could select my Airport Express, but
I don't have speakers plugged into it right now,
| | 00:54 | so let's select the Apple TV.
| | 00:57 | Notice the AirPlay button turns orange,
which is a visual indicator that a
| | 01:00 | device other than my iPhone is
selected as the Playback device.
| | 01:03 | Now I'll tap Play and in just a few seconds,
my music should start playing through the Apple TV.
| | 01:12 | And at this point I can continue to
control my music on my iPhone, for instance,
| | 01:15 | jumping to the next song, playing
with the volume, or just pausing it.
| | 01:27 | So, that's pretty cool and it
works pretty much the same for video.
| | 01:30 | This is especially nice if you're watching a video
on your iPhone and then you want to switch to your TV
| | 01:36 | I'll go to my Video App
and start a video playing.
| | 01:43 | Notice the AirPlay button shows up next
to the Playback controls here as well.
| | 01:46 | I can just tap it, and again choose my Apple TV.
| | 01:53 | Just like that the video is playing
through my Apple TV over my network.
| | 01:57 | So, no cables, copying, or
file conversion is needed.
| | 02:00 | Imagine you download a movie to watch
on your iPhone during a flight,
| | 02:04 | but you don't get to finish watching it.
| | 02:05 | When you get home, you can plop down in front
of your TV and pick up exactly where you left off.
| | 02:09 | But wait, that's not all.
| | 02:11 | AirPlay also works with your photo library.
| | 02:13 | Just go into your Photos, select the
photo you want to display, and then tap the
| | 02:19 | AirPlay button down at the bottom.
| | 02:21 | Again, I'll select my Apple TV.
| | 02:22 | Now I see my photos on both my
iPhone and through my Apple TV.
| | 02:26 | This is a great way to share your
photos with a roomful of people.
| | 02:29 | You can either manually flick through your album
| | 02:34 | or press the Play button to play them as a slideshow,
| | 02:44 | and just tap the screen when you
want to Stop the slideshow.
| | 02:48 | So, that's AirPlay.
| | 02:50 | Now AirPlay is supported on apps made
by Apple like the Music and Video Apps
| | 02:53 | and the Photos App and you may also
see the AirPlay button appear next to the
| | 02:56 | Playback controls in other third-party video
or Audio Apps you use,
| | 03:00 | but it depends on whether the developer of the
app has built AirPlay functionality into it.
| | 03:04 | Most developers explicitly state when
their apps support AirPlay though,
| | 03:07 | because it's a great feature and app developers
will want to let you know
| | 03:10 | that they have it built into their apps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Shooting Photos and Video, and Managing Your Photo LibraryShooting still photos with your iPhone| 00:00 | In this chapter, we're going to be looking
at working with photos and video
| | 00:04 | on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | In this movie, we're going to take a look at
how to shoot still photos with your iPhone
| | 00:09 | or 4th Generation iPod touch and later.
| | 00:11 | Earlier, iPod touch models
don't have built-in cameras.
| | 00:13 | So, if you have an earlier iPod touch,
you can skip this movie
| | 00:16 | and jump to the next one on viewing
and managing your photos.
| | 00:20 | But every iPhone since the first generation model
does have a built-in camera,
| | 00:22 | and a pretty decent one which has gotten better with each subsequent version of the iPhone.
| | 00:27 | So, if you carry your iPhone with you
everywhere, you'll always have a camera
| | 00:30 | to pull out when you need one.
| | 00:32 | Now I'm not saying you can throw away
your regular camera because the quality
| | 00:34 | of the photos on the iPhone greatly
depends on how well lit the scene you're
| | 00:37 | shooting is, and whether or not
your subject and you are moving.
| | 00:41 | Also, only the iPhone 4 and later and the 5th
Generation iPod touch have a built-in flash.
| | 00:46 | So, you'll generally need to be in a
well-lit environment, and hold as still as possible
| | 00:50 | to get good-looking pictures
if you have an older device.
| | 00:53 | The 5 can actually produce some
great looking shots in low light.
| | 00:56 | But I'll show you some tips that
will help improve your chances
| | 00:58 | of getting decent shots regardless
of which iPhone you have.
| | 01:01 | So, start up the camera app by tapping its icon.
| | 01:04 | If this is the first time you've used
the camera, you'll see a message telling
| | 01:07 | you that the camera app
would like to use your location.
| | 01:10 | Basically, this message is telling you that
your photos and videos will be geo-tagged.
| | 01:14 | Meaning, the iPhone will use the same
location data it uses to figure out where
| | 01:17 | you are in the Maps app and tag
your photos with this tiny bit of data.
| | 01:22 | Unless you're trying to keep
the location of where you take your photo
| | 01:23 | as a secret, you can tap OK.
| | 01:26 | But geo-tagging your photos is a great
way to keep a record of almost exactly
| | 01:28 | where a shot was taken, and more and
more photo management apps like iPhoto
| | 01:32 | and Picasa can use geotags as an additional
way for you to sort and manage your photos.
| | 01:37 | You may also be asked if you want to
sync your photos with your iCloud Photo Stream,
| | 01:40 | which will automatically upload the photos
you shoot to your iCloud account
| | 01:44 | if you've created one, so the photos will be instantly
available on any other iOS device you have.
| | 01:50 | I'll choose not to sync
with my Photo Stream for now.
| | 01:53 | So now, we're seeing
exactly what the camera is seeing.
| | 01:56 | The default mode of the
camera is to take still photos.
| | 01:59 | You can toggle between shooting still
photos and videos with the toggle switch
| | 02:02 | in the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
| | 02:04 | But for now, we'll keep it set to Still Photos.
| | 02:06 | Just like with the regular camera, you
can shoot in Portrait or Landscape mode.
| | 02:11 | Notice that the camera icon in the
shutter button rotates to let you know
| | 02:14 | that the iPhone knows it's been rotated.
| | 02:17 | This ensures that when you copy your
photos to your computer, you don't end up
| | 02:20 | with sideways pictures that you have to
rotate in your Photo Management Software.
| | 02:24 | It's a good idea to glance at the
camera icon before you shoot your photo
| | 02:27 | to make sure your orientation has been registered.
| | 02:30 | By the way, the Camera button looks a
little different on the iPhone 5
| | 02:33 | than it does on earlier iPhones.
| | 02:35 | Here on the 5, it's a round button.
| | 02:37 | But in earlier iPhones, it's
shaped more like a capsule.
| | 02:40 | They both work exactly the same way though.
| | 02:42 | So, to take a basic photo, all you
have to do is frame up the subject on the screen,
| | 02:46 | and press the Shutter button.
| | 02:49 | You'll see the picture you took for a
very brief moment before you
| | 02:51 | return to the live camera view.
| | 02:53 | This is useful in case you want to
take multiple shots in a quick succession.
| | 02:58 | We'll see how to review
your photos in just a moment.
| | 03:01 | But first, let's look at some
things you can do to improve your shots.
| | 03:04 | First, note that the camera does not
actually take the photo
| | 03:07 | until you lift your finger off the Shutter button.
| | 03:10 | So, one way to help stabilize your
phone while you're shooting
| | 03:12 | is to hold your finger on the shutter button
while you're framing your shot.
| | 03:16 | Then lift your finger off to take the shot.
| | 03:18 | This can keep your phone a lot steadier than
tapping the shutter button to take your shot.
| | 03:22 | Depending on how hard you tap, the force could
shake the camera enough to blur your picture.
| | 03:26 | Another way to prevent shaking your
camera with a tap is to use
| | 03:30 | the Volume Up button to snap your photo.
| | 03:32 | This is a feature introduced in iOS 5.
| | 03:33 | Instead of tapping the Camera button,
you can use the Volume Up button,
| | 03:37 | which is the button closer to the top of the
device on the side of the camera to take the photo,
| | 03:42 | making the experience a little more like using
a traditional point-and-shoot camera.
| | 03:46 | Notice the box that appears in the center
of the screen when the phone is held still.
| | 03:50 | That's the iPhone telling you
where its point of focus is.
| | 03:53 | Meaning, that area in the box is what
the camera is using to determine the
| | 03:56 | overall brightness, and color cast of the photo.
| | 03:59 | But your subject is not always going
to be in the dead center of this frame,
| | 04:03 | and using this default value could
make your picture too dark or too bright.
| | 04:06 | You can manually let the camera know
what the important part of the picture is
| | 04:09 | simply by tapping it on the screen.
| | 04:12 | For example, maybe this area is
the focus of the shot I'm taking.
| | 04:15 | I just tap it with my finger, and
instantly, the camera reevaluates a scene
| | 04:18 | based on its measurements of that area.
| | 04:20 | And then you can take your picture.
| | 04:22 | Basically, what this boils down to is,
just tap the important part of the
| | 04:25 | picture before you take your shot.
| | 04:28 | You can also lock-in the Exposure, and Focus by
holding down on the subject area for a second.
| | 04:34 | Notice it says AE/AF Lock at the bottom now.
| | 04:36 | This is useful if you want to lock-in
the Exposure and Focus, but then play
| | 04:41 | around with the framing without your phone
constantly trying to readjust for the lighting.
| | 04:45 | You can unlock the Exposure and Focus
by tapping anywhere on the screen again.
| | 04:50 | The camera can also detect faces in your shots.
| | 04:52 | So it can tell when you're taking a
portrait of a single person, or if you're
| | 04:56 | taking a group shot.
| | 04:58 | The camera automatically focuses on
the more prominent face in the frame, and
| | 05:01 | adjusts the Focus and
Exposure settings accordingly.
| | 05:04 | But you can still tap anywhere on the
screen to change the settings if you need to.
| | 05:10 | To review the photos you've taken, you
can tap the tiny thumbnail image
| | 05:12 | of the last picture you took.
| | 05:15 | This takes you into your Camera Roll, which
we'll look at more closely in an upcoming movie.
| | 05:19 | But here, you can swipe side to side
to review your shots,
| | 05:22 | pinch open and close to zoom in and out.
| | 05:24 | When you're done reviewing your photos,
you can tap the screen once to reveal
| | 05:27 | the interface button and then tap the
Camera icon to return to the camera.
| | 05:32 | To review your photos, you can also
swipe your finger to the right while looking
| | 05:35 | at the camera, which takes me
to the last photo instantly.
| | 05:38 | This is a quick way to take a look at
the photo you just shot and then swipe
| | 05:40 | back to the left to return to the
camera without having to do a couple of taps.
| | 05:45 | I also want to mention here that the iPhone is actually
quite good at macro or super close-up shots as well.
| | 05:50 | If you get the camera within 4 to 8 inches
of your subject, it goes into Macro mode.
| | 05:55 | You can get surprisingly detailed close-ups
with your iPhone since you can tap
| | 05:58 | the area of importance to
improve your Exposure and Focus.
| | 06:01 | If you can't quite get the camera to
focus on a certain area, move a little
| | 06:04 | further away from your subject and try again.
| | 06:08 | There are a couple of other
options available here to check out too.
| | 06:11 | If you have a device with a flash, by
default, the flash is set to Auto,
| | 06:15 | which lets the phone determine
when the flash is needed.
| | 06:18 | If it determines the scene is
too dark, the flash will fire.
| | 06:22 | You can also tap the Flash
button and choose Off or On.
| | 06:24 | When you choose On, the flash
will always fire with each shot.
| | 06:28 | This might be useful if you're shooting someone
who is backlit, maybe with a sunset behind them,
| | 06:32 | and you need the flash so your subject
doesn't become a silhouette.
| | 06:36 | If you choose to turn the flash off,
it won't fire until you turn it back on.
| | 06:41 | Turning the flash off is useful when
you want to capture more of the natural
| | 06:44 | lighting of the scene you're shooting
or when your subject is too far away
| | 06:46 | for the flash to matter.
| | 06:48 | So, just because you have a flash
doesn't mean you have to use it.
| | 06:52 | Now the other available option on the
iPhone and 4th Generation iPod touch and later
| | 06:55 | is the front-facing camera.
| | 06:58 | You can toggle between the main and
front cameras by pressing this button.
| | 07:01 | This is great for taking self-portraits
since it takes all the guesswork out
| | 07:05 | of whether or not you're framing
yourself in the picture.
| | 07:08 | Just frame yourself up and take the shot.
| | 07:11 | Now obviously, there's no button
for the flash when you're using the
| | 07:13 | front-facing camera since the flash
is on the other side of the phone.
| | 07:16 | Also, the camera in the front has a
slightly lower resolution than the main camera.
| | 07:20 | But it's still great to have the second camera
for still shots, as well as for using FaceTime,
| | 07:23 | which we looked at earlier;
and for shooting videos of yourself,
| | 07:27 | which we'll look at later in this chapter.
| | 07:29 | The last thing I'd like to show you here
is a really useful feature introduced in iOS 5.
| | 07:33 | Sometimes, you need to get to your
camera quickly in order to catch a shot.
| | 07:36 | But it's really time consuming to unlock
your phone, and locate and tap the camera app.
| | 07:40 | By the time you get through that,
you might have missed your shot.
| | 07:44 | So instead, when your phone is
locked, press the Home or Lock button.
| | 07:48 | Notice the little camera icon
in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 07:51 | To quickly access the camera, drag that
icon up, and the camera app opens right away.
| | 07:57 | So, that's shooting photos with the camera app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Improving your photos using HDR and gridlines| 00:00 | When shooting still photos with
the rear-facing camera on your iOS device,
| | 00:03 | you'll see this Options button.
| | 00:06 | Tapping it reveals HDR, Grid, and Panorama.
| | 00:09 | In this movie, we're going
to talk about HDR, and Grid.
| | 00:11 | Let's turn Grid on.
| | 00:13 | This Grid can be used to help you frame
the subjects in your shot.
| | 00:16 | You may have heard of the rule of thirds
when it comes to photography and design.
| | 00:20 | Basically, it's often more esthetically pleasing
to compose your shots
| | 00:24 | by placing the subject of your photo
along one of these gridlines rather than
| | 00:27 | perfectly centered in the shot.
| | 00:28 | So, for example, I want to take a picture of this tree.
| | 00:32 | Rather than putting it dead center in my photo,
I'm going to line it up with the right gridline.
| | 00:36 | I'm also going to tilt my phone a bit,
so the perceived horizon lines up
| | 00:40 | with the lower gridline.
| | 00:43 | I'll tap the tree to make sure I'm exposing
it properly, and I'll take my shot.
| | 00:50 | Now a lot of this is subjective.
| | 00:52 | But most people agree that using the grid
can help you create more interesting
| | 00:55 | and pleasing photos.
| | 00:56 | Of course, it's entirely up to you to determine
what looks good in your eyes.
| | 01:00 | Let's go back to the camera.
| | 01:01 | The second option here is HDR.
| | 01:04 | This is found only on the iPhone 4 and later,
and on the 5th Generation iPod touch.
| | 01:09 | HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
| | 01:11 | HDR is useful when you're taking a
photo that includes both really bright areas
| | 01:15 | as well as really dark areas.
| | 01:18 | With traditional photos, this usually
means that parts of your photo are either
| | 01:21 | going to be overexposed or underexposed.
| | 01:24 | This often occurs when the subject
you are shooting is in front of a bright
| | 01:28 | background like the sky.
| | 01:29 | For example, in the photo I just shot,
the tree was the subject and I tapped it
| | 01:32 | right before I took the photo, so it
came out nicely, but the sky behind it
| | 01:36 | lost a lot of detail.
| | 01:37 | The sky is overexposed.
| | 01:39 | This is where HDR can help.
| | 01:41 | With HDR turned on, your iPhone takes a
rapid succession of three photographs.
| | 01:45 | One is slightly underexposed, making
everything a little bit darker,
| | 01:49 | one is slightly overexposed, making
everything a little bit brighter,
| | 01:52 | and the third photo is exposed properly
as far as the phone can determine.
| | 01:55 | It then combines the three shots into a
single shot, so the darker and brighter
| | 01:59 | areas are each exposed
enough so they don't lose detail.
| | 02:04 | So, with HDR on, I'll take my shot again,
| | 02:15 | and I'll review the photos.
| | 02:17 | So, as you can see, the sky now has
much more detail, but the tree and ground
| | 02:20 | are still properly exposed, too.
| | 02:22 | Now HDR isn't going to be
appropriate for every situation.
| | 02:26 | In some cases, you might actually want
certain parts of your photo
| | 02:28 | to be under- or overexposed for effect.
| | 02:31 | Also, because the camera is taking
three photos, it's not always great for
| | 02:34 | shooting pictures of people or
other subjects that are moving quickly.
| | 02:38 | As you saw, HDR photos take a little
longer to save than regular photos.
| | 02:41 | So, you don't want to use it if you are trying
to capture a rapid succession of shots.
| | 02:45 | But HDR photos can look incredible
under the right circumstances.
| | 02:48 | And by default, your iPhone saves the single,
properly exposed, non-HDR version
| | 02:52 | of your shot as well, so you can review
both versions and determine
| | 02:55 | which one looks better to you.
| | 02:57 | If you prefer not to save the normal version
of an HDR image, you can go to
| | 03:01 | Settings>Photos & Camera, and here,
slide Keep Normal Photo to off.
| | 03:11 | So, those are the Grid and HDR features
you'll find under Options.
| | 03:15 | There is one other option there as well, Panorama,
| | 03:16 | and we'll take a look atthat in its own movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Shooting panoramas| 00:00 | If you're running iOS 6 on an iPhone 4S or later
or a 5th Generation iPod touch,
| | 00:04 | you can use the new Panorama shooting
feature which allows you to capture
| | 00:08 | incredibly wide or even tall images that go
beyond the capability of a single lens camera.
| | 00:14 | This feature is great for capturing
cityscapes or the view from a hilltop
| | 00:17 | or even a tall tree or building if
you capture a vertical Panorama.
| | 00:21 | Now for several years, there have
been multiple apps available for creating
| | 00:24 | panoramic photos on the iPhone, and I
actually have used and like many of them.
| | 00:27 | But I found that this version built into iOS 6
has been the easiest for me to use,
| | 00:31 | and it produces some of the best results I've seen.
| | 00:34 | Here's how it works.
| | 00:35 | Open the Camera app and tap Options,
then tap Panorama.
| | 00:40 | That places this overlay on
the screen containing an arrow.
| | 00:44 | First, determine if you're going to be moving
the camera from left to right or right to left.
| | 00:48 | Tap the arrow to change its orientation.
| | 00:51 | When you're ready, aim the phone at the
point where you want the photo to start
| | 00:54 | with the arrow pointing in
the direction you want to go.
| | 00:57 | Tap the Camera button to start shooting.
| | 00:59 | Then slowly turn the camera
in the direction of the arrow.
| | 01:03 | What you're aiming for is to keep the
arrow centered on the horizontal line.
| | 01:07 | Move slowly and steadily.
| | 01:08 | If you move too quickly, you'll see
a message telling you to slow down.
| | 01:13 | Behind the scenes, your iPhone is
capturing multiple continuous photos
| | 01:16 | and stitching them together
to create a single image.
| | 01:19 | You can capture a full 240 degrees
this way which can produce some
| | 01:23 | unique looking photos.
| | 01:24 | But you'll probably find this
works best if you get the arrow
| | 01:27 | about halfway across your screen.
| | 01:28 | Tap the Camera button again to stop capturing.
| | 01:31 | To see your results, tap
the Photo Library button.
| | 01:32 | You'll probably want to turn your
iPhone to the Landscape position.
| | 01:36 | Now if you shot the photo by rotating
your phone in place, it's going to be
| | 01:41 | natural to see this sort of
bend or distortion in the image.
| | 01:44 | This is along the lines of what you
would see with a fisheye lens on a camera.
| | 01:47 | It can be a pretty cool effect.
| | 01:49 | But another way to take a
panoramic photo that can reduce this type of
| | 01:51 | distortion is to walk parallel to your subject.
| | 01:55 | So, instead of rotating the phone in place,
start your panorama, and walk sideways
| | 01:59 | keeping the camera pointed straight ahead.
| | 02:02 | The results will look much less distorted.
| | 02:04 | As I mentioned, you can also
take vertical panoramas.
| | 02:08 | Just turn your phone sideways and
decide whether you want to shoot
| | 02:11 | from the bottom up or top down.
| | 02:13 | Shooting from the bottom up is probably
better if you're capturing something like
| | 02:15 | people standing under a
tall tree or a tall building.
| | 02:18 | You have less distortion shooting the
areas that are on the same level as you.
| | 02:22 | But otherwise, this works the same way.
| | 02:25 | Tap the Camera button and
keep the arrow on the centerline.
| | 02:28 | Of course, since you're shooting vertically,
you won't be able to avoid the distortion
| | 02:31 | the higher up you go
unless you know how to levitate.
| | 02:34 | But again, I think the distortion can
produce some really cool looking photos.
| | 02:38 | After shooting a panorama, the
camera reverts back to regular shots.
| | 02:41 | So, if you want to shoot another one
just tap Options, and select Panorama again.
| | 02:45 | That's how to use the Panorama feature of iOS 6.
| | 02:49 | And again, it's available on the 5th Generation
iPod touch and the iPhone 4S and later.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and editing still images| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at how to view and edit
the photos stored on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | Again, photos can be moved to your device
by syncing it through iTunes,
| | 00:07 | which we looked at how to do in Chapter 3,
or you can shoot photos directly with your
| | 00:11 | built-in camera as we saw in a
previous movie in this chapter.
| | 00:14 | You can also save photos you received
via email on your device or by saving them
| | 00:17 | from web pages as we'll see in later chapters.
| | 00:20 | But in this movie, we're going to look
at how to view your photos
| | 00:22 | once they're stored on your device.
| | 00:24 | All of your photos are found by tapping Photos.
| | 00:27 | Initially, your photos are displayed by albums.
| | 00:30 | The first item is the Camera Roll.
| | 00:32 | This album contains all the photos
you've shot with your iPhone's camera or that
| | 00:34 | you've saved from email messages or web pages.
| | 00:38 | Basically, the Camera Roll stores all
the images that were created or stored
| | 00:41 | from your device and that didn't
arrive here by syncing with your computer.
| | 00:44 | If you've never synced photos with your
computer, your Camera Roll will be the
| | 00:47 | only album you find here.
| | 00:49 | If you have synced with your computer though,
you'll find an album called Photo Library.
| | 00:52 | This contains all the photos
you've copied over from your computer.
| | 00:55 | These are the photos found in any of the
individual albums you see below the photo library,
| | 00:59 | and again, these albums are copied over
from your computer when you synced.
| | 01:03 | So, to view the photos in any of
your albums, just tap an album.
| | 01:06 | To view a photo at full size, tap it.
| | 01:09 | Now I currently have my phone in
Portrait orientation and this is a
| | 01:12 | Landscape orientation photo.
| | 01:13 | So, I have a lot of unused
space above and below it.
| | 01:16 | To view the photo at a larger
size, I just rotate my phone.
| | 01:19 | The buttons and controls at the top and
bottom of the screen will disappear on
| | 01:23 | their own after about five seconds,
but you can also single-tap the screen
| | 01:25 | to bring them back, or tap
again to hide them once more.
| | 01:29 | Single-taps show and hide the
controls when you're viewing photos.
| | 01:32 | You can browse through the photos in
this album by flicking left and right.
| | 01:36 | To get a better look at a photo,
you can zoom in on it either
| | 01:38 | by double-tapping it to zoom and then
double-tapping to zoom out again,
| | 01:43 | or you can pinch out and pinch in.
| | 01:46 | Now when you're zoomed in, you can drag
the photo around to look at different areas of it.
| | 01:51 | But note that when you're zoomed in on
a photo, you can't flick to the next or
| | 01:55 | previous photos as easily as
when you're zoomed all the way out.
| | 01:58 | You either have to flick harder or just drag
the image to the side to reveal the next image,
| | 02:02 | and you can see the next image
appears at its default size and not zoomed in.
| | 02:05 | Also notice at the very bottom of the screen
when you can see the controls is a Play button.
| | 02:10 | This is for playing your
photos as an automatic slideshow.
| | 02:14 | On this screen, you can choose what kind of
transition effect you'd like to see between photos.
| | 02:17 | You can see I have five choices.
| | 02:19 | I'll leave Dissolve selected.
| | 02:21 | You can also choose to play any music
you have stored on your device as the
| | 02:24 | soundtrack for your slideshow.
| | 02:26 | I'll leave Music off for
now and tap Start Slideshow.
| | 02:30 | This is a nice way to show your photos
to someone else without having to flick
| | 02:33 | through them all manually.
| | 02:34 | Notice the nice cross-dissolve
transition with each photo fading out as
| | 02:37 | the other one fades in.
| | 02:39 | During the slideshow, you can rotate
the phone as necessary to accommodate
| | 02:42 | portrait and landscape photos, and you
can also stop the slideshow by tapping a picture,
| | 02:46 | which you might want to do to
let your friend take a longer look at it,
| | 02:49 | or if you want to explain how
or where the photo was shot.
| | 02:52 | You can resume the slideshow by
tapping the Play button again.
| | 02:57 | Now you can also control how the
slideshow plays your photos to some extent.
| | 03:00 | I'm going to press the Home button to
close photos for the moment,
| | 03:06 | and now I'll go to Settings>Photos & Camera.
| | 03:12 | And here under Slideshow, you can determine
how long you want each photo to be on screen.
| | 03:16 | You can select 2, 3, 5, 10, or 20 seconds.
| | 03:19 | I would generally stick with
2 or 3 seconds for each photo.
| | 03:22 | It doesn't sound like a lot, but
it's actually a decent amount of time to
[00:03:2548]
view most photos, especially if you have a
lot of photos in your album to get through.
| | 03:30 | The other two options here are Repeat and
Shuffle, which are simple on and off choices.
| | 03:34 | When on, Repeat starts your slideshow
over from the beginning when it reaches
| | 03:37 | the end which might be useful if you
have your iPhone or iPod touch connected to
| | 03:41 | a TV where you are displaying
photos in sort of a Kiosk mode setting.
| | 03:44 | And Shuffle displays the photos
in your album in a random order.
| | 03:47 | I'll leave them both off for now.
| | 03:50 | All right. Let's go back to our Photo Library.
| | 03:52 | To return to your album, tap the screen
and tap the button in the upper left-hand corner.
| | 03:57 | Now if you've ever synced your iPhone
or iPod touch with a Mac,
| | 04:00 | you may also see categories like Events, or
Faces at the bottom of the screen.
| | 04:04 | Events are based on the events created
in iPhoto in which photos are organized
| | 04:07 | into the dates and times
during which they were shot.
| | 04:09 | If you see the Faces Tab, your
photos are organized based
| | 04:12 | on the people who appear in them.
| | 04:13 | This is possible because of iPhoto
and its face recognition capabilities.
| | 04:17 | Now if you sync your iPhone or iPod
touch with a PC, you won't have the events
| | 04:21 | or Faces categories.
| | 04:22 | But you might have Places.
| | 04:24 | Places allows you to view your photos based
on the GPS location of where they were shot.
| | 04:28 | If you've taken photos with your
iPhone's built-in camera and you have Location
| | 04:31 | Services turned on, your photos are
tagged with GPS data, and will appear here.
| | 04:36 | Tapping a pin lets you see all the
photos that were taken at that location.
| | 04:40 | Also, if you sync with a Mac and have
geo-tagged your photos in iPhoto, they
| | 04:44 | will show up here under
Places on your iPhone as well.
| | 04:46 | So, the last thing I want to show you
here is that you can also perform basic
| | 04:49 | edits to your photos
directly here in the Photos app.
| | 04:53 | Start by finding a photo you
want to edit, and select it.
| | 04:56 | Then tap the Edit button.
| | 04:57 | That gives you a handful of
tools at the bottom of the screen.
| | 05:00 | The first tool is the Rotate button.
| | 05:02 | This is useful if you have a photo
that's rotated to the wrong orientation.
| | 05:05 | Sometimes when you take pictures with
your iPhone, the device doesn't register
| | 05:08 | the rotation properly, and you
end up with a sideways picture.
| | 05:12 | All you have to do here is tap the Rotate
button until the picture is right side up.
| | 05:16 | Next is the Enhance button.
| | 05:17 | This is an automatic
enhancement feature that has no settings.
| | 05:20 | It simply examines your photo and
does its best to adjust the brightness,
| | 05:24 | contrast, exposure, and other settings
to make the photo pop a little bit more.
| | 05:28 | Just tap the Enhance button, and in a
second, you should see a change to your image.
| | 05:32 | You can tap the Enhance button again to
remove the effect or to toggle between
| | 05:35 | the original and enhanced version.
| | 05:38 | If you like what you see, tap Save.
| | 05:39 | Now if you are editing an image you
shot with your device, when you tap Save,
| | 05:43 | you're going to save over your original image.
| | 05:45 | So, make sure the edits you've
made are really what you want.
| | 05:48 | But if you're editing a photo in an
album you imported from your computer,
| | 05:51 | you'll be able to save a copy
of the image to your camera roll.
| | 05:54 | That way, you won't change the original photo
and you can always go back to it if you want.
| | 05:58 | But just be aware that saving an
edited photo from your camera roll
| | 06:00 | changes the original image.
| | 06:02 | Let's open up another photo.
| | 06:10 | The next editing tool is the Redeye tool.
| | 06:12 | This is useful for getting rid of those
red demon eyes that are often caused by
| | 06:15 | using the flash when shooting
photos in dark environments.
| | 06:19 | Start by zooming in on the
eyes you want to correct.
| | 06:23 | Then tap the Redeye tool.
| | 06:24 | And as you can see here, it
just tells me to tap each red eye.
| | 06:27 | And just like that, they'll
be automatically corrected.
| | 06:29 | You can also tap the eyes again to
undo the effect if the effect doesn't
| | 06:33 | look right to you, or if you just
want to have this weird one fixed eye and
| | 06:37 | one nonfixed eye look.
| | 06:38 | Also, the Enhance button will automatically
remove redeye as part of its enhancements.
| | 06:42 | I'll tap Apply.
| | 06:43 | The last tool is the Crop tool,
and as its name implies, this is for
| | 06:48 | cropping down your photos.
| | 06:49 | Selecting it puts a grid on your photo
and you can drag any corner to resize the
| | 06:53 | grid to any proportion.
| | 06:54 | The area of the photo inside the
grid is the area that will remain once
| | 06:58 | you finish your crop.
| | 07:00 | You also have the option of tapping
Constrain to keep your grid locked into
| | 07:03 | specific proportions.
| | 07:05 | Maybe in this case, I want to
make my photo a perfect square.
| | 07:08 | So, I just got the Crop Grid to the
approximate size I wanted and
| | 07:11 | then I constrained it by making it a square.
| | 07:13 | When I'm happy with the way it looks,
I tap Crop, and again I can tap Save.
| | 07:17 | So, all of the changes I performed
to this image were only saved
| | 07:20 | once I tapped the Save button.
| | 07:21 | I could always undo them or
cancel my changes before saving.
| | 07:25 | That's how to work with the photos
in the Photo App of your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing your wallpaper| 00:00 | One thing you might want to do with
the photos you've shot or copied to your device
| | 00:04 | is to set them up as your wallpaper photos.
| | 00:06 | The wallpaper photo is what you see when
you press the Home or Sleep/Wake button
| | 00:09 | while the phone is locked and it's also
what you see behind your app icons
| | 00:12 | when you're looking at your Home screen.
| | 00:14 | This can both be the same
image or two different images.
| | 00:17 | In this case, my phone's lock screen is
set up with this image of water ripples
| | 00:20 | that comes as part of the set of
included wallpaper images,
| | 00:24 | and my Home screen has the same background.
| | 00:26 | The iPhone and iPod touch come with a very
nice collection of beautiful wallpaper photos,
| | 00:30 | but if you'd like to express a bit
of your own personality,
| | 00:32 | it's very simple to use one
of your own photos instead.
| | 00:35 | Let's go back to that lock screen.
| | 00:38 | Notice when wake it, we see the
time displayed at the top of the screen
| | 00:41 | overlaying a portion of my image, and
at the bottom of the screen we have the
| | 00:44 | Slide to Unlock slider, and that
also covers a portion of the image.
| | 00:47 | We'll see why this matters in just a moment.
| | 00:50 | But for now, I'm going to unlock my phone
and go to Settings>Brightness & Wallpaper,
| | 00:54 | and here under Wallpaper,
you'll see thumbnail representations
| | 00:57 | of both your Lock Screen and Home Screen, so
you can see what your current wallpapers are.
| | 01:02 | So, we can see the water ripples are
assigned to the lock screen and the same image
| | 01:05 | is being used for the home screen.
| | 01:07 | In any case, it doesn't matter what you
tap here, just tap one of the thumbnails
| | 01:09 | to get into your wallpaper picker.
| | 01:11 | Here's where you'll find the built-in
wallpaper images by tapping Wallpaper,
| | 01:15 | but again, if none of these suits your
taste, you can go back and access your
| | 01:18 | entire Camera Roll and Photo Albums
exactly as they appear when you tap
| | 01:21 | Photos on your Home screen.
| | 01:23 | Just tap on Album or your Camera Roll
to select it, and then you can browse
| | 01:25 | through to find a photo you
want to use for your wallpaper.
| | 01:29 | Once I select the photo, I
see this Move and Scale message.
| | 01:32 | Here is where I can pinch out to zoom
in on the photo, or pinch in to zoom out,
| | 01:36 | and notice this is a landscape photo.
| | 01:38 | Since the iPhone screen is in portrait
orientation when you wake it up,
| | 01:41 | you might want to stick with the portrait-
oriented photo, but you can pick a
| | 01:48 | landscape photo like this one and
adjust its scale and positioning if you like.
| | 01:51 | laid out randomly over my photo.
| | 01:51 | Now note that the Move and Scale and
the Cancel and Set buttons aren't just
| | 01:53 | These areas represent the items that we will
be covering the photo when I wake my phone.
| | 01:57 | As we saw a few moments ago, normally
you have the time and date
| | 02:00 | at the top of the screen and
the Slide to Unlock bar at the bottom.
| | 02:03 | So, these areas you're looking at now
show you which portions of your wallpaper
| | 02:06 | image will be partially
obscured when you unlock your phone.
| | 02:09 | So, adjust the size and positioning of
your image to make sure you're seeing the
| | 02:12 | part you want to see.
| | 02:13 | When you're done, tap Set.
| | 02:15 | Now I'm prompted to assign this as
either my lock screen or my home screen's
| | 02:18 | wallpaper or I can choose Set Both
to use the same image for both areas.
| | 02:22 | I'll choose Set Lock Screen,
and that's all there it is to it.
| | 02:26 | I'll put my phone to sleep now and when
I press the Home button to wake it up,
| | 02:30 | I see my new custom wallpaper image.
| | 02:33 | If I want to set a different wallpaper
for the home screen, I'll just repeat the
| | 02:36 | same process, but choose Set Home
Screen, instead of Set Lock Screen.
| | 02:40 | So as you can see, it's very easy
to set one of your own photos as your wallpaper.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Shooting video| 00:00 | If you have an iPhone 3GS or later
or fourth generation iPod touch or later,
| | 00:04 | you have the ability to shoot video as
well as still photos with the Camera app.
| | 00:08 | And we're not talking grainy low-resolution
video either, the iPhone 4 shoots
| | 00:13 | in high definition 720p video and the 4S,
the 5, and the fifth generation iPod touch
| | 00:18 | shoot at a full 1080p high-definition.
| | 00:22 | The controls for shooting video are
pretty much identical to shooting still photos.
| | 00:24 | Just start up the Camera app, but be
sure to tap the button in the lower
| | 00:28 | right-hand corner to slide the
selector to the video camera icon.
| | 00:32 | The icon in the shutter button also
turns into a red dot, reminiscent of the
| | 00:35 | tiny red light on most camcorders
to let you know you're recording.
| | 00:39 | All you have to do now is frame up your subject.
| | 00:42 | As with still photos, you can shoot
videos in either portrait or landscape mode.
| | 00:47 | The iPhone will know what you're
shooting in and keep the video right side up
| | 00:50 | when you play it back later.
| | 00:52 | But bear in mind that most standard
videos are wider than they are tall.
| | 00:55 | So while shooting in portrait mode
might not seem odd when you're recording,
| | 00:58 | it looks strange to watch a video that's
taller than it is wide later on your
| | 01:03 | computer and even more so on a TV.
| | 01:04 | So unless you have a specific reason for
shooting vertically,
| | 01:06 | flip your phone to the horizontal position.
| | 01:09 | Also as with shooting still photos,
you can tap on the area of importance
| | 01:12 | in your frame to help the iPhone set the
exposure and color balance before you record.
| | 01:16 | Although the iPhone will continue to
evaluate the scene as you shoot and move
| | 01:20 | around and attempt to
keep things properly exposed.
| | 01:24 | Also, on the iPhone 5 and fifth-generation
iPod touch,
| | 01:27 | the image you see is the entirety
of what you're recording.
| | 01:30 | On older devices if the video image
is filling your entire screen,
| | 01:33 | this is actually a zoomed in view
of what you're recording.
| | 01:37 | Double-tap the screen so you can see
what you're capturing in its actual
| | 01:40 | 16x9 wide-screen aspect ratio.
| | 01:43 | All right, so to shoot a video just tap
the Record button to start recording.
| | 01:47 | You hear a tiny ping sound and the
red dot on the Shutter button lights up.
| | 01:50 | You also get a time indicator in the
lower right-hand corner so you can see
| | 01:54 | how long you've been shooting.
| | 01:56 | When you're done recording
just tap the Shutter button again.
| | 01:59 | Your video is moved to your Camera Roll
just like a still photo
| | 02:02 | and you can immediately shoot
another video again if need be.
| | 02:05 | To review the footage you've
shot just tap the thumbnail.
| | 02:09 | In here, tap the Play button to watch the video.
| | 02:12 | This is also where you can edit or trim
your footage, but we'll look at how to
| | 02:15 | do that in an upcoming movie.
| | 02:18 | Now if you're using an iPhone or a fifth-generation
iPod touch, you have the option
| | 02:21 | of using the built-in flash as a light,
if the scene you're shooting is too dark.
| | 02:26 | If you leave the flash setting to auto, your iPhone
will determine if it needs to turn on the light.
| | 02:31 | You can also choose on or off to force
the flash to turn on or off while shooting.
| | 02:35 | Also remember you have the front-facing
camera as well, which you can choose
| | 02:38 | to record video with by tapping the camera
icon to toggle to the front-facing camera.
| | 02:42 | This is a nice way to shoot videos of yourself
without having to worry if you're in the frame or not.
| | 02:48 | On the iPhone 5 and the fifth-generation
iPod touch, this is an HD 720p camera,
| | 02:53 | which is a lower quality than the rear
camera but it still looks pretty great.
| | 02:57 | And obviously you can't use the flash
with the front-facing camera
| | 03:00 | since the flash is on the other side of the phone.
| | 03:02 | But that's the gist of how you shoot video
with your iPhone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing and editing video| 00:00 | So we've seen that you can shoot some
pretty good quality video with the iPhone
| | 00:04 | and iPod touch's built in camera.
| | 00:06 | Not only that, but you can also
edit your videos to some extent.
| | 00:09 | So in this movie we'll take a look at
the video editing process on the iPhone.
| | 00:12 | First open up Photos and
locate the video you want to edit.
| | 00:16 | I'm going to rotate to landscape orientation
and then I'll tap the big Play button
| | 00:19 | in the center of the opening frame to play the video.
| | 00:23 | It's important to review your footage
so you can get an idea of which parts
| | 00:26 | you want to get rid of.
| | 00:29 | Now when you edit a video on the iPhone
you're pretty much limited to trimming,
| | 00:32 | meaning you can trim footage off the
beginning or end of your clip,
| | 00:35 | but you can't remove portions of the
video within the clip itself.
| | 00:38 | So if a random stranger walks through
your vacation video in the middle of shooting,
| | 00:42 | you can't get rid of him
without losing all the footage that came
| | 00:44 | before him or all the
footage that comes after him.
| | 00:46 | If you need to do that kind of editing,
you need to edit your video in a
| | 00:49 | full-fledged video editing program on
your computer or you can purchase
| | 00:53 | the iMovie app for iOS devices from the App Store.
| | 00:56 | But in this case let's say I want to
trim off the first couple of seconds
| | 00:58 | of the beginning of this clip and
a few seconds off the end.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to tap the screen
once to bring up my controls.
| | 01:03 | Notice this bar of tiny thumbnails
across the top of the screen.
| | 01:06 | These thumbnails are images from your video.
| | 01:08 | And if you look closely, you'll see there
are handles on either end of the thumbnail bar.
| | 01:12 | To trim the video all you have to do is
drag one or both of the handles in,
| | 01:15 | so I'll drag the beginning handle in a few seconds.
| | 01:18 | Now if you want finer grain control
over where the trim happens, get the handle
| | 01:20 | to approximately where you want to make
the trim and then hold down on the trim handle.
| | 01:25 | Notice this stretches out the thumbnail so
you could see more frames and get a better edit.
| | 01:29 | Now when you drag horizontally you don't
jump quite as quickly through the frames.
| | 01:33 | Now I'll do the same and edit a
few seconds off the end of the clip.
| | 01:39 | Tap the play button to check your edit to
make sure the trims fall where you want them.
| | 01:57 | Actually, I think I'll trim my end in a little bit more.
| | 02:02 | We'll take another look.
| | 02:12 | Now once you're happy with the
edit you can tap the Trim button.
| | 02:15 | This gives you the option of trimming
the original which will permanently delete
| | 02:19 | those edited sections from the clip with
no way of getting them back,
| | 02:22 | or you can tap Save as New Clip to generate a
copy of this clip with your edits applied.
| | 02:26 | That way you get to keep the original
unedited version as well as your edited version.
| | 02:30 | This might be useful if you have say a
vacation video and you want to send one
| | 02:34 | version to your friends and a
slightly edited version to your parents.
| | 02:36 | So I'll tap Save as New Clip
| | 02:41 | Now if I go back to my photo album,
| | 02:43 | I'll see the new version of my video sitting
here and as you can see it's shorter
| | 02:46 | than the original clip because I've trimmed it.
| | 02:48 | So that's how you can edit the videos
you shoot on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking screenshots| 00:00 | Sometimes the photo you want to shoot on your
iPhone or iPod touch is of the screen itself.
| | 00:05 | Maybe your device is acting strangely,
maybe you just hit the high score
| | 00:09 | in a game you're playing and you want
evidence of your achievement to send to friends.
| | 00:12 | Maybe you want to use a still frame
from a movie or TV show you're watching
| | 00:15 | as your phone's wallpaper.
| | 00:16 | The point is that it's very easy to
take a screen shot of whatever
| | 00:19 | is on your iPhone or iPod touch's screen.
| | 00:21 | Let's say I'm currently out here in
sunny California where the weather
| | 00:23 | is warm and pleasant, meanwhile back
home on the East Coast my friends are
| | 00:27 | freezing in the cold and snow.
| | 00:30 | I want to send them a photo of the
current temperature out here,
| | 00:31 | which I'm sure they will enjoy seeing.
| | 00:33 | I'll open up the Weather app
and the weather looks fine.
| | 00:36 | So to take a screen shot hold down the Sleep/
Wake button and then press the Home button.
| | 00:44 | The screen flashes white, you hear the
little camera shutter sound effect and that's it.
| | 00:48 | Now alternately you can also press
the Home button first and then press
| | 00:51 | the Sleep/Wake button to take the shot.
| | 00:53 | As long as both buttons are being
pressed down at the same point,
| | 00:55 | the screen shot will happen.
| | 00:57 | Okay, so to see my screen shot I'll go
to my Photo library,
| | 01:02 | into my Camera Roll and here's my screen shot.
| | 01:05 | And at this point I could email this
photo, or send it via a text message,
| | 01:09 | or I could grab the image when I
connect my device to my computer.
| | 01:11 | Basically I now have a nice sharp image
of my screen that I can do anything with.
| | 01:15 | And that's how you take a still image
of your iPhone or iPod touch's screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing photos and video| 00:00 | Being able to store and view photos and videos
on your iPhone or iPod touch's Photo library
| | 00:05 | is great because it gives you immediate access
to them to show friends or other people.
| | 00:09 | But there will be times when the people
you want to show your content to
| | 00:11 | aren't standing right next to you so you
can't just hold up your device in front of them.
| | 00:15 | So in this movie we'll take a look at the options
you have for remotely sharing your photos and videos.
| | 00:19 | Start by opening Photos and then
opening your Camera Roll or the album
| | 00:23 | containing the photo you want to share;
| | 00:25 | then tap the photo just selected.
| | 00:27 | Next tap the button in the lower left-
hand corner, that's the share button and
| | 00:30 | it reveals all the sharing options.
| | 00:33 | We've already seen some of these in action
but let's walk through some of them here.
| | 00:36 | Mail creates a new email
message with the photo attached.
| | 00:40 | All you have to do here is enter an
address in the To field, type a Subject and
| | 00:44 | if you want some text in the body
of the message and then send it off.
| | 00:48 | I'll just Cancel that and
I'll get rid of the Draft.
| | 00:52 | If you're on an iPhone or if you're
using iMessage on an iPod touch,
| | 00:55 | you can also send the photo as a
multimedia message by tapping Message.
| | 01:00 | That opens up a New Message screen
where you can enter the recipient's phone number
| | 01:03 | or tap the plus symbol to select the person
from your contacts to send this image to.
| | 01:08 | Again I'll just Cancel here.
| | 01:11 | Next is Photo Stream, a new feature to iOS 6.
| | 01:14 | I'll be showing you how to use this in
its own movie later,
| | 01:17 | but basically it allows you to share an album
of images privately with specific people.
| | 01:21 | Then we have the Twitter and Facebook
buttons which are for tweeting your photo
| | 01:24 | to your Twitter feed or posting
your photo to your Facebook account.
| | 01:27 | We saw how to do this back in Chapter One.
| | 01:29 | Next is Assign to Contact which we
also saw earlier and that let's you attach
| | 01:33 | the image to one of your contacts so
that when they call you
| | 01:36 | the photo you've selected will show up.
| | 01:38 | And I showed you how to print to an
AirPrint-enabled printer in Chapter 1,
| | 01:40 | using this Print button, so feel
free to check back there for a review.
| | 01:44 | Copy, we also saw in action, but again
this lets you copy the image and paste it
| | 01:48 | into another app like a mail message or
some other photo editing application you
| | 01:52 | might have installed.
| | 01:53 | Finally we have Use as Wallpaper
and we saw how to set a wallpaper up
| | 01:56 | a few movies ago in this chapter by going to
Settings and then Brightness and Wallpaper.
| | 02:01 | But you can also set your wallpaper
directly from here by tapping Use as Wallpaper,
| | 02:04 | you get the same Move and Scale interface
we previously saw and you could
| | 02:07 | tap Set to set the image to your
Lock screen or your Home screen or both.
| | 02:11 | Again I'll just cancel for now.
| | 02:14 | So those are the sharing options for photos.
| | 02:16 | Let's go back to the album
and find a video to share.
| | 02:19 | I'll select this video I edited
previously, here we tap the same Share button
| | 02:23 | in the lower left-hand corner,
but notice we have fewer options.
| | 02:26 | You can email the video, send it in a
text message and because this is a video
| | 02:31 | we also have the option to
publish the video on YouTube.
| | 02:33 | You do have to have an existing YouTube
account to do this, but once you log in
| | 02:38 | you can enter a title and description
and you can also create tags to make your
| | 02:40 | video easier to find as
well as select a category.
| | 02:44 | I'll just cancel that for now again.
| | 02:46 | So those are most of the options you
have to share photos and videos,
| | 02:49 | but you might have noticed that each of these
methods only lets you share one photo
| | 02:52 | or video at a time.
| | 02:53 | There maybe times when you want to
attach several photos to an email.
| | 02:56 | To do so go to the album
containing the photos you want to send.
| | 03:00 | Then tap the Edit button in
the upper right-hand corner.
| | 03:02 | This reveals some buttons
at the bottom of the screen.
| | 03:04 | Right now I'm looking at
Share, Add To and Delete.
| | 03:07 | If you're viewing photos in an album,
the Delete button will be labeled Remove,
| | 03:11 | but in your Camera Roll it's labeled Delete.
| | 03:13 | So I select a couple of photos here,
now the Share button opens up many of the
| | 03:17 | same options we were just looking at.
| | 03:20 | Add To lets you add selected photos to
an existing or new album on your device,
| | 03:25 | and we'll look at how to
create albums in an upcoming movie.
| | 03:28 | And again if you have your Camera
Roll selected as your album, you'll see a
| | 03:30 | Delete button down here, but you can't
delete photos from your regular albums,
| | 03:34 | so this button will be labeled Remove.
| | 03:35 | But if you created the album on your
computer and synced it to your iPhone;
| | 03:38 | you won't see a Remove button here at
all, you'll just see Share and Add To.
| | 03:42 | So just start tapping the
images you want to send.
| | 03:45 | Now if I only have one image selected and I
tap share, notice I get more options there.
| | 03:49 | But as soon as I select more than one
image,
| | 03:52 | I loose the buttons to Tweet,
Assign to Contact and Use as Wallpaper.
| | 03:56 | Those options can only be
used with single images.
| | 04:00 | If I select more than five
photos, I lose the Mail button.
| | 04:05 | So you will lose certain options as you
select more thumbnails
| | 04:07 | or if you include movies in your selection.
| | 04:09 | Let me show you something else
about emailing photos in particular.
| | 04:11 | I'm going to select five images which is
again the limit to the number of photos
| | 04:15 | you can have selected and
still see the Mail button.
| | 04:17 | Now as a sidebar you can get around
this by selecting more images, then tapping
| | 04:21 | the Copy button and pasting the image
into your mail message,
| | 04:24 | but let's stick with the mail button for now.
| | 04:26 | So that opens a new email
message with the photos attached.
| | 04:29 | Let's fill in the To address so I can
show what happens when you send your email.
| | 04:35 | I'll fill in a Subject as well.
| | 04:39 | And, as you can see, the photos are attached.
| | 04:43 | Okay let's tap Send.
| | 04:45 | So now mail is telling me my message is
going to be 13.2 MB in size
| | 04:50 | and this is a great feature because I can see
if my files are going to be too large
| | 04:52 | before I actually send them off.
| | 04:54 | And as you can see we have the option to
optimize the images right from here
| | 04:57 | and each option includes an
estimate of the approximate file size.
| | 05:00 | So if, for example, you're just sending
a snapshot to a friend and you know
| | 05:02 | they're probably not going to print it out,
you can just send them the Small or Medium size.
| | 05:07 | If you want them to be able to see more
detail, or have a higher resolution for printing,
| | 05:11 | you can choose Large or Actual size.
| | 05:13 | I'll just choose Medium and off it goes.
| | 05:18 | Now if you select more than five photos
and copy and paste them into a mail message,
| | 05:21 | you'll get the same ability to
adjust their size which you'll probably
| | 05:24 | have to do if you're planning
on emailing a lot of photos.
| | 05:27 | So those are the options for sharing your photos
and it works pretty much the same way
| | 05:30 | for sharing video files, but
you can only have one video file selected
| | 05:33 | in order to use the share button.
| | 05:35 | If I were to tap Edit and select two
videos, notice I get no options there.
| | 05:41 | But with one video selected I can choose
to mail the video, send it via message,
| | 05:45 | or upload it to YouTube.
| | 05:47 | And those are the options for
sharing your photos and videos.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Geotagging your photos| 00:00 | At this point we should be aware that the iPhone
has both a camera and built-in GPS capabilities.
| | 00:06 | This combination of features allows you
to do what's called geotagging your photos.
| | 00:10 | Essentially this means that when you
shoot a photo with your iPhone,
| | 00:13 | it can encode your location information
into that photo so you can later
| | 00:16 | use one of any photo management
applications on your computer
| | 00:19 | to view and display your location information.
| | 00:22 | But in order to geotag your photos
you have to allow it to do so.
| | 00:25 | Now the first time you open your Camera app
you probably saw a message saying
| | 00:28 | that the camera wants to use
your location information
| | 00:30 | and you have the choice to allow or not allow that.
| | 00:32 | In order to geotag your photos you
have to give the Camera app
| | 00:34 | permission to acquire your location information.
| | 00:37 | Regardless of whether you allow it or
disallow it at the time, the place to go
| | 00:41 | to check your location preferences is
in Settings>Privacy>Location Services.
| | 00:47 | And in here make sure Location Services
is set to On and then make sure Location
| | 00:51 | Services for the Camera app
specifically has been turned on.
| | 00:54 | Now just because you have location
services turned on doesn't mean
| | 00:57 | your iPhone will be able to the geotag
all the photos you shoot.
| | 00:59 | As we'll see in Chapter 9, several
different factors contribute
| | 01:03 | to whether or not the iPhone can get
an accurate read on your location including
| | 01:06 | the quality of your cellular reception, the
presence of any nearby Wi-Fi networks
| | 01:10 | and whether you're inside or outdoors.
| | 01:12 | But if your iPhone is able to figure out your
location it will geotag the photos you shoot.
| | 01:16 | And you can see your photos based on
the location they were shot by going into
| | 01:19 | your Photo library and selecting Places.
| | 01:23 | Here you'll see pins on a map
indicating where you shot photos.
| | 01:26 | Tap a pin to see all the
photos shot in that location.
| | 01:31 | But what about the photos you didn't shoot
with your iPhone that aren't geotagged?
| | 01:34 | Can you still organize them by places?
Yes you can.
| | 01:36 | For example, here on the Mac I have
iPhoto open and here are some shots
| | 01:41 | I took with my iPhone.
| | 01:42 | I just need to select an image, open the
Info pane
| | 01:47 | and the map is displayed with the location
of my photo marked with a pin.
| | 01:50 | iPhoto also has the Places feature,
which lets you sort, manage,
| | 01:55 | and view your images based on their location.
| | 01:59 | If you're on Windows you can use a
program like the free Picasa from Google
| | 02:02 | to manage your photos.
| | 02:04 | Here I can see which photos have been
geotagged by the little geotag icon
| | 02:07 | in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 02:08 | If I select one these photos and then
click the Places panel,
| | 02:14 | I'll again see a map showing me
where that photo was taken.
| | 02:16 | This is really just a small sampling;
| | 02:18 | there are dozens of other photo
management applications out there
| | 02:20 | that support geotag information.
| | 02:22 | So if you want to keep a record of
where your photos were shot,
| | 02:25 | just make sure Location Services are turned on,
on your iPhone.
| | 02:28 | Now on that note let me
show you one more cool trick.
| | 02:30 | Now your iPhone may not be your primary
camera, although these days it's turning
| | 02:33 | into the primary camera for many people.
| | 02:35 | But if you have a dedicated digital camera
that you use to shoot the majority of your photos,
| | 02:39 | unless you bought a model
that includes geotagging capabilities,
| | 02:42 | the photos you shoot on
your camera won't be geotagged.
| | 02:44 | Here is where the iPhone can help out.
| | 02:46 | Any time you're out and about shooting
photos with your regular camera,
| | 02:49 | take a shot with your iPhone, too.
That way you'll have the location data
| | 02:53 | stored on your iPhone's photo.
| | 02:54 | Then import both your iPhone photo and
your regular digital camera photos
| | 02:57 | into your photo editing application,
like Picasa in this case.
| | 03:01 | Here in Picasa, select the photo you
shot with your iPhone, the one that has
| | 03:05 | the geotag information, and then hold
down Shift or Ctrl and select all the
| | 03:08 | non-geotagged photos you shot with your
regular camera that were shot in the same location.
| | 03:17 | Then go to the tools menu and
choose Geotag>Geotag with Google Earth.
| | 03:25 | Now this does require that you also
have the free Google Earth application
| | 03:28 | installed which you can download from Google.
| | 03:30 | Google Earth will then zoom in to the
source photo's geotag location,
| | 03:34 | and right here we see a satellite photo of, in
this case Shibuya Crossing in Tokyo.
| | 03:37 | Notice this dialog box that pops up in
the lower right-hand corner telling me to
| | 03:41 | geotag a photo by navigating to
the location where I took the photo.
| | 03:45 | So you can geotag photos by hand, but
since I had one photo selected that was
| | 03:49 | already geotagged, Google Earth
brought me right to this location.
| | 03:52 | Now all I have to do is click Geotag All,
| | 03:57 | and you can see Google Earth zooms out a little bit
| | 04:01 | and now if I go back to Picasa,
I can see all of these photos have
| | 04:07 | now been geotagged with that same
information that came from the original photo.
| | 04:11 | Now if you're using iPhoto on a Mac,
start by selecting one of your photos that
| | 04:15 | has been geotagged, like this
one here, and then choose Edit>Copy.
| | 04:20 | Then find the photos that were taken
near the same location that haven't
| | 04:23 | been geotagged, like this one here,
and choose Edit>Paste Location
| | 04:29 | and you can see that adds that same location
to that photo,
| | 04:31 | and you can continue this process for any
other photos that haven't been geotagged
| | 04:35 | that you do have the geotag information for.
| | 04:36 | Now if you use other photo management
software you'll have to dig around to see
| | 04:40 | if it supports copying location information,
but as you can see it's pretty easy to do
| | 04:43 | in programs like iPhoto and Picasa.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating albums| 00:00 | If your iPhone has become your primary camera,
you probably have dozens if not hundreds
| | 00:04 | or thousands of photos, documenting
all kinds of events and activities,
| | 00:08 | and sometimes you like to show your
friends photos from certain events without
| | 00:11 | having to navigate through all the
other photos in your Camera Roll.
| | 00:14 | The simple solution is to create an album.
| | 00:16 | Just go into Photos and open up your
Camera Roll or any other album containing
| | 00:20 | the photos you want to add to your new album.
| | 00:22 | Tap the Edit button in the upper right-hand
corner and then just tap each photo
| | 00:26 | you want to add to your album.
| | 00:29 | Once you've selected your photos, tap Add To.
| | 00:32 | Now if you've previously created an
album on your device you'll have the
| | 00:35 | option here to add to one of those
existing albums, but the album has to have
| | 00:39 | been created on your device, you can't add to
albums that you've synced from your computer.
| | 00:42 | So in this case I haven't yet created
any albums on this device,
| | 00:45 | so I only have the button to create a new album.
| | 00:48 | So I'll tap Add to New Album, I'm
asked to give it a name,
| | 00:53 | and now I have a brand-new album containing
just the photos that I had selected.
| | 00:56 | And the next time I want to share these
photos with someone, I can open up this album
| | 01:00 | instead of browsing through my entire Camera Roll.
| | 01:04 | I can continue adding to this album at anytime.
| | 01:06 | I can go back to my Camera Roll, tap Edit,
select a couple more photos, tap Add To
| | 01:15 | and you'll notice this time I can
choose to add to an existing album.
| | 01:19 | Select that, select my Japan album and you
can see now those photos have been added.
| | 01:27 | I can also delete photos from an album
by tapping the Edit button while in the album,
| | 01:31 | selecting a photo and then tapping Remove.
| | 01:34 | Notice that this only removes the photo
from the album and not from the device itself.
| | 01:39 | If you want to get rid of a photo
entirely you have to go back to the original
| | 01:42 | in your Camera Roll and delete it from there.
| | 01:44 | Be aware though that editing a photo in an album
changes the original in your Camera Roll,
| | 01:48 | so just keep in mind that you're not editing
a copy of the photo in your album,
| | 01:51 | you're editing the one and only original.
| | 01:53 | You can also delete an entire album
all at once by going back to your main
| | 01:56 | album listing, tapping Edit and then
tapping the red button next to the album
| | 02:00 | and then hitting Delete.
| | 02:02 | But you'll only be able to delete
albums that you've created on your device.
| | 02:05 | To remove albums you've synced from
your computer, you have to go into iTunes,
| | 02:08 | select your phone or iPod, then go into
photos and unsync the album from there.
| | 02:12 | But that's how to create and work
with albums directly on your iOS device.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Shared Photo Stream| 00:00 | If you've signed up for a free
or paid iCloud account, you have
| | 00:03 | access to a feature called Photo Stream.
| | 00:05 | Now there are actually two features
that have Photo Stream in their name.
| | 00:09 | There's your Photo Stream and there's
something called a Shared Photo Stream.
| | 00:12 | Let's take a look at both of them here.
| | 00:13 | Now the one that's called Photo
Stream is an iCloud feature that
| | 00:16 | automatically syncs the photos that
you take on your iOS device so that they
| | 00:20 | appear on your other iOS devices.
| | 00:22 | So for example if you own both an
iPhone and an iPod touch and you shoot some
| | 00:26 | photos on your iPhone, those photos
will automatically show up on your iPod
| | 00:30 | touch and vice versa.
| | 00:31 | Photo Stream also works on iPads, the
second generation Apple TV and later,
| | 00:35 | and in iPhoto and Aperture for the Mac.
| | 00:37 | If you're on Windows you can set up
Photo Stream by downloading the iCloud
| | 00:40 | Control panel available at
apple.com/icloud/setup/pc.html.
| | 00:47 | Okay, so to turn on Photo Stream on your iOS
device go to Settings>iCloud and Photo Stream.
| | 00:57 | And here I slide the My
Photo Stream switch to On.
| | 01:01 | And then do the same thing on any other iOS
devices you want your photos to appear in.
| | 01:04 | Once it's on, any photos you shoot
will automatically be added to your Photo
| | 01:07 | Stream whenever your device is
connected to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 01:10 | You can see which photos have been
uploaded by going to your Photos app and
| | 01:14 | tapping the Photo Stream button that
now appears at the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:17 | I don't have any photos in here yet
since I haven't shot any since turning on
| | 01:21 | Photo Stream but this is
where they'll be on each device.
| | 01:24 | Just so you can see how this works, I
have a friend here in the studio with an
| | 01:27 | iPad on which we also have Photo Stream
enabled through the same iCloud account.
| | 01:31 | So I'm going to ask him to take a photo
now and in a few seconds we should see
| | 01:35 | the photo shot on the iPad appear
here on my iPhone since both devices are
| | 01:38 | currently connected to a Wi-Fi network.
| | 01:41 | And there it is, pretty cool, right.
| | 01:43 | I can tap it and I can view the
photo that was just taken on the iPad.
| | 01:48 | By the way just to be clear, your
devices don't have to be on the same
| | 01:51 | Wi-Fi network either.
| | 01:52 | As long as your devices are connected to
the Internet the photos will be synced.
| | 01:55 | So if I'm in California with my iPhone
and my iPad is back home on the East Coast,
| | 01:59 | the photos will still be downloaded
to my iPad as long as it's online.
| | 02:02 | And this does only work on Wi-Fi, photos
won't sync over your iPhone's cellular connection
| | 02:06 | so you won't eat up your monthly data plan.
| | 02:09 | Also on iOS devices the most recent 1000
photos will appear in your Photo Stream.
| | 02:14 | If you want to make sure a copy of
the photo stays here on your device,
| | 02:18 | tap Edit, select the photos you want to keep
and then tap Share and Save to Camera Roll.
| | 02:23 | If you're running Photo Stream on your
Mac or PC, you have a lot more storage
| | 02:26 | space there so all photos in the Photo
Stream stay on your computer
| | 02:29 | and won't be deleted unless you delete them yourself.
| | 02:31 | Speaking of deleting images, you can
delete items from your Photo Stream
| | 02:34 | by tapping Edit, selecting the
photo and then tapping Delete.
| | 02:38 | Once you tapped Delete Photo, the
photo will then be removed from
| | 02:42 | the Photo Stream on all of your devices.
| | 02:44 | Be aware though that deleting a photo
from your Photo Stream only removes it
| | 02:47 | from the Photo Stream.
| | 02:48 | The original image will still
be in your device's Camera Roll.
| | 02:51 | So for example that photo I just
deleted is no longer in the Photo Stream
| | 02:54 | on my iPhone or the iPad that took it,
but the original photo itself is still
| | 02:58 | on the iPad's Camera Roll.
| | 02:59 | So you can keep your original where
it is if you want to maintain a copy
| | 03:02 | on the original device, or you can go
into your Camera Roll and permanently
| | 03:05 | delete it from there.
| | 03:07 | Okay, so that's the Photo Stream which
is mainly for sharing your photos across
| | 03:10 | multiple devices for your own use.
| | 03:12 | It's really convenient if you
like being able to access all of your
| | 03:14 | photos without having to manually transfer
them from device to device or to your computer.
| | 03:19 | Now you can also take advantage of a
feature called a Shared Photo Stream.
| | 03:22 | A Shared Photo Stream is like a regular
Photo Stream except, as you might have
| | 03:25 | guessed, you can share
this photo stream with others.
| | 03:28 | It's a quick and easy way to share an
album of photos with someone directly
| | 03:30 | from your iOS device.
| | 03:33 | To turn this on go back into
Settings>iCloud>Photo Stream
| | 03:39 | and here turn on Shared Photo Streams.
| | 03:41 | Note that you don't have to have your
personal Photo Stream turned on to do this.
| | 03:45 | Once you have it turned on go back to
your Photos app
| | 03:49 | and here make sure that Photo Stream is selected.
| | 03:51 | You can create multiple Photo Streams
for whatever occasion or use you like.
| | 03:55 | Maybe you want to create a stream of
vacation photos to share with certain friends.
| | 03:58 | Here you can tap the plus (+) button,
then either start typing the names of the
| | 04:01 | people you want to share this photo
stream with
| | 04:06 | or use the plus (+) button here
to browse through your contacts.
| | 04:10 | Next give this Photo Stream a name.
| | 04:14 | You also have the option
here to create a public website.
| | 04:17 | Doing so allows you to send people a
URL or web address for the Photo Stream
| | 04:21 | so they can access your stream from a web browser.
| | 04:24 | You might want to do this if certain
people you want to share with
| | 04:27 | don't have iOS devices or if you don't
have the email address for everyone you
| | 04:30 | want to share with. Then tap Create.
| | 04:34 | Your Shared Photo Stream shows up
immediately, but I don't have any photos
| | 04:37 | in this stream yet so I'll go back
to my Camera Roll
| | 04:41 | and I'll tap Edit to select some photos,
| | 04:49 | and by the way you can only add photos
and not videos to Photo Streams.
| | 04:53 | Then I'll tap Share and select Photo Stream,
| | 04:58 | and here I'll select the Japan Trip
Photo Stream I just created.
| | 05:01 | If I want to I can add a comment
about these photos, and I'll tap Post.
| | 05:05 | So the people I sent the invite to
will receive an email with a link to
| | 05:10 | subscribe to this Photo
Stream from their iOS devices.
| | 05:13 | Now again, if you want to share the
stream with someone who doesn't have
| | 05:16 | iCloud or an iOS device, go back to Photo Streams
| | 05:21 | and tap the blue arrow next to your shared stream.
| | 05:22 | Here if you've enabled Public Website,
you can see the address for your site
| | 05:25 | down at the bottom of the screen.
| | 05:27 | But fortunately you don't
have to copy that address down.
| | 05:30 | Just tap Share Link and you can choose
to share the address of the stream via
| | 05:34 | email, messages, Twitter or Facebook.
| | 05:37 | You can even copy just to copy the
address down so you can paste it elsewhere.
| | 05:40 | I'll just Cancel that for now.
| | 05:42 | This is also where you can
delete a Photo Stream, by the way.
| | 05:45 | But once someone has subscribed to
your Photo Stream, they'll automatically
| | 05:48 | receive any photos you upload to the
stream from that point on, which is nice
| | 05:52 | so you don't have to constantly email
individual photos to your friends and family.
| | 05:55 | As long as they're subscribed or they
have the address of the public website,
| | 05:58 | they can check for new
photos whenever they want.
| | 06:01 | They can even add comments to individual
photos which will show up on your devices.
| | 06:05 | In case you're wondering, other people
can't upload photos to your Photo Stream,
| | 06:08 | which I think would be great
especially if everyone was at the same event and
| | 06:12 | you could create a stream where
everyone could upload their photos,
| | 06:14 | but that's not a capability of Photo Streams.
| | 06:16 | Only you can upload photos
to a stream that you create.
| | 06:19 | But Photo Streams are still incredibly fun and useful.
| | 06:22 | So remember you have access to this capability
with your free iCloud account.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Getting AroundGetting your location with Maps| 00:00 | The Maps application is one of the most useful
built-in apps on the iPhone, at least for me.
| | 00:05 | From figuring out where you are in a strange city
to locating nearby restaurants
| | 00:09 | and services, to seeing what
the local traffic conditions are like,
| | 00:12 | all of these capabilities and lots more
are built into the Maps app.
| | 00:16 | Let's tap Maps to open it up.
| | 00:18 | If you see a message saying that Maps would
like to use your current location, tap OK.
| | 00:22 | That's just to confirm that you know
that your iPhone is going to try to figure
| | 00:25 | out where you are and you'll see this
message for any app that tries to access
| | 00:29 | your location information.
| | 00:30 | Most of the time when you're using Maps
you'll want to start off by figuring out
| | 00:33 | where you currently are.
| | 00:35 | Unless you were previously using
another function like getting directions
| | 00:38 | or searching for a business, Maps should automatically
hone in on and display your approximate location.
| | 00:43 | If it doesn't, just tap the Locate
button in the bottom left-hand corner.
| | 00:48 | After a moment, a blue dot will
appear giving you your location.
| | 00:51 | Depending on where you are, which iPhone
you're using, or whether you're using an
| | 00:55 | iPod touch, the accuracy of your location will vary.
| | 00:59 | If you're on an iPhone which contains
an internal compass, tapping the Locate
| | 01:02 | button again rotates the map to orient
it with the direction you're facing,
| | 01:06 | which can be a big help especially in cities
like New York where emerging from the
| | 01:09 | subway can be disorienting.
| | 01:12 | If you face a different direction
you'll see the map rotate along with you.
| | 01:16 | Tap the Locate button a
third time to leave Compass mode.
| | 01:20 | After leaving Compass mode you might
find that your map is no longer oriented
| | 01:23 | with north at the top of the screen.
| | 01:25 | You can manually rotate the
orientation with two fingers or you can tap the
| | 01:29 | compass icon in the upper right
hand corner to reorient the map.
| | 01:34 | Compass mode is only
available on the iPhone 3GS or later.
| | 01:38 | If you're using an earlier iPod touch
or any iPhone released before the iPhone 3GS,
| | 01:42 | the Locate button just toggles between on and off.
| | 01:47 | Another advantage of having the Locate
button is that you can also bring the map
| | 01:50 | back to your current location.
| | 01:52 | So if you're browsing some other
section of the map, just tap Locate to scroll
| | 01:55 | back to your current location.
| | 01:58 | Now when you tap the Locate button at
first, you'll probably see a large circle
| | 02:01 | encompassing a pretty wide area on
the map around your general location.
| | 02:05 | This is Maps' first guess at where you are.
| | 02:08 | After a couple of moments the map should
zoom in and a blue dot inside a lighter
| | 02:12 | blue circle will appear.
| | 02:13 | This should be a more accurate
representation of your location.
| | 02:17 | If you're using an iPod touch, this
is probably the extent of how well Maps
| | 02:20 | is going to find you.
| | 02:23 | If you're on an iPhone 3G or later,
after another moment, a pulsing circle
| | 02:27 | around the blue dot should appear.
| | 02:29 | This is ideally what you want to see
because it indicates that the iPhone is
| | 02:33 | actively tracking your location and
the dot will move along the map as you
| | 02:36 | drive or walk around.
| | 02:39 | So how does Maps accomplish this?
| | 02:41 | Well it depends on the device you're using.
| | 02:43 | Every iPhone since the iPhone 3G
contains actual GPS chips similar to the ones
| | 02:48 | found in portable GPS
devices you can get for your car.
| | 02:52 | So if you're outdoors with a clear view
of the sky, your phone should be able to
| | 02:55 | get a pretty accurate read on your location.
| | 02:57 | But if you're indoors or in a city
with lots of tall buildings, the GPS chip
| | 03:01 | won't work as well or not at all.
| | 03:03 | Fortunately all iPhone models as well
as the iPod touch can still find your
| | 03:07 | location using two other methods.
| | 03:09 | The first is by referencing a
database containing information about Wi-Fi
| | 03:12 | networks found all over the world.
| | 03:15 | Wi-Fi networks are so prevalent these
days that Apple has collected data, mostly
| | 03:19 | in large urban areas, figuring out that
by determining which Wi-Fi networks are
| | 03:23 | overlapping with each other, you can
determine your approximate location.
| | 03:26 | Now this doesn't mean you have to
connect to any strange Wi-Fi networks.
| | 03:30 | Your iPhone or iPod touch has the
ability to detect nearby Wi-Fi networks
| | 03:34 | and using that information it
can figure out where you are.
| | 03:36 | Of course this means that you have to
have Wi-Fi turned on and it won't work
| | 03:41 | in locations where there isn't a
heavy volume of Wi-Fi networks.
| | 03:44 | The third method, which is available to
all iPhones but not to the iPod touch
| | 03:48 | is to use signals from nearby cellular towers
to triangulate your location.
| | 03:52 | This method works similarly to the Wi-Fi system,
but instead uses signals from
| | 03:56 | cell towers to figure out your general location.
| | 03:59 | If this is the only available information
to your iPhone, your location
| | 04:02 | display won't be as accurate, but it
should pinpoint your general area
| | 04:05 | within a couple of blocks which is still close enough
for you to find a local restaurant or business.
| | 04:10 | So those are the methods the iPhones and
the iPod touch use to find your location.
| | 04:14 | And once you have your location,
you can search for all kinds of things.
| | 04:17 | We'll explore more in the upcoming movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding addresses and nearby businesses| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at the Search feature
of Maps, which offers several ways
| | 00:04 | to find the places or businesses you're looking for.
| | 00:06 | If you want to search around you,
make sure you tap the Locate button first
| | 00:09 | to find where you currently are.
| | 00:11 | Then begin by tapping the Search tab
at the top of the screen.
| | 00:15 | Below the Search field you'll see any
addresses you've previously searched for,
| | 00:18 | but you can also just start
typing in the Search field.
| | 00:21 | You can type in a complete address, an
intersection, a city, zip code
| | 00:25 | or any combination of those items.
| | 00:26 | For example I'll type in, 7th and Linden 93013,
which is an intersection in Carpinteria, California.
| | 00:35 | I tap Search and just like that
the intersection comes up on the map.
| | 00:40 | Now one of the great things about the
Map app is that it can help you locate
| | 00:44 | nearby places such as restaurants,
shopping centers and other businesses
| | 00:46 | based on your current location so you
don't have to type in an exact address
| | 00:49 | if you don't have one.
| | 00:51 | Let's say you're on a trip and you
need to find a local tire center.
| | 00:53 | Again, you can start by tapping the
Locate button then do a Search for Tire center.
| | 01:02 | In a moment a bunch of pushpin icons
should drop under the map showing you all
| | 01:05 | the nearest tire centers Maps could find.
| | 01:08 | You can tap any of the pins to
see the name of that business.
| | 01:12 | If the name is covering up some of the
other pins, just tap the name to close it.
| | 01:16 | To see the details of one of your results,
tap the blue arrow next to the name
| | 01:20 | and here you'll find the phone number,
address and possibly the website of the business.
| | 01:25 | At the top of the screen you'll see how
far away the location is and possibly a
| | 01:29 | Yelp star rating if the place you're
looking up has been reviewed on Yelp.com.
| | 01:33 | You can tap the Info, Reviews and
Photos tabs to see more information.
| | 01:37 | You can tap any of these
items under Info to use them.
| | 01:40 | For example, tap the phone
number to call the business.
| | 01:42 | If there is a website you can tap the
website address to browse the site in Safari
| | 01:46 | and we'll talk about getting directions
in an upcoming movie.
| | 01:49 | But for now, let's tap Map to
go back to the search results.
| | 01:52 | And just to briefly show you this here,
to the left of the location's name
| | 01:55 | you'll see this car icon.
| | 01:58 | Tapping it maps out directions to the
location from wherever you currently are,
| | 02:01 | but again we'll look at getting
directions later, I'll tap Clear for now.
| | 02:05 | Now typing in the name of a business
or a service doesn't just work around
| | 02:08 | your current location.
| | 02:09 | If you wanted to find a movie theater
in Springfield, Illinois for example,
| | 02:13 | you could type Movies springfield il and up
pop all of these theaters in the area.
| | 02:22 | So you can see how powerful Maps is
and how easy it can be to find the
| | 02:26 | information you need.
| | 02:27 | Now sometimes you'll get so many
results that it may become difficult to
| | 02:30 | tap specific pushpins.
| | 02:31 | In those cases you might want to zoom in
on the map either by pinching out
| | 02:35 | or by double-tapping the screen.
| | 02:37 | To zoom back out you can pinch
in or double-tap with two fingers.
| | 02:40 | Additionally if you just want to see a
list of all the results Maps turned up,
| | 02:44 | tap the button that looks like a
curled page in the lower right-hand corner
| | 02:47 | which reveals several different options,
but here you can tap List Results
| | 02:51 | and now we see all the movie theater
results in this convenient text list.
| | 02:55 | You can tap the business' name to see
it on the map or tap the blue arrow next
| | 03:00 | to its name to see its information.
| | 03:03 | That's how you find addresses,
businesses, and services with Maps,
| | 03:07 | whether you're searching locally
or anywhere else in the world.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Bookmarking locations| 00:01 | If there are addresses or points of interests
that you often find yourself returning to,
| | 00:04 | it's a good idea to bookmark
those locations in the Maps app
| | 00:07 | so you can always find your way
back no matter where you are.
| | 00:10 | For example I always rent from the same
car rental company when I fly to Los Angeles,
| | 00:13 | so I have their address bookmarked in Maps,
which means I don't have to type it in
| | 00:16 | at the end of every trip
when it comes time to return the car.
| | 00:20 | So let's take a look at
how we add bookmarks in Maps.
| | 00:23 | Let's say I'm planning a trip to New York City
and I'm going to arrive by train at Penn Station.
| | 00:28 | I want to make sure I'll be able to
find my way back when the trip is over,
| | 00:31 | regardless of where in the
city I happen to be at the time.
| | 00:33 | So I'll do a search for Penn Station, New York.
| | 00:40 | Now that brings up several results.
| | 00:42 | I can either zoom in to see which one I want
| | 00:45 | want or I can tap the curled page area
| | 00:48 | and see a list of my results.
| | 00:50 | And in this case I want the top
result at 400 7th Ave, so I'll select it.
| | 00:54 | That lets me keep an eye on
the correct pin as I now zoom in.
| | 01:01 | So now that I've pinpointed Penn Station,
I'll tap the blue arrowhead
| | 01:04 | to view the location's details and down near the
bottom of the screen I can tap Add to Bookmarks.
| | 01:10 | Here I can either leave the
default name or change it.
| | 01:12 | It already says Penn Station so
I'll leave it as is and tap Save.
| | 01:17 | So now let's go back to the
Map and clear the Search bar.
| | 01:20 | Now to bring up your bookmarks, tap
the Bookmarks button by the Search bar.
| | 01:24 | Make sure the Bookmarks tab is
selected at the bottom of the screen.
| | 01:28 | Now I see a list of all the locations I've bookmarked
and there at the bottom is Penn Station.
| | 01:31 | I tap it and it appears on the map and
now I can easily get directions to Penn Station
| | 01:37 | without having to go through
the whole process of typing in its name
| | 01:41 | and having to specify to Maps which Penn Station
address I mean each time I want to go there.
| | 01:45 | Let's open up Bookmarks again.
| | 01:47 | If you ever want to remove any bookmarks
you've created, maybe you made one by accident,
| | 01:51 | or just don't go to a particular place anymore,
just slide your finger
| | 01:54 | horizontally along the
bookmark to reveal the Delete button.
| | 01:57 | Tap Delete to remove the bookmark
or tap anywhere else on the screen to
| | 02:00 | close the Delete button.
| | 02:02 | You can also rename and reorder
your bookmarks by tapping Edit.
| | 02:05 | From here tap a bookmark to edit its name.
| | 02:14 | You can also drag the handle to the
right of any bookmark
| | 02:15 | to move the bookmark up and down the list.
| | 02:17 | Maybe I'll move Penn Station to the
top of my list since I go there a lot.
| | 02:22 | You can also delete bookmarks while in
Edit mode by tapping the red button to
| | 02:25 | reveal the Delete button.
| | 02:27 | When you're done here, tap Done.
| | 02:30 | Here in the Bookmarks area you can also
tap Recents to see a list of the places
| | 02:34 | you've recently searched for and this is
convenient if you need to find a recent
| | 02:37 | destination again and you either forgot
to bookmark it or you just didn't find
| | 02:40 | it necessary to bookmark it.
| | 02:42 | You can't delete individual searches
here though, so if you're trying to cover
| | 02:45 | your tracks for some reason or another,
you'll have to tap the Clear button
| | 02:47 | which will delete all your
recent searches from this list.
| | 02:51 | The third type here is Contacts, which lets you
search through your contacts to find addresses.
| | 02:56 | Tapping the contact brings
up its address on the map.
| | 02:59 | So that's how to create and
use Bookmark Locations with Maps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Getting directions| 00:00 | Now let's take a look at the Directions feature
in the Maps, which gives you spoken,
| | 00:03 | turn-by-turn directions to
wherever you're trying to go.
| | 00:07 | If you know the exact address of
your destination, you can type
| | 00:10 | or write into the Search bar.
| | 00:11 | But if you don't have an exact address,
you can enter the location, neighborhood
| | 00:15 | or service you're looking for.
| | 00:16 | For example, maybe you're
looking for a nearby coffee shop.
| | 00:19 | Tap the Locate button to find your
current location and then enter Coffee
| | 00:23 | to find some coffee shops.
| | 00:26 | Let's say we want to
visit this coffee shop here.
| | 00:28 | You can either tap the blue arrow next
to its name to get Info, like the phone
| | 00:31 | number or website, or you can tap
Directions to Here which gives you an
| | 00:35 | opportunity to choose your starting
point if you want to get directions from
| | 00:38 | some place other than your current location.
| | 00:41 | You can also tap the squiggly arrow to
reverse the locations and get directions
| | 00:44 | from the coffee shop to another location.
| | 00:47 | Let's cancel this for now though.
| | 00:49 | If you've found a location you want to
travel to, a quick way to get directions
| | 00:53 | is to tap the green car
button to the left of the name.
| | 00:56 | That draws out the routes that
Map suggest you take to get there.
| | 00:59 | Depending on the roads and the distance,
it might offer two or three possible routes.
| | 01:04 | This might be useful if you want to
choose to avoid highways or tolls.
| | 01:07 | Tapping a route shows you the distance and
estimated travel time at the top of the screen.
| | 01:12 | So select the route you want
to take and then tap Start.
| | 01:17 | On the iPhone 4S and later, that puts
you into Automatic turn-by-turn mode.
| | 01:21 | As you drive, your phone will give
you spoken directions and alert you
| | 01:24 | when turns and exits are coming up.
| | 01:27 | If you're using an iPod touch,
you won't get spoken directions.
| | 01:31 | But on an iPhone 4S or later,
anytime during your trip you can tap the
| | 01:34 | directions at the top of the screen to
get your estimated time of arrival
| | 01:38 | and to see how much farther you have to go.
| | 01:40 | Tap Overview to see the entire route, this can
help you make sure you're on the right track.
| | 01:46 | You can also tap the List button in the lower
left-hand corner to see the directions as a list.
| | 01:51 | Tap Done and then Resume
to go back to turn-by-turn.
| | 01:54 | By the way if you happen to miss a turn
Maps will automatically reroute you and
| | 01:58 | get you back on track.
| | 02:00 | You can continue to use your iPhone
while using turn-by-turn navigation.
| | 02:03 | If you press the Home button or open
any other apps, you'll see this green bar
| | 02:07 | at the top of the screen indicating
that you're still using Navigation.
| | 02:10 | You'll also continue to hear the
audible directions while you're in other apps.
| | 02:15 | Even if you lock your phone, you'll
continue to hear the directions
| | 02:18 | and if you wake the screen, you'll see the
map and your current position.
| | 02:21 | When you reach your destination
or if you don't need directions anymore
| | 02:24 | you can tap End to stop the navigation.
| | 02:28 | Now when you use the Quick Navigation button,
your directions default to driving directions
| | 02:33 | but you can also map out walking directions.
| | 02:35 | First, find your destination on Maps,
then tap the blue arrow.
| | 02:41 | Tap Directions to Here and at the top of the
screen tap the Walking icon; then tap Route.
| | 02:48 | That takes you back to the map as usual,
but at the top of the screen you'll see
| | 02:52 | the distance and estimated time to
walk this route rather than to drive it.
| | 02:56 | You'll definitely want to use the
Walking directions in large cities
| | 02:58 | where there are lots of one-way streets.
| | 03:00 | Maps takes those into account with
driving directions but not with walking.
| | 03:04 | Also with Walking directions after
you tap Start, you can flick to the
| | 03:08 | directions to see your next steps.
| | 03:10 | This is also the default behavior of
Maps on the iPod touch
| | 03:13 | since it can't offer audible directions.
| | 03:16 | Even if you're on an iPhone 4S or later,
you don't get audible turn-by-turn alerts
| | 03:20 | with walking directions since you can probably
look at your phone while walking
| | 03:22 | which you shouldn't do while driving.
| | 03:26 | Speaking of the audible directions
you can adjust the settings
| | 03:28 | by going to Settings, and Maps.
| | 03:33 | And here under Navigation Voice Volume
you can choose No Voice if you don't want
| | 03:36 | hear instructions at all or set
the volume to Low, Normal or Loud.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to Maps.
| | 03:43 | Now lastly, you might have noticed
this third option next to the Driving and
| | 03:46 | Walking icons that looks like a bus.
| | 03:48 | In previous versions of iOS the Maps
app ran on Google Maps which included
| | 03:52 | the ability to route directions over
public transit like buses or subways.
| | 03:57 | But with iOS 6, Apple has created
their own in-house version of Maps
| | 04:01 | and unfortunately it doesn't
include transit directions.
| | 04:04 | So if you select transit and tap Route,
instead of getting directions you'll get
| | 04:07 | a link to several third-party apps that
can give you bus and subway directions.
| | 04:11 | So that's a bit disappointing
especially if you live in a large city
| | 04:14 | and don't drive that much.
| | 04:16 | But as I record this iOS 6 has
still been out only for a few weeks.
| | 04:20 | My hope is that Apple adds public
transit directions back into the Maps app
| | 04:23 | in the near future.
| | 04:24 | In the meantime you'll have to use
third-party apps or visit Google Maps
| | 04:28 | on your iPhone's browser.
| | 04:29 | But as you just saw if you're driving or
walking, you can easily and quickly get
| | 04:33 | directions in the Maps app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Showing traffic and alternate maps| 00:01 | In addition to the map that you see
when you first open the Maps application,
| | 00:04 | there are couple of other types of maps,
views and enhancements available.
| | 00:08 | Tapping the curled page button reveals
some more views like Satellite,
| | 00:13 | which gives you satellite imagery of your
locations and besides being fun to look at,
| | 00:16 | the Satellite view can give you a better
idea of the layout of your locations
| | 00:19 | in terms of the arrangement of
the buildings and the landscape.
| | 00:22 | But in this view, you don't see any street names.
| | 00:24 | So you can tap the curled page button
again and choose Hybrid, which gives you
| | 00:29 | the satellite view with streets
and highways overlaid on top of it.
| | 00:33 | It can be kind of fun to just keep
double tapping the Satellite or Hybrid
| | 00:36 | maps just to see how much detail can
be found in the satellite photographs
| | 00:40 | for a particular area.
| | 00:43 | Depending on where you're looking
you'll find some incredibly clear photos
| | 00:46 | and some pretty grainy and blurry photos
where Apple hasn't yet updated the imagery.
| | 00:50 | You can pinch in or two-finger tap
to zoom back out again.
| | 00:54 | Now a particularly helpful view
of Maps is the traffic overlay.
| | 00:57 | To make this a little easier to see I'm
going to switch back to the regular map,
| | 01:03 | and then I'll select Show Traffic.
| | 01:06 | Now I'm not currently seeing any
traffic on the highway here,
| | 01:10 | so I'll look around the LAX airport and
what we're seeing now is real-time traffic information.
| | 01:18 | Now this only works for roads and
major highways mostly around major cities.
| | 01:21 | But if traffic information is available
for the area you're viewing, you'll see
| | 01:25 | red dotted lines representing traffic,
the darker the red the heavier the traffic.
| | 01:29 | A dark red means traffic is very slow
under about 25 miles per hour probably
| | 01:34 | with lots of starting and stopping.
| | 01:36 | A lighter red or orangish color
indicates that there's a little bit of traffic
| | 01:39 | but it's a little bit lighter somewhere
between 25 to 50 miles per hour
| | 01:43 | and no line means that traffic is moving
smoothly at, at least 50 miles per hour or so.
| | 01:47 | Either that or there's no
traffic info available for that road.
| | 01:51 | But if you see a red-dotted line, the
point where it ends is where traffic
| | 01:53 | should be moving again.
| | 01:55 | Notice also that on major highways you
get two sets of lines showing how traffic
| | 01:59 | is moving in both directions.
| | 02:01 | In addition to the dotted lines you
may even see little alert icons such as
| | 02:05 | closed ramps or reported accidents.
| | 02:06 | For example I see an Alert icon here.
| | 02:09 | That tells me there's an event at
Hollywood Boulevard at North Highland Avenue.
| | 02:15 | And over here I see another alert;
| | 02:17 | this tells me that a ramp is closed off the I-5.
| | 02:21 | So again real-time traffic isn't
available everywhere, but if it's available
| | 02:24 | where you are it can really be helpful
when you're about to hit the road and
| | 02:27 | want to see what kind of traffic
on certain roads is looking like.
| | 02:30 | If you see a lot of red along your
planned course, you might want to consider
| | 02:33 | traveling a different way.
| | 02:34 | Also you'll probably want to hide the
traffic when you don't need it
| | 02:37 | because the dotted lines can end up
obscuring highway names sometimes.
| | 02:40 | So just tap the curled page button
again tap Hide Traffic to turn off the traffic overlay.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using 3D and Flyover views| 00:01 | If you're running iOS 6 on an iPhone 4S or later
or on a 5th generation iPod touch,
| | 00:05 | you have access to two brand-new
ways to look at Maps.
| | 00:08 | I'm currently looking at a view of Ventura,
California in the Standard Map view.
| | 00:12 | Notice next to the Location button
is a button labeled 3D.
| | 00:15 | Tapping it shifts the view of the map
from looking directly down
| | 00:19 | to this more bird's eye view
where we can see into the distance.
| | 00:22 | This can be useful to give you a better sense
of the layout of a location you're looking at.
| | 00:25 | By touching two fingers to the screen I can
tilt on the axis to see further into the distance.
| | 00:31 | This actually looks a little bit better
in Satellite or Hybrid views.
| | 00:43 | While in 3D view you can also rotate
with two fingers to look in different directions
| | 00:50 | and you can drag with
one finger to scroll the map around.
| | 00:56 | Tap 3D again to return to the top-down view.
| | 00:59 | Now another new feature that's currently only
available for select major cities is called Flyover.
| | 01:04 | Let's jump over to Times Square, New York.
[00:01:088.93]
So here again I'm looking at the
top-down Hybrid Satellite view.
| | 01:11 | Notice though that the 3D button has
been replaced with a buildings icon.
| | 01:17 | When I tap it, suddenly I'm looking
at a 3D rendered view of the city.
| | 01:22 | This allows me to zoom in and
really see the buildings in 3D detail.
| | 01:28 | I can rotate, I can shift the axis
| | 01:35 | and you can go down to
almost street-level in some cases.
| | 01:39 | This can be really useful to help you get
your bearings or to prepare for an upcoming trip.
| | 01:43 | So the Flyover view is only available when
looking at the Satellite or Hybrid views.
| | 01:48 | If you're looking at the Standard view,
you'll just get the regular 3D button.
| | 01:51 | Also, Apple has continued to add
more and more cities with Flyover views.
| | 01:55 | They're working their way through the major cities
throughout the U.S., Europe, Australia, and so on.
| | 01:59 | The easiest way to see if a city has
Flyover is just to go there in Maps.
| | 02:10 | If you zoom in and you see the Buildings button
instead of the 3D button, Flyover is available.
| | 02:23 | So, that's the new 3D and Flyover views in Maps,
which again, are only available
| | 02:27 | on the 5th generation iPod touch
and the iPhone 4S and later.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Compass app| 00:00 | As mentioned earlier in this chapter,
with the iPhone 3GS and later,
| | 00:04 | Apple included a built-in digital compass.
| | 00:07 | This compass is what allows the iPhone to,
among other things, show you which way
| | 00:10 | you're currently facing in the Maps app
but it also powers the included Compass app.
| | 00:14 | As you can see, the Compass app is
designed to look and act like a real compass,
| | 00:19 | and it acts like a real compass
because it is a real compass
| | 00:24 | running off a real magnetometer.
| | 00:26 | So as you rotate the iPhone around,
the compass continues to point North
| | 00:29 | while also displaying the current heading
as well as the current longitude and latitude position.
| | 00:35 | Now if you're familiar with using compasses
you know there's a difference
| | 00:37 | between True north and Magnetic North.
| | 00:40 | Magnetic North is where traditional compasses
point towards, which happens to be about
| | 00:43 | 11 degrees shy of True North, which is where
the most northern point of the Earth axis lies.
| | 00:49 | If you have a strong preference one
way or the other, tap the Info button
| | 00:53 | and choose either True or Magnetic North,
then tap Done.
| | 00:58 | Really though, I doubt most iPhone
users are using the Compass app
| | 01:01 | for much other than showing off this
cool feature of their phone.
| | 01:03 | I don't know many people who even know
how to navigate with a compass anymore.
| | 01:07 | But if you do know how to use a compass,
this can be an incredibly useful app to have.
| | 01:12 | Where the compass really comes in
handy for most people is when it's used in
| | 01:15 | conjunction with Maps, which you can
access directly from the Compass app
| | 01:19 | by tapping the Locate button.
| | 01:21 | That opens the Maps app and in here I tap
the Locate button twice and just like that
| | 01:26 | the Map rotates to reflect the direction
I'm currently facing,
| | 01:30 | which can be a great help in a strange city
where tall buildings can otherwise
| | 01:33 | make it impossible to figure out
which way you're facing.
| | 01:37 | Now a quick note here, because the
iPhone's digital compass is essentially
| | 01:40 | a magnetic field sensor, it can be
thrown off if you're trying to use it
| | 01:45 | in your large mass of metal like a car or anything
magnetic like a large set of PA speakers.
| | 01:49 | In those cases, you may see a message
pop up in either the Compass app
| | 01:52 | or in Maps telling you that the compass is
experiencing interference
| | 01:57 | and to wave the iPhone in a figure-eight motion.
| | 01:59 | This helps the iPhone get a better idea
of exactly where it is.
| | 02:02 | And if you can try to move away from the
source of the interference,
| | 02:05 | which can be kind of hard to do if you're in a car,
but you can move the iPhone away
| | 02:08 | from your doors and car speakers,
which could help with the interference.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Managing Your TimeAdding events to your calendar| 00:00 | Back in Chapter 3 we looked at how to sync the
calendars on your computer with your iPhone or iPod.
| | 00:05 | But if you use the Calendar app on
your iPhone or iPod,
| | 00:07 | you're most likely going to need to add
events and appointments to your schedule
| | 00:10 | while you're away from your computer.
| | 00:13 | So let's take a look at how to
create events with the Calendar app.
| | 00:15 | Now before I tap the Calendar app to
open it, I just want to take a second to
| | 00:17 | point out that its icon always shows
the current day and date,
| | 00:20 | which is a nice touch and it's nice
to be able to see that information
| | 00:23 | with a quick glance of the icon
without having to open any apps.
| | 00:27 | Okay so now I'll tap the icon.
| | 00:29 | There are three main views in the
Calendar app which you can see
| | 00:31 | at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:33 | List gives you a scrolling list of
every appointment stored in your calendar,
| | 00:36 | just scroll through to view them.
| | 00:40 | To jump back to the events for today, tap Today.
| | 00:43 | The Today button is available at all
times and works in all three views.
| | 00:46 | The next view is Day which shows you
just the events scheduled for today.
| | 00:50 | This view is divided hourly and you
will also see all-day events listed at
| | 00:53 | the top of the screen.
| | 00:55 | You can use the arrows on either side
of the date to jump forward and back,
| | 00:57 | one day at a time,
| | 01:01 | and there you can see an all-day event.
| | 01:03 | The third view is Month and
that shows you the entire month.
| | 01:07 | Dates with dots in them indicate
events scheduled on those days.
| | 01:10 | You can use the arrows to jump forward
or back to the next or previous months.
| | 01:15 | You can again hit Today to jump back to today's date
| | 01:18 | and in all three views tapping
an event displays the details,
| | 01:22 | and I'll tap to go back to the Month view.
| | 01:24 | Okay so that's how you view your calendars.
| | 01:26 | Let's take a look at how to create a new event.
| | 01:28 | Now you can create a new event in any
of these three views but I prefer Month view
| | 01:31 | because it's the easiest way
to see the widest range of dates.
| | 01:34 | So let's say I have a dentist appointment
on December 7.
| | 01:38 | I'll tap forward to December
and then I'll tap on the seventh to select it.
| | 01:43 | To create a new event I tap the Plus (+) button.
| | 01:47 | Now I see a screen where I can add
the details of my event or appointment.
| | 01:50 | You don't have to fill in all of these
fields or make selections on all of them
| | 01:53 | but you should at the very least
add a Title so you remember
| | 01:56 | what you're supposed to do on this date.
| | 01:58 | So my cursor is already in the
Title field and I'll type, Dentist.
| | 02:02 | If I need to remember where this appointment is
I can tap in the Location field
| | 02:05 | and here I'll type, Downtown office.
| | 02:09 | Feel free to leave this field
blank if you don't think you need it.
| | 02:11 | Next we have these Start and End times.
| | 02:14 | So if your appointment is occurring at a specific
time this is where you enter that information.
| | 02:18 | Maybe my appointment starts at 10:30 AM
and I'll say it's supposed to last an hour.
| | 02:25 | The end time is always an hour later by default,
so I don't need to change it here.
| | 02:29 | Now if the event is an all-day event,
like a birthday you need to remember,
| | 02:33 | or your anniversary, you can
tap the All-day switch to On.
| | 02:37 | Notice that changes the Start and End fields
so they just showed dates instead of times.
| | 02:41 | You'd use these fields if the event you're
putting on your schedule span more than one day.
| | 02:44 | For example if I was attending a two-day conference
I might change the End field to December 9th.
| | 02:52 | But for this example I'm scheduling a one-hour
dentist appointment so I'll turn off All-day.
| | 02:56 | So it goes back to its original time
except that I can see the End date is set
| | 03:01 | to Sunday, December 9 and switched
that back to the 7th and I'll tap Done.
| | 03:06 | The next field is Repeat, and you can
see here that we have the action to repeat
| | 03:11 | the event every day, every week, every
two weeks, every month, or every year.
| | 03:16 | So if you for example have a weekly
staff meeting every Tuesday at 200 p.m.,
| | 03:20 | you could create an event for it once
and just have it repeat every week.
| | 03:23 | Or if you're putting a friend's birthday on
your Calendar you can have it repeat every year.
| | 03:28 | I'm going to cancel out of this though
since I'm just scheduling a dentist appointment.
| | 03:31 | Next we have Alert.
| | 03:32 | This is a very nice feature that allows you
to set an alarm so your iPhone or
| | 03:36 | iPod touch will alert you as the event approaches.
| | 03:38 | Maybe I want to make sure I get a reminder
about my appointment the day before it happens.
| | 03:43 | I'll tap Alert and then select 1 day before
and then I'll tap Done.
| | 03:46 | Notice this has created a second alert field.
| | 03:49 | You can have up to two alerts for each event.
| | 03:51 | Maybe I also want to have a second
reminder right before the appointment.
| | 03:54 | I know it takes me about 15 minutes to
drive to my dentist's office,
| | 03:57 | so I'll tap 30 minutes before the event.
| | 04:00 | That way I'll have plenty of time to
make it over there. I'll tap Done.
| | 04:04 | Now the day before and 30 minutes before
my appointment a message will appear
| | 04:08 | on my screen along with an accompanying
alert sound reminding me of my appointment.
| | 04:10 | I don't have to be in the
Calendar app at the time either.
| | 04:13 | As long as my phone is on,
I'll get the reminder.
| | 04:16 | Next we have the Calendar field where
you can choose which of your calendars
| | 04:19 | you want the event to appear in.
| | 04:20 | You'll see this field if you've set up
and synced calendars from your computer.
| | 04:24 | You can't create new calendars on your
iPhone or iPod touch, but if you do sync calendars
| | 04:28 | from your computer, you'll find them here,
and I have this set to my
| | 04:31 | home calendar which is fine for now.
| | 04:34 | The final two fields here are for adding a web address,
maybe I could put the dentist's website here
| | 04:38 | if I wanted, and you can also add any relevant Notes
| | 04:40 | for this event, I'll leave those fields blank for now.
| | 04:43 | Once you've added all the necessary
information about your event, tap Done.
| | 04:47 | Now here in Month view you can see
a dot has been added to the seventh.
| | 04:50 | If I switch to Day view, there is
the event between 10:30 and 11:30.
| | 04:55 | I'll also find the appointment in List view
and again, tapping the event in any
| | 04:59 | of the three views brings up the details.
| | 05:01 | If you need to make any changes to an
existing event, just tap the Edit button
| | 05:04 | here on its details screen.
| | 05:06 | Maybe my appointment got
moved to 1:30 that afternoon.
| | 05:09 | I'll just tap the Start field and change that
to 1:30 and you can see the End field
| | 05:13 | automatically switches to 2:30.
| | 05:16 | I'll tap Done and my change is saved.
| | 05:18 | Now if you need to completely delete an
event, maybe an appointment or a meeting
| | 05:21 | was canceled, you can scroll down and tap Delete Event.
| | 05:26 | Then confirm that you really want
to delete the event by tapping the Delete
| | 05:29 | Event button or Cancel to leave the event as is.
| | 05:32 | So that's how you create and
edit events in the Calendar app.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Subscribing to calendars| 00:00 | The calendar app on the iPhone or iPod touch
supports subscriptions to CalDAV accounts.
| | 00:05 | Basically, this means you can enter
a server address and if necessary,
| | 00:09 | a username and password to automatically
sync your company's calendar
| | 00:13 | or some other organization's
calendar with your Calendar app.
| | 00:15 | For example maybe you've setup a
calendar for your family or work schedule
| | 00:19 | using Google Calendar.
| | 00:20 | You could link your iPhone to that calendar so you
don't have to enter the event information by hand.
| | 00:24 | So if you have an online calendar
that supports CalDAV like Yahoo or Google
| | 00:27 | calendars, you can subscribe to that
calendar on your iPhone by going to
| | 00:31 | Settings>Mail, Contacts, Calendars and
in here tap Add Account, just like you
| | 00:37 | would if you're adding a new email
account, but instead choose other.
| | 00:41 | And then under Calendars tap add
CalDAV account and in here just enter your
| | 00:45 | account information.
| | 00:46 | For example with Google Calendars or
Google Apps accounts you would enter
| | 00:50 | google.com as the server.
| | 00:54 | And then enter your
Google username and password.
| | 00:56 | You can change the Description field if you
like but I'll leave mine as is and then tap Next.
| | 01:02 | If your iPhone or iPod touch was able
to connect to your Calendar
| | 01:05 | you'll see it appear under Accounts.
Now I'll go back to my Calendar.
| | 01:10 | Here I'll tap the Calendars button and
this gives me a list of all the calendar
| | 01:14 | categories I have on my iPhone.
| | 01:16 | These categories can't be created
on the iPod touch or the iPhone,
| | 01:19 | they instead either come from your
computer's calendar program when you sync it
| | 01:23 | with your device or they appear when
you subscribe to a Calendar like I just
| | 01:26 | did with Google Calendars.
| | 01:27 | And here under Google I can see my
Google Apps account shows up here.
| | 01:31 | To make sure I see events from
that calendar I'll just tap it.
| | 01:33 | Or if I want to see events only from
that calendar, I can tap Hide All Calendars
| | 01:38 | and then select just that calendar.
| | 01:40 | If I go to List view I can see three events
on the Google calendar I've subscribed to.
| | 01:45 | And the great thing about subscribing to
a CalDAV calendar is that it's a two-way
| | 01:49 | connection, meaning I can add events
or make changes to existing events
| | 01:53 | on this calendar and they'll be uploaded
back to Google so I can see them
| | 01:56 | if I access my Google Calendar from my computer.
| | 01:58 | So that's how to subscribe to a CalDAV
account from your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting Time Zone Support| 00:01 | This movie is for anyone who uses the
Calendar app and travels across Time Zones
| | 00:04 | or schedules appointments
with people in other time zones.
| | 00:07 | To use my own real-life example,
I live and work on the East Coast most of the time
| | 00:12 | but lynda.com's home office is on the West Coast.
| | 00:15 | I'm frequently participating in
conference calls with the home office
| | 00:18 | and I just have to remember
that I'm three hours ahead.
| | 00:20 | So if I get an email saying that a meeting
is happening at noon on the West Coast,
| | 00:24 | I'll enter it into my Calendar app
as a 3 PM meeting.
| | 00:27 | But what happens to my event
times when I fly out to California?
| | 00:31 | Does the meeting time on my Calendar stay
at 3 p.m. or does it adjust itself to noon?
| | 00:35 | The answer depends on how you have one particular
setting selected on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to go into
Settings>Mail, Contacts and Calendars
| | 00:45 | and here I'll scroll down to the Calendar section
where I'll find Time Zone Support.
| | 00:49 | You can read here that Time Zone Support
always shows the event dates and times
| | 00:53 | in the Time Zone selected for calendars.
| | 00:55 | So if Time Zone Support is on and my
time zone was set to New York City,
| | 00:59 | my 3 o'clock appointment would always show
us 3 o'clock even when I'm in California.
| | 01:03 | You might want to have Time Zone Support
on if for example you always schedule a
| | 01:07 | workout at the same time everyday
regardless of the Time Zone you're in.
| | 01:10 | But keep in mind that there's no way to
keep some appointments at the same time
| | 01:14 | while having others
shift based on where you are.
| | 01:17 | But by turning Time Zone Support off,
now my events will shift around on my
| | 01:20 | calendar and adjust for the Time Zone I'm in.
| | 01:23 | Now by default your device should
automatically adjust this time when it detects
| | 01:26 | what Time Zone you're in.
| | 01:27 | But if you're using an iPod touch
which might not detect your Time Zone
| | 01:30 | consistently since it doesn't have
cellular connectivity,
| | 01:32 | we'll just have the iPhone figure out the local time.
| | 01:35 | Or if your phone isn't detecting the
Time Zone for some reason,
| | 01:39 | you'll have to go back to Settings and to
General and select Date & Time.
| | 01:45 | Here make sure Set Automatically is set
to on which should take care of setting
| | 01:49 | your device's time for you.
| | 01:50 | If it's not working for some reason,
turn Set Automatically off and then tap
| | 01:54 | Time Zone and type the name of
a major city in your time zone.
| | 02:02 | When you select your city, the time
will automatically update and if you have
| | 02:06 | Time Zone Support turned off;
| | 02:07 | the events in your Calendar will
shift to coincide side with where you are.
| | 02:10 | Now if you don't travel out of your Time Zone
very much, you don't need to worry about this.
| | 02:15 | But if you do travel a lot, it's essential
to turn Time Zone Support off
| | 02:18 | so you don't end up being really late,
or in some cases, really early for your appointment.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Clock app| 00:01 | In this movie I want to take a look at
the iPhone and iPod touch's Clock app,
| | 00:04 | which is actually four different
mini apps all-in-one. Let's open it up.
| | 00:08 | The first function of the
Clock app is the World Clock.
| | 00:12 | In here you can add and view the time for
cities and time zones all over the world.
| | 00:15 | This is particularly handy if you frequently
have dealings with people on the opposite coast,
| | 00:20 | in Europe, or in any other time zone where you
need to take time differences into consideration.
| | 00:25 | The default clock here is Cupertino which
just happens to be where Apple is headquartered.
| | 00:30 | To add another city just tap the Plus
button and type the name of the city.
| | 00:34 | For the most part, only major cities are tracked here.
| | 00:36 | So if the city you're looking for isn't listed, just type
the name of a major city in the same time zone.
| | 00:41 | For example, I'll start typing Wellington
and you can see Wellington,
| | 00:44 | New Zealand pops up as a suggestion.
| | 00:46 | I'll tap it to select it and now I have
a clock for Wellington in World Clocks.
| | 00:51 | Conveniently, in addition to the time
I can also see that it's tomorrow over there,
| | 00:55 | which can help me keep my dates straight
when I'm sending an email
| | 00:58 | or calling my contacts in New Zealand.
| | 01:00 | And you can add as many additional
cities as you like. Let's add London.
| | 01:06 | Notice that its clock is black, which is an
indicator that it's night time over there.
| | 01:11 | You could tap the Edit button to
rearrange the order of your clocks
| | 01:17 | or you can tap the Delete button to get rid of a clock.
| | 01:22 | So that's the World Clock.
| | 01:24 | Next, we have Alarm.
| | 01:25 | This is for setting an audible alarm
which is especially valuable to have
| | 01:29 | if you're traveling and your hotel room
doesn't have an alarm clock
| | 01:33 | or if you just want to set a secondary backup alarm.
| | 01:35 | To set an alarm, tap the Plus button.
| | 01:37 | Now before you set the time for the
alarm you have four options to choose from.
| | 01:41 | Repeat lets you set the alarm to
repeat on certain days of the week.
| | 01:44 | For example, if you need to get up
at 7 a.m. every weekday, you could tap
| | 01:48 | Monday to Friday here. Then tap Back.
| | 01:52 | Notice the Repeat field now says Weekdays.
| | 01:55 | If you had only chosen say Monday and
Wednesday, you would only see those days
| | 01:59 | listed in the repeat field.
| | 02:01 | Next choose the sound
you'd like the alarm to play.
| | 02:04 | Your choices are the ringtones installed
on your iPhone, including any custom
| | 02:07 | ringtones you might have installed, as
well as any songs you have stored
| | 02:10 | on your device in the Music app.
| | 02:12 | You can access your songs by tapping
Pick a song which gives you access
| | 02:14 | to your entire music library.
| | 02:19 | Just pick a sound that you think
will wake you up or get your attention.
[00:02:2p.74]
Alarms don't have to be for waking up.
| | 02:30 | You might set an alarm to remind
yourself to pull a cake out of the oven
| | 02:33 | or to go pick up your kid from
baseball practice. I'll go back.
| | 02:38 | Next, what would any good alarm
clock be without a snooze function?
| | 02:41 | With this option on when the alarm goes
off you'll see a Snooze button appear.
| | 02:45 | You can tap it and the alarm will stop
and then go off again nine minutes later.
| | 02:49 | The next field is Label where you can
type a custom message here
| | 02:52 | for when the alarm goes off.
| | 02:54 | For example, you might type, Pick up dry
cleaning to remind yourself why you set
| | 02:58 | the alarm in the first place.
| | 02:59 | Although for events like that you might
want to consider creating an event
| | 03:03 | in the Calendar app with an alert or using the
Reminders app instead of creating an alarm.
| | 03:07 | But it's your choice.
| | 03:08 | After that we have the dials for setting
the actual time the alarm is supposed to go off.
| | 03:12 | Just spin the dials to the
time you want and then tap save.
| | 03:18 | That adds to your alarm to the
alarm list and it's set to On.
| | 03:21 | Notice the tiny clock icon that appeared in
the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
| | 03:25 | This serves to remind you that you set an
alarm even when you're not in the Clock app.
| | 03:29 | And you can create multiple alarms if necessary.
| | 03:31 | Maybe you're on the road and you have
one alarm set to wake you up in the morning
| | 03:35 | and another alarm to remind you
to call the home office every afternoon.
| | 03:38 | To add additional alarms just tap the Plus button,
but I won't add another one right now.
| | 03:43 | Also, note that your alarm will play
even if you have the iPhone set to silent.
| | 03:47 | The next app in clock is Stopwatch
which is exactly what its name says it is.
| | 03:52 | The stopwatch is for timing an event.
| | 03:54 | How long it takes you to walk a lap
around the block, how long you've been on
| | 03:58 | hold with tech support, and so on.
| | 04:00 | All you have to do here is
tap start to begin timing.
| | 04:03 | When the timer is going you can tap the Lap button
to record the time at that particular moment.
| | 04:10 | So if you're walking or running
around the track, you can tap Lap.
| | 04:14 | And each time you do that the
time immediately appears below.
| | 04:21 | Tapping Lap also resets the smaller
counter at the top of the screen which gives
| | 04:24 | you the time for the current lap.
| | 04:30 | When you're done whatever it
is you're timing, tap Stop.
| | 04:34 | This is more of a Pause button because
you can then tap start again to start the
| | 04:37 | stopwatch from where you left off.
| | 04:41 | Press the Reset button to clear
all the times and start from 0 again.
| | 04:45 | Just so you know the time in the stopwatch
stays recorded and moving even if you
| | 04:49 | close the Clock app.
| | 04:50 | So if you've time something and then
need to check your times later after
| | 04:54 | you've closed the clock, you can reopen clock,
go to Stopwatch, and your times will still be there.
| | 04:58 | But if you type Reset, the times will be gone.
| | 05:01 | The last app is Timer, which I think of
as a reverse stopwatch.
| | 05:04 | This is a countdown timer where you enter a
starting time which then counts down to 0.
| | 05:09 | I often use this during Thanksgiving to
count down time between turkey basting.
| | 05:13 | Just select the amount of time you want,
| | 05:18 | then pick a sound you want to hear
when the timer reaches zero.
| | 05:33 | Notice the bottom option here is Stop Playing.
| | 05:35 | Instead of playing a sound when the timer ends,
it will turn off any music or video you might be playing.
| | 05:40 | You might want to use this option if you like
falling asleep to music or while watching a video.
| | 05:45 | But otherwise just pick a sound and tap Set.
| | 05:47 | Then tap Start and the countdown begins.
| | 05:50 | The timer will continue to countdown
even if you're not in the Clock app.
| | 05:53 | When it reaches zero,
it will play your chosen sound.
| | 05:57 | Like the alarm, the timer will still play your selected
sound even if you have the iPhone set to silent.
| | 06:02 | So there you have the Clock app.
| | 06:03 | Four incredibly useful apps all bundled together.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting reminders| 00:01 | In this chapter, we've seen a couple of
ways to use your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:04 | to help you remember to do something.
| | 00:06 | You can create an event in the
calendar and set it up so you get an alert
| | 00:09 | before the event begins.
| | 00:11 | You can also set an alarm with the Clock
app for an event that's occurring sooner.
| | 00:15 | Also included with iOS 6 is the Reminders app,
which is just a simple program
| | 00:19 | for creating reminders and to-do-list for yourself.
| | 00:21 | To use it, just tap the Plus button
and type out what you need to remember.
| | 00:27 | Tap Return to enter it and then you can
continue typing other items you need to remember.
| | 00:34 | I'll tap Done and there's my current list.
| | 00:36 | Notice each item has a check box next to it
so you can check up items when they're done.
| | 00:41 | That moves the items to your completed list.
| | 00:43 | You can switch between your reminders and
completed items by swiping left and right.
| | 00:47 | Here I find my completed list or you can uncheck items
if they weren't as done as you thought.
| | 00:56 | You can also assign reminders to be done
at specific times or dates and even
| | 01:00 | use a feature called Geofencing which will
trigger reminders based on your location.
| | 01:03 | For example, I'll tap my first reminder
and here I can choose to remind me on a day,
| | 01:07 | and if I turn that on I can choose which day and time.
| | 01:16 | And I'll tap done. When that date and time arrives,
I'll get a notification on my screen
| | 01:19 | and the reminder will appear in my Notifications area.
| | 01:21 | I'll select my other reminder
and here I'll choose to remind me at a location.
| | 01:27 | Now if you've never done this before,
you make it an alert telling you that
| | 01:30 | Reminders wants to use your
current location. I'll tap OK.
| | 01:34 | Later in this course in a movie on privacy,
I'll show you where to manage
| | 01:37 | applications that use your location information.
| | 01:40 | Now once I've allowed that, my phone
determines my current location,
| | 01:42 | which in this case is my office.
| | 01:44 | So, if I wanted to be reminded to fuel
my car after I leave my office,
| | 01:47 | I can leave it set to the current location.
| | 01:50 | I can also tap that location if I wanted to
choose a specific address for my contacts.
| | 01:55 | I can do so by tapping enter in address
to type in address in
| | 01:58 | or I can tap the Plus button to select an
address for my contacts.
| | 02:02 | I'm just going to cancel that for
now and leave my current location.
| | 02:05 | I'll also leave it set to When I leave.
| | 02:07 | So, now when I leave my office an alert
will pop up with of my phone
| | 02:10 | reminding me to stop at the gas station.
| | 02:13 | But be aware that using Geofence
reminders can drain your battery more quickly
| | 02:16 | since your phone will be more vigilant
about tracking your location
| | 02:19 | to see when you're leaving or arriving
at a designated area.
| | 02:21 | It's probably best to only use Geofencing a few hours
or so before you plan on being or leaving somewhere.
| | 02:27 | Each reminder also has a Show More section
where you can assign a priority to your reminder.
| | 02:33 | This doesn't actually do
anything to the reminder.
| | 02:36 | It's just a way for you to
prioritize your reminders for yourself.
| | 02:40 | And if you have any notes you want to
keep about the reminder,
| | 02:42 | you can tap notes and type them in there.
| | 02:46 | Selecting a reminder is also where you
can find the Delete button when you're
| | 02:49 | ready to remove it from your list.
| | 02:53 | You can also click the button in the upper
left-hand corner to view your reminder list.
| | 02:56 | Here you can view your reminders
by the ones you've completed,
| | 02:59 | the ones that are due today or you can view
all your reminders by tapping reminders.
| | 03:03 | You can also create a new list
by tapping Create New List.
| | 03:07 | The calendar at the bottom also scrolls
left and right so you can jump ahead or back
| | 03:10 | to view or add reminders on particular dates.
| | 03:14 | So that's the reminders app built into iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Taking NotesUsing the Notes app| 00:00 | Since you probably carry around your iPhone
most of the time or possibly even your iPod touch.
| | 00:05 | It makes sense that they should have a built-in
app to jot down notes and reminders to yourself.
| | 00:09 | The Notes application is great for
keeping text notes of shopping lists,
| | 00:12 | to-do-lists or any ideas that
suddenly pop into your head.
| | 00:15 | Tap Note to open the app.
| | 00:18 | If you've never used it before,
you'll see a message that says "No notes."
| | 00:22 | If you have used it before the app
will open on the last note you entered.
| | 00:25 | In any case, to create a new note,
tap the plus button.
| | 00:30 | That opens up a new note page,
which looks like a yellow legal pad
| | 00:34 | and the keyboard appears at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:36 | Note also supports landscape view.
| | 00:38 | So, if you want the slightly bigger keyboard
you can turn the iPhone or iPod touch on the side.
| | 00:42 | The downside of that is you'll be
able to see fewer lines of text.
| | 00:45 | And the only thing to do here is type.
| | 00:47 | There's no font sizing, no changing of the background
or customizing of anything else here.
| | 01:00 | When you're done typing, tap Done.
| | 01:03 | To create a new separate note,
tap the Plus button again.
| | 01:23 | I do like to keep many of my various rental car
and hotel member numbers in Notes
| | 01:26 | so I don't have to carry around
all their individual membership cards.
| | 01:32 | Tap Notes to view a list of all of your notes.
| | 01:37 | Tapping a note opens it and when viewing
a note you can add to it
| | 01:41 | just by tapping to place the cursor
where you want to add the line of text.
| | 01:53 | At the bottom of the note you have some buttons.
| | 01:55 | You can move from note to
note using the Arrow buttons.
| | 02:02 | And a particularly useful
feature is the Share button.
| | 02:06 | Where you can choose to email
or print a note or even attach it
| | 02:09 | to a text message or copy it. I'll tap Mail.
| | 02:14 | That opens up a new email message and
places the first line of your note as the
| | 02:18 | subject and the text of
your note in the email's body.
| | 02:20 | You can make any changes or additions
you need to this and then email it off.
| | 02:39 | Just add your recipient and tap Send
and you're popped back into Notes.
| | 02:46 | As you build up your collection of notes over time,
you might need to search through them
| | 02:49 | to find the reminder you left to yourself.
| | 02:51 | Here in the main list of notes, you
can drag down to reveal a Search bar.
| | 02:56 | Then type the word or phrase you're looking for.
| | 03:03 | And the note or notes
containing that word will be displayed.
| | 03:09 | If you want to change the appearance of
your notes, you can go to Settings>Notes.
| | 03:16 | And here you can pick a different font.
| | 03:23 | But that's about the extent of what you
can control about the notes appearance.
| | 03:27 | Now your notes don't have to live
just on your iPhone.
| | 03:30 | You can sync them with certain
services including the iCloud service.
| | 03:34 | If I go into Settings>iCloud,
here I can turn Notes on.
| | 03:44 | Now if you haven't yet created a free @icloud.com
email address, you'll need to do so.
| | 03:48 | So, I'll tap create.
| | 03:53 | And I'll create an Email address.
| | 04:00 | Tap next, and done.
| | 04:05 | And with those turned on in iCloud
you'll be able to view and edit your notes
| | 04:09 | on other devices using the same account.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Voice Memos app| 00:00 | Although the Notes app is great for
jotting down quick notes and lists,
| | 00:03 | some people prefer to speak their thoughts
and ideas instead of typing them out.
| | 00:07 | For one thing, speaking is much faster
than typing in the iPhone keyboard
| | 00:10 | and lets it you get your thoughts out faster.
| | 00:12 | So for those times when you'd rather speak than type,
| | 00:15 | you can use the included Voice Memos app.
| | 00:17 | Now using Voice Memos does require you to
have a microphone which isn't a problem
| | 00:20 | for the iPhone or 4th generation iPod touch and later,
| | 00:23 | since they each have a built-in microphone.
| | 00:25 | And the iPhone also ships with the earbud
headset that includes a microphone as well.
| | 00:29 | But if you have an older iPod touch,
you'll need to purchase a headset with a
| | 00:32 | built-in microphone from Apple or
another vendor or you can buy one of several
| | 00:35 | microphones that plug directly
into the headset track of the iPod.
| | 00:38 | So to use the Voice Memos app,
just tap its icon to open it up.
| | 00:43 | Voice Memos are great when you have a
sudden idea or if you need to record an
| | 00:48 | interview or lecture or even when
your kid says his or her first words.
| | 00:51 | Make sure your iPhone or iPod is
hearing you by speaking a few words
| | 00:54 | like "check, one, two".
| | 00:55 | The little VU meter at the bottom of
the screen should move as you speak.
| | 00:59 | As long as it moves and it doesn't hit the red,
which is a good indication that
| | 01:02 | your recording will probably be distorted,
it will capture what you're recording.
| | 01:06 | Tap the red record button to record
and start speaking
| | 01:08 | or just point the microphone towards
whatever it is you're recording.
| | 01:14 | It turns out the boss' wife's
name is Stephanie not Diana;
| | 01:17 | let's remember that in the future.
| | 01:21 | You can tap the red record button
again at any time to pause the recording
| | 01:24 | whether it is to gather your
thoughts or during a break in an interview.
| | 01:28 | When you tap record again the
recording will pick up where you left off.
| | 01:32 | When you're done recording tap the Stop button.
| | 01:35 | You can view and review all of your
recordings by then clicking what was
| | 01:38 | previously the stop button.
| | 01:40 | The icon looks like this little short list.
| | 01:42 | (clip playing)
| | 01:54 | Now you really couldn't hear my recording
just now but I'm going to tap Speaker
| | 01:57 | and now I can play it again.
| | 01:58 | (clip playing)
| | 02:11 | Now if you're on an iPod touch you
won't have that speaker button because
| | 02:15 | the iPod touch only has a built in speaker
and not an earpiece like the iPhone does,
| | 02:18 | so all sounds will come out of that speaker
unless you have headphones plugged in.
| | 02:22 | Now I cleared my throat at the beginning
of that recording and I recorded a
| | 02:24 | little too much at the end.
| | 02:26 | Fortunately you can trim your recordings
to edit out noises like that at least
| | 02:30 | if they're at the beginning or end of the memo.
| | 02:32 | Tap the blue arrow to
view the details of the memo.
| | 02:36 | And here you can tap Trim Memo and all
you have to do here is drag the beginning
| | 02:40 | or end handles of the recording in
to trim the beginning or end off.
| | 02:44 | So I will drag the beginning handle
in a few seconds.
| | 02:54 | And I'll listen.
| | 02:55 | (clip playing)
| | 02:58 | That was a little too far, just drag out again.
| | 03:00 | (clip playing)
| | 03:11 | So the beginning is pretty good
there now just trim out end a little bit.
| | 03:17 | (clip playing)
| | 03:23 | And once it's trimmed properly
ou can tap Trim Voice memo.
| | 03:27 | Now while where in here I'll mention
that you can also tap the memo details
| | 03:30 | to tag the memo with a label.
| | 03:34 | And when I go back, I can see
the memo label that I just applied.
| | 03:38 | And once you've made a voice memo its
not locked onto your phone.
| | 03:42 | You can move it off your device
in a couple of different ways.
| | 03:45 | With your memo selected you can tap
Share and you can choose Email or Message.
| | 03:51 | If you choose Email the memo will be
attached to a new email message as an
| | 03:54 | M4A audio file, which any recipient will be
able to play back with iTunes or QuickTime.
| | 03:59 | Choose Message to send the
file as a multimedia text message.
| | 04:02 | Again, the recipient's phone will need to be
able to playQuickTime-compatible audio files.
| | 04:07 | Also when you connect your iPhone or
iPod touch to your computer and open iTunes,
| | 04:10 | you can select your device, go to Music
and if you sync your music,
| | 04:18 | you can check Include Voice Memos and that
way when you sync any voice memos you
| | 04:22 | recorded will automatically be
added to a playlist called Voice Memos.
| | 04:26 | So that's how to work with the Voice
Memos app on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. The Other Included AppsPassbook| 00:00 | As you know, your iPhone or iPod touch
comes with a number of preloaded applications
| | 00:04 | and whether you want them or not,
you're stuck with them because they can't be removed.
| | 00:08 | So you might as well get to know them.
| | 00:10 | We've already looked at many of the preloaded
apps in earlier movies and in this chapter
| | 00:14 | we're going to take a look at a couple of apps
that didn't really fit anywhere else.
| | 00:17 | This is not to say these apps are worthless,
far from it, but they are so individual
| | 00:21 | in their purposes and uses that it made sense
just to group them all together in one chapter.
| | 00:25 | The first one I'd like to look at is new
to iOS 6 and it's called Passbook.
| | 00:29 | These days so many aspects of our lives
involve barcodes; from airplane tickets,
| | 00:35 | to movie passes, to coffee shop cards,
to drug store membership cards, and more.
| | 00:37 | You've might have reached the point
where you're carrying half a dozen or so
| | 00:40 | plastic cards on your key chain or wallet.
| | 00:43 | So the idea behind Passbook is to let
you store these items on your phone,
| | 00:46 | which you can then easily
access and scan when you need.
| | 00:49 | The only requirement is that you have an iCloud
account and that it's turned on, on your phone.
| | 00:52 | So for example, I'll open Passbook.
Here's a boarding pass I recently used on a flight.
| | 00:58 | This and my ID was all I needed to get onto my flight.
I didn't have to print out any paper at home,
| | 01:02 | or even stop at the ticket counter
when I got to the airport.
| | 01:05 | I just scanned my iPhone at the security checkpoint
and at the gate and that was it.
| | 01:10 | Notice the pass includes information
about which gate my flight was departing from,
| | 01:13 | the flight number, my seat and so on.
| | 01:16 | This information is regularly updated
automatically so I always have current info.
| | 01:20 | So how do you get a pass into Passbook?
| | 01:22 | Well, there are two main ways;
| | 01:24 | as long as the company is supporting Passbook
passes, and more and more are all the time,
| | 01:28 | you can either visit the company's website through
your phone or through their app if they have one.
| | 01:33 | For example, I have a plastic Starbucks
card I use when I get coffee,
| | 01:37 | but I've also installed the free
Starbucks app on my phone.
| | 01:41 | Now this process is going to vary from
app to app but in this app, I have my
| | 01:44 | card selected, I can see I currently
have $25 on it and here if I tap Manage,
| | 01:51 | one of the options here is Add Card to Passbook.
| | 01:55 | Now for this particular app, I
can also add my favorite stores.
| | 01:58 | This will allow me to tell the app the
stores I frequently visit and then using
| | 02:01 | Geolocation anytime I'm near one of
those stores, I'll see an alert on my lock
| | 02:06 | screen allowing me to open
my Starbucks card on my phone.
| | 02:08 | I'm just going to skip this for now.
| | 02:11 | Here it's just telling me how I can add
those stores later, I can say OK, got it.
| | 02:15 | It's building my pass, it shows
me the card and now I just tap Add.
| | 02:23 | Now it takes me back to the app
but now let's go back to Passbook.
| | 02:30 | And you can see there's my card.
| | 02:31 | So now I've just freed myself of
another piece of plastic in my wallet.
| | 02:34 | When I go to Starbucks now, I can just open
up Passbook and scan my phone to pay.
| | 02:38 | It's super fast and easy.
| | 02:40 | Let me show you a few other things.
| | 02:42 | Each pass has a little info button you can tap.
| | 02:46 | What you see will vary depending
on the pass you're working with.
| | 02:49 | In the case of the Starbucks card, I
can launch the Starbucks app from here
| | 02:52 | and I can turn Automatic Updates On or Off.
| | 02:55 | I'll leave it on so the balance
on my card remains up-to-date.
| | 03:01 | On the back of my boarding passes, I
can also launch the United app, I can turn
| | 03:05 | on Updates and I also have the option of
showing the pass on the lock screen.
| | 03:08 | With that turned on, on the day I'm
travelling, I'll see a notification on my
| | 03:12 | lock screen that I can use to quickly
access the pass just by sliding across
| | 03:16 | the alert rather than having to unlock my phone,
open Passbook and bring up the right pass.
| | 03:21 | It makes it very convenient to
get my boarding pass this way.
| | 03:24 | You can also drag down to update
the information manually.
| | 03:28 | Now it's currently telling me it can't update
this pass because this is an old pass,
| | 03:32 | but if this were for an upcoming flight,
it would connect to the Internet
| | 03:35 | and download my current flight information.
| | 03:37 | I often do this to make sure there
haven't any time or gate changes to my flights.
| | 03:41 | Now I really don't need this boarding
pass anymore, so I can remove it from
| | 03:45 | Passbook by tapping the Trash icon.
| | 03:48 | Once I confirmed by tapping Delete, I
see this fun little shredding animation.
| | 03:54 | And I actually do have two other
boarding passes in here I can get rid off.
| | 04:01 | These were all from the same trip.
| | 04:11 | And now I'm just left with my Starbucks card.
| | 04:14 | Now as I record this movie, there's
unfortunately not a really easy place to
| | 04:17 | find all the apps that support Passbook.
| | 04:19 | Now if you've never used Passbook
and have no passes in it yet,
| | 04:23 | in fact, let me delete my Starbucks for now.
| | 04:25 | Now this is not damaging the card in
anyway or changing my account.
| | 04:29 | All I'm doing here is removing it from
Passbook, and if I want to add it back later,
| | 04:33 | I can just go back to the
Starbucks app and add it back in.
| | 04:40 | So if no passes you'll see this screen
that will take you to the app store
| | 04:43 | where you can browse Passbook-enabled apps.
| | 04:45 | Unfortunately, there's no way to see the
screen once you have some passes in Passbook.
| | 04:51 | But in any case here you can browse
through apps that support Passbook,
| | 04:54 | which you can then install and then use to add
loyalty cards, gifts certificates,
| | 04:58 | movie tickets and so on to your Passbook.
| | 05:02 | You can also search for the term Passbook
on the iTunes store either on your iPhone
| | 05:06 | or through iTunes on your computer
to find apps as well.
| | 05:09 | Also your favorite store or service
might support Passbook through their website
| | 05:12 | if they haven't released an app.
For example,
| | 05:13 | you can visit coupons.com on your
iPhone's browser and you can see they support
| | 05:20 | several different mobile devices and apps here.
| | 05:23 | The first one being Passbook and I can
tap Get Coupons and here I can browse through
| | 05:28 | all the different coupons and
each one has an Add to Passbook button.
| | 05:34 | So if I see a coupon I like to add to Passbook,
I just tap Add to Passbook, I tap Add,
| | 05:46 | and now the coupon is here in Passbook.
| | 05:54 | You also find sites like passsource.com
where you can create your own versions of passes
| | 05:58 | that will work with many retailers
that support barcode scanning.
| | 06:01 | In any case as time goes on, more
and more places will support Passbook.
| | 06:05 | So if you're tired of carrying around a
bunch of cards, be sure to browse around
| | 06:09 | the app store to see if you can move them
to your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 06:12 | By the way if you have multiple devices
like both an iPhone and an iPod touch,
| | 06:16 | as long as you're using the same
iCloud account on each device,
| | 06:21 | you can go to Settings>iCloud
and here make sure Passbook is turned on.
| | 06:28 | That way all of your passes
will be synced between your devices.
| | 06:32 | So that's how to use Passbook new to iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Stocks| 00:00 | Now let's look at the Stocks App, and like
the name implies this app keeps track of stocks.
| | 00:07 | Stocks tracks a couple of default stocks
when you open it,
| | 00:09 | including Apple, Google, and Yahoo.
| | 00:12 | Here you can see the current share price and
how much the price has gone up or down that day.
| | 00:16 | A green box indicates the price went up,
and a red box indicates the price went down.
| | 00:21 | Tap a stock to display its info
at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:25 | Here you will find info like the open and close prices,
the 52-week highs and lows, and the average volume.
| | 00:32 | You can flick over to see a graph
of the stock's performance.
| | 00:35 | The buttons above the graph
let you adjust the time scale.
| | 00:38 | So for instance, you can see how the
stock has performed over the past year,
| | 00:41 | the past six months, the past week, and so on.
| | 00:45 | If you flip your iPhone or iPod touch
into landscape mode,
| | 00:48 | the graph fills out your entire screen.
| | 00:54 | Here in landscape you can flick through to see
the graphs for each of the stocks you are following.
| | 01:01 | The landscape graph also gives you a
larger time scale, for instance I could see
| | 01:06 | how stock has performed for the past two years.
| | 01:08 | Tapping and holding on this graph will
show you that stock's price on a specific day.
| | 01:18 | And placing a second finger on the graph
shows the difference in price for those
| | 01:22 | two days you have selected.
| | 01:28 | If you switch back to portrait orientation,
flicking again shows you another page
| | 01:32 | with links to various news stories, if any,
on the company whose stock you are following.
| | 01:40 | Now of course you probably want to edit the
stocks being tracked unless by some coincidence
| | 01:43 | these are the exact stocks you have an interest in.
| | 01:46 | To change the stocks being followed,
or to add that hot new stock you just bought,
| | 01:49 | click the "i" button in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 01:53 | Now if you want to delete a stock just hit the
red Delete icon and then tap the Delete button.
| | 02:01 | To add a stock, press the Plus button
then type in either the company, market,
| | 02:07 | or index name or, if you know it,
the symbol and hit Search.
| | 02:10 | So for instance, maybe I just bought
some of SanDisk, so I'll type SanDisk.
| | 02:20 | Once you find your stock, select it
and it will be added to the list.
| | 02:28 | You can use the handles to change
the position in the list if you like.
| | 02:33 | Also on this list screen, you can choose the information
you want displayed on the main stock page.
| | 02:38 | You can choose the percent change in the stock,
the current price, or the Mkt Cap.
| | 02:45 | I'll leave Price selected.
| | 02:46 | Once you have your stocks and info set, tap Done.
| | 02:51 | And now on the stock page you can
keep track of all of your stocks.
| | 02:54 | If you find you need even more stock information,
you can tap the Y symbol
| | 02:57 | in the bottom left-hand corner
to open the Yahoo finance page in Safari.
| | 03:02 | And that's how you work
with the Stocks App in iOS 6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Calculator| 00:00 | The Calculator App, like the Stocks App,
is exactly what its name implies. It's a calculator.
| | 00:06 | Upon launch, all your expected
calculator functions are there;
| | 00:09 | addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, plus/minus
| | 00:15 | and the memory addition-subtraction
recall and clear buttons.
| | 00:17 | However, turn your iPhone to Landscape mode
and the calculator expands to a scientific calculator,
| | 00:21 | adding geometric, trigonometric,
and logarithmic functions,
| | 00:26 | as well as calculations for working
with exponents, roots, and factorials.
| | 00:32 | I won't go into the function of each and
every button here, but if you ever need
| | 00:35 | to run a calculation that's of a complexity
between figuring out a tip at dinner
| | 00:39 | and predicting when a rogue comet is
going to hit the Earth,
| | 00:41 | chances are you can use the iPhone's calculator.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Weather| 00:00 | The included Weather App on the iPhone
or iPod touch is a great simple application
| | 00:04 | that lets you check the weather
in up to 20 different locations.
| | 00:08 | This is particularly useful if you travel a lot,
or if you need to know
| | 00:11 | what to pack on a multiple city trip.
| | 00:15 | When you first launch the Weather App,
you should see your local weather.
| | 00:17 | Here you'll see the current temperature,
the hourly temperature below that,
| | 00:21 | which you can scroll horizontally,
as well as the five-day forecast.
| | 00:27 | At the top of the screen, an image of
the current weather situation is displayed.
| | 00:31 | Depending on the weather, you may see
clouds, sunshine, rain, or snow here.
| | 00:36 | If it's currently night time
in the city you are checking out,
| | 00:39 | the current moon phase will also be displayed.
| | 00:41 | You can swipe through and see some of
the default locations, or data location of your own,
| | 00:46 | simply touch the 'i' button
at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:54 | Then either type in the city or the ZIP code
of the location you're looking for.
| | 01:04 | The weather function works internationally,
so typing, say Bethlehem,
| | 01:08 | will get results for cities in the West Bank,
Palestine, as well as in Pennsylvania
| | 01:12 | and other states around the country.
| | 01:14 | I'll select the one in Pennsylvania.
| | 01:17 | Once you found and selected the city you
are looking for it will appear in your list.
| | 01:21 | You can use the handles
to change the order of the cities,
| | 01:26 | and you can also press the red Delete button
to delete any cities you no longer want to track.
| | 01:32 | You can also change the temperature
from Fahrenheit to Centigrade,
| | 01:38 | but once you have got your cities and the
temperature setting the way you want, tap Done.
| | 01:43 | And now you can swipe horizontally
to switch between cities.
| | 01:50 | Lastly, while the Weather App packs a
good amount of information on the screen,
| | 01:53 | if you want an expanded weather forecast,
| | 01:55 | you can click the 'Y' Yahoo logo at the bottom left
| | 01:58 | and the Yahoo weather page will launch in Safari.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. The App StoreBrowsing the App Store through iTunes| 00:00 | Regardless of whether you've been using
an iPhone or iPod touch for a while
| | 00:03 | or you've just started using your first
iOS device, you're probably well aware of
| | 00:07 | the App Store, the one-stop, only game
in town place to browse, purchase and download
| | 00:11 | apps for your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:13 | Yes, the iPhone and iPod touch come
with some great and incredibly useful
| | 00:16 | built-in applications, but let's
face it, these devices are really
| | 00:20 | mini, handheld computers and they are
capable of so much more
| | 00:23 | than just what they do out of the box.
| | 00:25 | And thousands of developers have created, as I record this,
over 700,000 apps and counting for iOS.
| | 00:31 | We've reached the point where if you think
of something you wish the iPhone
| | 00:33 | or iPod touch can do, and it's within the
realm of possibility for it to do so,
| | 00:37 | chances are that one or more developers
have thought of the same idea
| | 00:41 | and created an app for it.
| | 00:42 | It's just a matter of hitting
App Store and performing a search.
| | 00:44 | You can find apps for getting up-to-the
-minute news and weather reports, for
| | 00:48 | coordinating travel plans, for managing
your finances, for finding a new restaurant,
| | 00:52 | for working out and of course you'll find tons of games.
| | 00:55 | That doesn't even come close to doing justice
of the range of applications you can find in the App Store.
| | 01:00 | Now there are two ways to browse,
purchase, and install apps from the App Store.
| | 01:03 | You can do it from iTunes on your computer
or from your iPhone or iPod touch itself,
| | 01:08 | kind of like how you can browse
and purchase music and videos
| | 01:10 | from the iTunes store and both iTunes
or from your device.
| | 01:13 | There are advantages and disadvantages to each.
| | 01:15 | So let's take a look at the process
starting with iTunes on the computer.
| | 01:19 | Begin by selecting the
iTunes Store in your source list.
| | 01:23 | Once a storefront appears,
click Apps at the top of the window.
| | 01:28 | On the main Apps Store page, you'll
always find several lists of featured applications
| | 01:31 | like New and Noteworthy,
Amazing on the iPhone 5, What's Hot,
| | 01:39 | and, because it's currently October as I
recorded this, we see Happy Halloween.
| | 01:42 | On the right-hand side, you'll see a
lot of Top 10 lists
| | 01:45 | for Top Paid apps, Top Free apps
and the Top Grossing apps.
| | 01:49 | So, this is a good page to start if you're just browsing
and not looking for anything in particular.
| | 01:54 | If you know what sort of app you're looking for,
you can narrow down your choices
| | 01:57 | by clicking the arrow next to the Apps Store button
| | 02:01 | and from here, you can select
from several categories of apps.
| | 02:04 | Selecting a new one takes you to a
page featuring just those types of apps.
| | 02:09 | Typically, you'll have the Top Paid and Free apps
listed in the category on the right-hand side.
| | 02:14 | More Featured or New items near the top of the page
and some other lists you can look through.
| | 02:21 | Each one of these categories also has a
See All link which you can click,
| | 02:27 | so in this case, I am seeing all the new business apps.
| | 02:31 | You can also click the Sort By menu
to sort the apps alphabetically by name.
| | 02:34 | Some types of apps are so plentiful and
popular, like games, that they have their
| | 02:41 | own mini homepage, laid out a lot
like the main Apps Store homepage.
| | 02:45 | Again, here you'll find New and
Noteworthy apps, What's Hot,
| | 02:49 | and if I scroll down, you'll see this category
More Games, where you can click on
| | 02:54 | over a dozen different game genres
to continue your search.
| | 02:56 | But let's say I'm interested in a fitness-related app.
| | 02:59 | I'll select Health & Fitness and I'm taken to that page.
| | 03:02 | Now I could browse my way through the
hundreds or thousands of apps in this category,
| | 03:05 | but since I'm looking for something specific,
I probably want to perform a search instead.
| | 03:10 | Let's say I'm looking for an app
that will help me track my runs.
| | 03:13 | So up in the Search bar, I'll type running.
| | 03:18 | Now that gives me results for
Podcasts, Albums and Music as well as Apps.
| | 03:23 | I'll click Apps under Filter by Media Type,
so I'm just looking at Apps.
| | 03:26 | Now I see six featured and popular iPhone apps.
| | 03:29 | But again, I can also click See All
to see all of my results.
| | 03:34 | Now unless you know of a specific app
you want to check out,
| | 03:37 | you're still probably going to have to browse through
many screens of apps to narrow down your selection.
| | 03:41 | You can check out the details of any app by clicking it.
| | 03:44 | I'll check out this one called runtastic.
| | 03:47 | So, this is the detail screen for this app.
| | 03:49 | Every app has a detail screen where
you can read the app's description,
| | 03:52 | what's new in the latest version of the app,
see screen shots from the app
| | 03:56 | itself to get a sense of what it actually looks like
and under that you'll find Customer Reviews.
| | 04:00 | These are generally reviews from people who
have downloaded and used the app themselves.
| | 04:04 | It's a really useful way to get a sense
of how good the app is beyond what the
| | 04:07 | developer puts in the description themselves.
| | 04:10 | Apple does screen every app that
appears in the Store, but that's mostly for
| | 04:12 | technical issues and to make sure
an app doesn't violate any policies.
| | 04:16 | So many subpar apps do make it onto the store.
| | 04:18 | The Customer Reviews can be a good
defense against purchasing a poorly functioning
| | 04:21 | or a just plain bad app.
| | 04:24 | But if after reading the description
and checking out the reviews,
| | 04:27 | you're interested enough to download the app,
scroll back up to the top
| | 04:31 | and this is where you'll find the button
to purchase the app.
| | 04:33 | It will either be labeled with the apps price
or it will say free app
| | 04:36 | if the app you're looking is free
and many of them are.
| | 04:39 | Now we'll look at the purchasing and downloading
process in its own upcoming movie,
| | 04:43 | but that's the basics of browsing
the Apps Store through iTunes.
| | 04:45 | Next, we'll take a look at how the process
works on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing the App Store on the iPhone or iPod touch| 00:00 | Overall, it's probably easier and more efficient
to browse and shop the Apps Store from iTunes
| | 00:04 | because you can use a mouse, a real keyboard
and you have more screen real estate to browse with.
| | 00:10 | But I probably bought the majority
of my apps from my iPhone
| | 00:13 | simply because I've had it with me
while waiting for a plane
| | 00:15 | or sitting in a hotel lobby
waiting to meet someone.
| | 00:17 | Now this isn't to say that browsing for
apps is difficult on the iPhone either,
| | 00:21 | it's a smaller screen interface, but
you can still find the exact same apps
| | 00:24 | and see the exact same details
for each app as you can through iTunes.
| | 00:27 | So to browse the Apps Store from your
iPhone or iPod touch, tap the Apps Store icon.
| | 00:33 | Across the bottom of the screen,
you'll see five buttons that offer different
| | 00:35 | ways for browsing through the store.
| | 00:37 | The first item is Featured.
| | 00:39 | This is where you'll find the apps
that Apple is currently recommending.
| | 00:42 | This collection is updated often and
it's a good area to get a broad scope
| | 00:45 | of many different types of apps.
| | 00:48 | At the top of Featured, you'll usually
find a scrolling banner and under that
| | 00:51 | you'll find categories like New and Noteworthy,
which shows you the newest apps at the store.
| | 00:56 | In this case, we see Amazing on iPhone 5,
see a couple different banners,
| | 01:01 | What's Hot and, in this case, Happy Halloween.
| | 01:04 | You can flick through each of these categories
horizontally to browse through them.
| | 01:10 | Tap See All next to any category to see
more items in that list
| | 01:16 | and then tap any app to read more about it.
| | 01:19 | Here, we see the same details we saw on iTunes.
| | 01:22 | We can see screen shots of the app,
we can read a Description,
| | 01:32 | we can see What's New in the current version
and some information about the app itself.
| | 01:37 | We can read Costumer Reviews
and we can also browse Related apps.
| | 01:44 | The next section at the bottom
of the screen is Charts.
| | 01:47 | Here, you'll find the top apps in the
categories of Paid, meaning apps that cost money,
| | 01:51 | Free and Top Grossing, which shows the apps
that have earned the most money.
| | 01:55 | Again, you can scroll any of these lists horizontally
or tap See All to expand the category.
| | 02:00 | Next is Genius. This works a lot like the Genius
feature in iTunes for creating music playlists.
| | 02:05 | In iTunes, the Genius feature examines a
song of your choice and then creates a playlist
| | 02:09 | of similar songs automatically.
| | 02:10 | In the Apps Store, the Genius feature
examines the apps you've previously downloaded
| | 02:13 | and then makes recommendations
for other apps you might like.
| | 02:17 | But in order to protect your privacy,
Genius is off by default.
| | 02:20 | Some people don't like the idea of
sharing information about what apps
| | 02:23 | they have purchased, but all Genius really does
is look at what you've purchased
| | 02:26 | and offer recommendations based on the
purchases of other people who have
| | 02:29 | alsobought the same apps you have.
| | 02:31 | So, you can tap Turn On Genius to turn it on.
| | 02:34 | You'll be prompted to enter your iTunes password,
so do so.
| | 02:39 | You'll have to agree to the Terms and Conditions.
| | 02:45 | Then I can tap Done and then
you'll see a list of apps you might like.
| | 02:49 | One really nice touch here is that you're told e
xactly on what other app
| | 02:53 | this recommendation is being made.
| | 02:54 | So you can see in this case,
this is based on iMovie, I have that installed.
| | 02:58 | This particular app is being based on Hipstamatic,
another app I have installed.
| | 03:01 | So this is another method
you might find useful to find apps.
| | 03:04 | The fourth category here is Search
and this works a lot like the Search bar
| | 03:08 | in iTunes on your computer, only instead
of searching the entire store,
| | 03:12 | the Search bar here only searches the Apps Store,
which makes sense since you're obviously
| | 03:15 | looking for apps if you're in the Apps Store.
| | 03:17 | Just type in your search term, for example,
| | 03:21 | now, you'll be offered some suggestions below that.
| | 03:23 | You can either tap one of the suggestions
to search that term or tap the Search button
| | 03:26 | on the keyboard to search for
the word or phrase you've typed
[00:03:3016]
and after a moment, your search results will
appear in this horizontally scrolling list.
| | 03:37 | Now here's one area where think it's much
easier to work on your computer in iTunes.
| | 03:41 | You can see here at the bottom of the screen
that there are over 1600 results for my search
| | 03:44 | and the only way to browse through them here
is to keep flicking to the left.
| | 03:48 | In iTunes, it's much easier
to see multiple app results at once.
| | 03:52 | So unless I narrow down my search terms, I'd have
to keep flicking one app at a time to see them all,
| | 03:58 | but if you do find one that looks interesting, again,
| | 04:00 | you can tap to see its details, and again we can
check out its Details, Reviews and Related apps.
| | 04:07 | Again, this is all the same information
you'll find in iTunes on your computer.
| | 04:10 | The last button at the bottom of the screen is Updates.
| | 04:13 | Most developers frequently release updates
to their apps,
| | 04:15 | usually to fix bugs or to add new features.
| | 04:18 | In the Updates area, you'll find any apps
you've installed that have updates available.
| | 04:22 | You'll be able to read about the updates
if you want to know what's new or changed
| | 04:25 | and you can install updates on an app-by-app basis.
| | 04:29 | If there are multiple apps to update,
you'll see and Update All button here
| | 04:32 | so you can update all of your apps at once.
| | 04:33 | This is also where you'll find the Purchased area.
| | 04:37 | This provides you a handy list of all the apps
you have ever downloaded.
| | 04:40 | You can see it's categorized into All Apps,
so you can see all the apps you've ever downloaded
| | 04:45 | and Not on This Phone,
| | 04:49 | which can be convenient if you want to see
the apps that you've purchased,
| | 04:50 | but haven't yet put on this particular device.
| | 04:52 | To download any of the apps that you
haven't yet installed in this phone,
| | 04:55 | just tap the Download button.
| | 04:57 | You can see now that the app is installing.
| | 04:59 | So, that's gist browsing the Apps Store
from your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 05:03 | Coming up, we'll take a look at
how to purchase and install apps
| | 05:06 | once you find something that you'd like to try out.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Purchasing apps| 00:00 | Once you've found an app you want to have on
your iPhone or iPod, the next step is to purchase it,
| | 00:04 | if it's not a free app, and install it on your device.
| | 00:07 | Whether an app costs money or whether it's free,
the process for acquiring the app is the same.
[00:00:11 .42]
You can purchase and install on either the iPhone
or the iPod touch or from iTunes on your computer.
| | 00:16 | Let's look at both ways starting
with the iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:19 | So I've performed a search for running on the
iTunes Store and I found an app I want to check out.
| | 00:23 | I'll tap it to see its details.
| | 00:27 | So again on the Details page, you can read about the app,
see some screen shots and read some reviews.
| | 00:32 | Also, note at the bottom of the Details page
you can see how large the app is,
| | 00:35 | which is handy for seeing how much space it
will take up on your iPhone or iPod touch.
| | 00:39 | In this case, I can see this app is 21.3 megabytes.
| | 00:42 | Now as I'm recording this movie, any
apps that are over 50 megabytes in size,
| | 00:46 | can't be downloaded without a Wi-Fi connection.
| | 00:50 | So if you're on an iPhone and your
only current connection to the Internet is
| | 00:52 | your cellular network, and you try to
download an app over 50 megabytes,
| | 00:55 | you will get a message saying it's not allowed
and to connect to a Wi-Fi network v
| | 00:58 | or to download the app through iTunes.
| | 01:01 | iPod touch users won't see this message because
Wi-Fi is the only way to get the iPod touch online.
| | 01:05 | Speaking of the iPod touch, be aware
that some apps, especially those
| | 01:08 | that take advantage of the iPhone's GPS capabilities,
might not work with or be designed for the iPod touch.
| | 01:13 | Be sure to read the details of apps carefully
to make sure they'll work with the iPod touch.
| | 01:17 | If you have doubts, you can try contacting
the developer or checking out their website
| | 01:21 | before spending money on an app
you might not be able to use.
| | 01:24 | But if you know the app will work and
it's under 50 megabytes if you're using an iPhone,
| | 01:27 | you can scroll back up to the top
and the button here is either going to
| | 01:31 | have a price in it if the app costs money
or it will say Free as this one does.
| | 01:35 | Tap the button once.
| | 01:38 | It turns into an Install App button, which basically acts
to confirm that you really meant to tap the button.
| | 01:42 | Go ahead and tap Install App.
| | 01:44 | You'll see it changes to Installing.
| | 01:46 | Now you may be prompted to enter your Apple ID
nd password if you haven't done so recently.
| | 01:50 | This prevents unauthorized installations
of apps on your device and it also lets
| | 01:53 | iTunes keep track of your purchases,
which among other things, lets you redownload
| | 01:57 | and install them later in case you delete them
or if you lose your device
| | 02:00 | and need to reinstall your apps on a new one.
| | 02:02 | After you enter your info, your app
should start downloading.
| | 02:05 | If you leave the Apps Store, you'll see the
icon for your new app appear on your device.
| | 02:09 | You can see that the app I just installed
has its new banner attached to it.
| | 02:13 | Once I open it, that banner will go away.
| | 02:15 | So, app purchases, made from your iPhone or iPod touch,
are immediately installed onto your device.
| | 02:20 | Now let's look at the purchasing and installation process
from iTunes on your computer.
| | 02:24 | Here in iTunes I am in the Apps Store
and I found an app I'd like to install on my iPhone.
| | 02:29 | This is Google Earth, a very cool mobile version
of the Google Earth program,
| | 02:32 | which lets you see sites all over the world.
| | 02:35 | This is also a free app so here in iTunes,
I just click where it says Free App
| | 02:39 | and then I enter my Apple ID and
Password when prompted to do so.
| | 02:46 | I can see, under the downloads area,
that the app is currently downloading.
| | 02:49 | And here, I can keep an eye on the
progress of the download, and it's done.
| | 02:53 | Once the download is complete, you'll find the app
in the Apps section of your iTunes Library.
| | 02:58 | If you don't see apps listed,
go to iTunes>Preferences.
| | 03:00 | If you're on Windows go to Edit>Preferences
and here under General, make sure Apps is selected.
| | 03:08 | Now I see Apps and there is Google Earth.
| | 03:12 | Now at this point, I've downloaded the app to iTunes,
but it hasn't yet been installed on my iPhone.
| | 03:16 | To install that, I select my iPhone,
which is currently connected to my computer
| | 03:19 | then I can go to Apps
and then I'll have to check Sync Apps.
| | 03:24 | Now I'm free to browse through all of the
apps I've installed here in iTunes in this column.
| | 03:29 | And to the right, I have an exact representation
of the current layout of my iPhone Apps.
| | 03:33 | One of the ways I can install Google Earth
right now is to just drag it
| | 03:35 | right to where I want it to appear on my phone.
| | 03:41 | You can also drag the App icon over one of any
of the other screens to place the icon on that screen.
| | 03:47 | While you're in here, you can also
rearrange your other app icons
| | 03:50 | by dragging them around on the screen.
| | 03:52 | Once you've dragged in all the apps you
want to install and arranged them as you like,
| | 03:54 | you can click Apply or Sync.
| | 03:57 | During the sync process, any apps you install directly
from the Apps Store on your iPhone or iPod touch,
| | 04:02 | will be copied over into iTunes
so you'll havethem backed up here.
| | 04:05 | Now you'll notice this message asking me if I want
to turn on Automatic Downloads for this computer.
| | 04:10 | If I turn on this feature, any apps that I purchase
on my other devices using my same Apple ID,
| | 04:14 | will automatically be downloaded to this computer.
| | 04:17 | I'm just going to say Not Now at this point,
but it is a convenient feature to have
| | 04:20 | if you want to make sure you have
copies of all your apps on your computer.
| | 04:24 | Now while this is syncing, I will also mention
that if you ever want
| | 04:26 | to uninstall any apps, and you mostly likely
will at some point
| | 04:29 | because you should have run some apps you don't like,
just hover your mouse over the app you want to remove,
| | 04:34 | click the X button and the next time you hit Apply
or Sync that will remove it from your iPhone.
| | 04:40 | The app will stay here in iTunes though
in case you ever want to reinstall it again.
| | 04:44 | The only apps that you can't uninstall are
the ones that come built into your device.
| | 04:48 | So if you never want to use, say the Stocks app,
you're still stuck with it.
| | 04:52 | What you might want do is drag all your
least used apps to the last screen on your phone
| | 04:58 | so they're not taking up space where
ou could place apps you actually use.
| | 05:02 | Now you can also rearrange and uninstall
apps from your iPhone or iPod touch itself.
| | 05:06 | To rearrange your apps, touch and hold down
on any icon until they all go into this wiggly mode.
| | 05:12 | This is your cue to start dragging icons around
anywhere you like just like you can do in iTunes.
| | 05:19 | You can drag icons from screen to screen
just by dragging them to the edge of the screen
| | 05:23 | and then dropping them.
| | 05:24 | So, you can see there's that last screen
where I placed Stocks and that's also
| | 05:28 | where I'm going to place Game Center in this case.
| | 05:30 | Remember that the area at the bottom of the screen
is for storing your foremost used apps.
| | 05:34 | These icons stay visible no matter
which screen you're on.
| | 05:37 | So, if you do check your email all the time, you'll
probably want to keep your email icon there as well,
| | 05:42 | but maybe I watch more videos than I play music
| | 05:45 | so I'll take music out and place videos there.
| | 05:51 | To delete an app, simply tap its X button.
| | 05:55 | You'll be asked to confirm
that you do want to delete the app.
| | 05:58 | I'll tap Delete and it's gone.
| | 06:00 | Remember, you can always reinstall the app again
from iTunes or through the Apps Store on your device.
| | 06:05 | Press the Home button to stop the apps from
wiggling around when you're done rearranging them.
| | 06:09 | Bear in mind though that when you delete an app,
you'll most likely loose specific preferences for that app.
| | 06:14 | Again, you can only delete the apps
that you've downloaded and installed,
| | 06:17 | the apps that come with the iPhone can't be removed.
| | 06:20 | Okay. So that's how you download and
manage apps from the Apps Store.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding app settings| 00:00 | Like most computer applications,
iOS apps generally have some collection
| | 00:04 | of preferences or settings to customize
how they look and behave.
| | 00:07 | Sometimes these settings are stored and
controlled in the apps themselves,
| | 00:11 | but sometimes they're controlled elsewhere.
| | 00:13 | It really depends on the app,
but you can easily find out which apps
| | 00:16 | have external preference settings by going
to Settings on your iPhone or iPod touch
| | 00:20 | and in here, just scroll down
towards the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:23 | Below all the built-in system settings,
you'll find the list of all the apps
| | 00:27 | that use this location to store their preference settings.
| | 00:31 | Just tap anyone to access that app's settings.
| | 00:37 | Again, not all apps store their preferences here,
but if they're not here, they're in the app itself,
| | 00:41 | so you shouldn't have any trouble
finding them in one place or another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Important SettingsAirplane mode| 00:00 | In this Chapter, we're going to look at some
of the important settings and preferences
| | 00:03 | that we didn't cover in the earlier chapters
or that we didn't look at very closely.
| | 00:07 | Let's tap Settings.
| | 00:09 | The first setting on the iPhone
and iPod touch is Airplane mode.
| | 00:12 | Airplane mode simply turns off your
iPhone's cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth radios.
| | 00:16 | It does the same for the iPod with the
exception of the cellular radio,
| | 00:19 | which the iPod doesn't have.
| | 00:21 | Notice how the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth settings
are now set to Off.
| | 00:24 | If I scroll down a little, the phone setting
has faded back and it also says Airplane mode.
| | 00:29 | The other indicator that I'm in Airplane mode
is the little Airplane icon
| | 00:32 | in the upper left-hand corner which stays
there as long as you're in Airplane mode.
| | 00:36 | So, Airplane mode means that your iPhone
is not transmitting any kind of data
| | 00:39 | and it can't connect to the Internet or receive calls.
| | 00:42 | This is useful not only if you believe
that cellphone signals interfere
| | 00:45 | with airplane communications and other
functions, but also if you want to save
| | 00:48 | battery power on a long cross-country plane ride.
| | 00:50 | If you're out of range of a cell phone tower,
your iPhone will keep searching for a signal,
| | 00:54 | which will quickly drain the battery.
| | 00:56 | Airplane mode basically tells your phone
to give up the search and you can save the battery
| | 01:00 | for watching videos, playing games,
or taking pictures of other people on the plane.
| | 01:04 | It's important to note that
once you turn Airplane mode on,
| | 01:07 | which again shuts down Wi-Fi among other things,
you can then turn Wi-Fi back on.
| | 01:12 | Many airlines offer in-flight Wi-Fi networks
these days, so if you want to be able
| | 01:15 | to connect to the Wi-Fi network on your plane,
but stay in compliance with federal regulations
| | 01:18 | about keeping your phone turned off,
| | 01:21 | just turn on Airplane mode
and then turn Wi-Fi back on.
| | 01:23 | You don't have to be on an airplane
to use Airplane mode.
| | 01:26 | Again, turn it on to conserve your battery
or when you don't want to be disturbed
| | 01:29 | while you're watching a video or listening to music.
| | 01:32 | Anything, that doesn't rely on connecting
to the Internet or the phone part of iPhone,
| | 01:35 | will still work in Airplane mode.
| | 01:37 | Once you're ready to start receiving
communications again, turn Airplane mode off.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Wi-Fi| 00:00 | As I mentioned in the first chapter,
your device will remember networks you've
| | 00:03 | previously connected to
and automatically reconnect to them.
| | 00:06 | This is a convenience so you don't have
to constantly go through a series of menus
| | 00:09 | to connect to a network you've already been on.
| | 00:13 | If the Wi-Fi network has a unique name,
this is just fine, but if you're guilty
| | 00:16 | of leaving your Wi-Fi router's name at
its default setting, for example,
| | 00:20 | you can be almost certain to find multiple Wi-Fi
networks with the name Linksys or even Wireless,
| | 00:23 | your iPhone won't be able to
tell the difference between one Wi-Fi
| | 00:27 | network named Wireless and another and
will happily connect to any router with
| | 00:30 | that name whenever you are within range of one.
| | 00:32 | In some cases, that will be okay and
you'll just end up leeching off someone
| | 00:35 | else's network with the same name.
| | 00:37 | But occasionally, your iPhone or iPod
touch will connect to an identically named
| | 00:39 | Wi-Fi network that has other settings,
which might not let you connect to the
| | 00:43 | Internet even though it allowed you to
connect to the Wi-Fi network itself.
| | 00:46 | In those cases, it can be confusing
when you see a strong Wi-Fi connection
| | 00:49 | indicated on your device while being
completely unable to open a web page,
| | 00:53 | check your email or connect
to the Internet in anyway.
| | 00:56 | If you run into this problem, open your Wi-Fi Settings
and check which network you're connected to.
| | 01:00 | You might recognize a network name identical to
one you normally connect to at home or elsewhere.
| | 01:05 | Now if one is available, try selecting a
different network and getting online again.
| | 01:08 | Another option is to tap the blue
arrow next the network that's giving you
| | 01:11 | problems and then tap Forget
this Network and then tap Forget.
| | 01:15 | That makes your iPhone or iPod touch stop
automatically connecting to networks with this name.
| | 01:20 | So, if you're used to connecting to a Wi-Fi network
named Wireless while you're at home
| | 01:23 | and you run into another network
named Wireless while on a trip
| | 01:26 | that your iPhone keeps connecting to,
you can tap Forget this Network.
| | 01:29 | You'll have to reconnect to your own
network again once get home, but at least
| | 01:32 | your phone won't keep automatically connecting
to the wrong one while you're on your trip.
| | 01:36 | Another scenario, in which you might
find it useful to forget a network,
| | 01:39 | is if you've ever paid for Wi-Fi in a public place.
| | 01:42 | For example, in some businesses like
hotels and coffee shops, you have to first
| | 01:46 | connect to a Wi-Fi network which then
redirects you to a page
| | 01:49 | where you have to enter your credit card
number to purchase access time.
| | 01:52 | If you do this one time in a hotel,
the next time you're in the same hotel
| | 01:55 | or even in another property from the same
chain, that has the same Wi-Fi network name,
| | 02:00 | your iPhone and iPod touch will automatically
connect to that network
| | 02:02 | and you'll be unable to access the
Internet without paying again.
| | 02:05 | But if you're on an iPhone and just
want to use the cellular network to quickly
| | 02:09 | check your email, go into your Wi-Fi
Settings and tap Forget this Network
| | 02:12 | to make your phone stop trying to
connect to it or alternately, turn Wi-Fi off
| | 02:16 | which will make your Internet
connection default to the cellular network.
| | 02:20 | Another behavior you might find annoying
when you're out and a |
|
|
